By Al Kline DPM
The Jones fracture was first described by Sir Robert Jones in 1902 after sustaining the fracture during a Maypole dance. It has also been called a dancers fracture. The fracture is usually the result of stressed inversion and plantarflexion of the foot. Sir Robert Jones treated his fracture conservatively, with good results. However, over the years, there has been some controversy over when to treat the Jones fracture conservatively versus surgically. There has also been some confusion over what consititutes a true ‘Jones’ fracture. There are a number of reports in the literature sighting the high incidence of non-union in Jones fracture. It is thought that the significant tendonous pull of the peroneus longus and brevis tendon accompanied by the inherent decreased vascularity to the styloid process can lead to a high incidence of non-unions. High rates of non-union can also be due to improper determination for surgical intervention or when surgical intervention was not performed early enough. Stress fractures have also been shown to progress to more involved cortical fractures that can also lead to non-unions or refracture. Ortiguera and Fischer reported up to 50% non-union rate after 2 months of conservative casting in athletes treated for Jones fractures. In a randomized study, Mologne et al reported a 44% failure rate including non-union, delayed union and refractures after conservative casting for Jones Fractures.
When is conservative treatment preferred over surgical treatment and vice-versa? It is the authors attempt in this article to introduce a simple classification for determination of conservative versus surgical treatment of a Jones fracture.
Anatomy
It is important to review the anatomy to the base of the fifth metatarsal. The metatarsal is divided into the metatarsal head, distal metaphysis, central diaphysis and proximal body of the fifth metatarsal base and its most proximal styloid process or tuberosity. Cadaveric studies by Theodorou et al showed how the anatomical attachments of the plantar aponeurosis and the peroneal tendons can influence fracture pathogensis at the tuberosity. The entire styloid process and body of the base of the metatarsal is encompassed by broad fibrous bands formed by fibers converging from the lateral component of the plantar aponeurosis and fibers of the peroneal brevis tendon. There are also ligamentous structures inserting into the proximal portion of the tuberosity. There is an anterior frenular ligament extending from the long peroneal tendon to the base of the fifth metatarsal. This would suggest strong ligamentous and tendonous structures that can cause spontaneous avulsion of the styloid process or even body fractures to the fifth metatarsal base on stress. Because of these stresses , it is the authors opinion that any fracture to the styloid process or base of the fifth metatarsal should be fixated or reduced surgically. It is also my opinion that metatarsal stress fractures involving the fifth metatarsal distal to the body of the fifth metatarsal base, should also be repaired surgically.
When we look closer at the base of the fifth metatarsal, the fracture region of the metatarsal is divided into three distinct regions: 1) the most proximal tuberosity or styloid process (T), 2) the body to the base of the fifth metatarsal (B) and 3) the tubular surface just distal to the body of the base of the fifth metatarsal extending into the diaphysis (D).
In reviewing the literature, these ‘zones’ differ and some are delineated by distance from the end of the bone. For instance, fractures that are within 1.5 cm to the end of the styloid process is considered a ‘avulsion’ fracture. Anything distal to that is a ‘metatarsal’ fracture.
There has also been 3 zones of fracture descrbed in metatarsal base fractures: 1) zone of tuberosity fracture, 2) zone of Jones fracture and 3) zone of diaphyseal stress fracture.
For our simplified classification, it is fractures that involve the styloid process that are considered true ‘avulsion’ fractures (T). Fractures to the body of the fifth metatarsal base are considered ‘base fractures’ (B) and fractures distal to the body of the fifth metatarsal base are considered ‘metatarsal’ or diaphyseal fractures (D). In most of the literature, this is also the most common region for stress fractures associated with a Jones fracture.
History of Classifications for Jones Fracture
Historically, there are basically three types of proximal fifth metatarsal fractures 1) avulsion type, 2) fractures within 1.5cm of the tuberosity or styloid process or body fracture and 3) diaphyseal stress fractures. A number of classifications have been sited over the years to differentiate the types of fractures to include 1) type of fracture and 2) whether the fifth metatarsal cuboid articulation is involved (intra-articular fracture). One of the first classifications we learned in podiatry was the
I. M. Stewart Classification. Stewart described a simple classification (Type 1A, 1B, 2A and 2B) and a radiographic classification (Types 1-5). Torg also described a classification (Type 1-3) outlining that conservative treatment is indicated for Type 1, conservative and sometimes surgical treatment for Type 2, and always surgical treatment for Type 3 fractures (nonunions that have intermedullar sclerosing).
Torg Classification
Type 1- No signs of intramedullary sclerosis, a sharp, well-delineated fracture line and minimal cortical hypertrophy.
Type 2- A fracture line that involves both cortices with associated periosteal new bone, a widened fracture line with adjacent radiolucency related to bone resorption and evidence of intramedullary sclerosis.
Type 3- A wide fracture line is seen with periosteal new bone and radiolucency, and complete obliteration of the medullary canal at the fracture site by sclerotic bone.
Stewart Classification
Type 1A – A noncomminuted fracture at the junction of the metatarsal shaft and base.
Type 1B- A fracture at the junction of the shaft and base that is comminuted.
Type 2A –A fracture of the styloid process without articular involvement.
Type 2B – A fracture of the styoid process with articular involvement.
I.M. Stewart also described a radiographic classification attempting to include not only fracture type, but its mechanism of injury.
Stewarts Radiographic Classification
Type 1- Fracture between the epiphysis and diaphysis, Supra-articular fracture caused by internal rotation of the forefoot while base of the fifth metatarsal remains fixed to the ground.
Type 2- Fractures that are intra-articular with one of more fracture lines. This may include comminuted fractures with displacement of these fragments dependant on the extent of damage to the capsule and/or ligaments. This is a fracture type usually caused by shearing forces and internal rotation of the forefoot while the peroneus brevis is contracted.
Type 3- Epiphyseal fractures that are extra-articular. The fracture lines are usually at right angles with the long axis of the fifth metatarsal. This fracture is cause by a sudden, sharp contracture of the peroneal brevis tendon.
Type 4- Traumatic, comminuted fracture to the base of the fifth metatarsal. Mechanism of injury is a crushing force between the cuboid and the ground or shoe caused by direct or indirect trauma.
Type 5- Fractures of children. A partial avulsion fracture of the epiphysis with or without fracture line or hir line as in type 2 fractures.
Introduction of Simplified Classification
Fractures to the base of the fifth metatarsal has been classified as acute fractures and chronic fractures. Acute fractures is associated with acute injury such as twisting or inverting or plantarflexing the foot. This can occur from accidents such as stepping in holes, running, falls and in sports for example. Chronic injuries usually occur in sports such as running. These injuries manifest themselves as stress fractures associated with prodromal pain. The premise to introduce a new classification is based on the high incidence of nonunion and refracture, even in the presence of early stress fractures. Simple stress fractures of the fifth proximal metatarsal can lead to more progressive fracture of the fifth metatarsal base if under treated. This is likely due to the dynamic forces that travel through the fifth metatarsal base that makes it unique amoung the other metatarsals. These fractures have been surgically treated with percutaneous intermedullary screws in athletes. They have reported that earlier intervention will allow athletes to return to pre-injury status earlier. Of course, without proper treatment, there is a high incidence of non-unions and residual swelling and pain that is reported from patients long after they sustained a Jones fracture.
The Simple Classification
Stage 1: No signs of fracture, but pain following acute or chronic injury to the structures attached to the base of the fifth metatarsal and is symptomatic.
Treatment: Conservative casting for 6 weeks with complete non-weight bearing.
Stage 2: Stress fracture to any part of the base of the fifth metatarsal including diaphysis, body and/or tuberosity.
Treatment: Open reduction and internal fixation using percutaneous intermedullary screw to prevent overt fractures and promote stability and quicker recovery.
Stage 3: Overt fractures that involves the body to the base of the fifth metatarsal, styloid process, intra or extra articular, either one or two cortices, regardless of symptomatology.
Treatment: All of these fractures should be fixated though standard ORIF techniques including pinning, plating and solitary dynamic compression or tension banding.
Radiographs highlighting early stress fracture that can progress to overt fracture. Here, is an example of intermedullary screw fixation as described by Cedric J. Ortiguera, MD and David A. Fischer, MD (Ortiguera, C, et al: A Review of the Current Treatment for Fracture of the Proximal Fifth Metatarsal as First Described by Jones Orthopedic Technology Review 2 (4), 2000)
Discussion
Patient symptomatology and radiographic/MRI findings play an important role in the decision to perform surgery. For instance, a patient that presents with localized pain to the proximal fifth metatarsal, but no avulsion fracture or stress fracture to the fifth metatarsal either after acute or chronic injury, will likely respond very well to conservative bracing and casting. If a stress fracture is suspected and not obviously seen on radiograph , a differential of peroneal tendonitis versus actual stress fracture should be ruled out. The MRI could be ordered to get a more definitive diagnosis in that case. It must be said, however, that under-treatment of this condition may lead to fracture and avulsion due to the weight bearing forces exerted through the base of the fifth metatrasal on gait. In the stage 2, if the stress fracture is seen on radiograph or MRI and is painful, intermedullary screw compression is indicated. Conservative casting could be attempted, however there is a probability of non or delayed union if in the area of the styloid or body of the fifth metatarsal base. Refracture or more pronounced fracture may also result. In the stage 3 fracture, all attempts at surgical correction should be attempted initially without the need for conservative casting. An attempt at casting a styloid fracture that encompasses either one or two cortices, will likely lead to non-union and improper healing of the fracture. Early surgical intervention using standard ORIF techniques is recommended. Once the fracture is fixated, proper non-weight bearing in a posterior splint for 2 weeks and a short leg cast for 4 to 6 weeks is the authors recommendation.
Conclusion:
The Jones fracture is a common fracture seen through the office or emergency room. Lack of early intervention and improper treatment of this fracture has led to a high incidence of delayed unions, non-unions and refractures. A simple classification system is introduced which stresses the need for earlier surgical intervention in stress related and more overt fractures to the base of the fifth metatarsal. Earlier recognition of stress related injuries and appropriate intervention will lead to a more rapid recovery.
References: Mologne, TS: Early Screw Fixation Versus casting in the Treatment of Acute Jones Fractures. The American Journal of Sports Medicine 33:970-975. 2005
Ortiguera, C, et al: A Review of the Current Treatment for Fracture of the Proximal Fifth Metatarsal as First Described by Jones Orthopedic Technology Review 2 (4), 2000 Strayer, S. et al: Fractures of the Proximal Fifth Metatarsal American Family Physician 59: 9 , 1999.
Jones, R. Fractures of the Fifth Metatarsal Bone,
Liverpool med. Surg. J. 42: 103-107,1902 Jones, R. Fracture of the Base of the Fifth Metatarsal Bone by Indirect Violence, Ann. Surg. 35: 697-700, 1902Stewart, I.M. Jone’s Fracture: Fracture of Base of Fifth Metatarsal Clini. Orthop. 16:190-198, 1960 Dameron, T.B. Fracture and Anatomical Variations of the Proximal Portion of the Fifth Metatarsal JBJS 57A: 788-792, 1975.
Kavanaugh, J.H., et al. The Jones Fracture Revisited JBJS 60A: 776-782, 1978 Pearson, J.B. Fractures of the Base of the Fifth Metatarsal Br. Med J. 1: 1052-1054, 1962
Peltier, L.F. Eponymic Fractures: Robert Jones and Jone’s Fracture, Surgery 71: 522-526, 1972. Stone, M.M. Avulsion Fracture of the base of the Fifth metatarsal, Am.J. Orthop. Surg. 10: 190-193, 1968.
Torg, J.S., et al Fracture of the Base of the Fifth Metatarsal Distal to the Tuberosity: Classification and Guidelines for Nonsurgical and Surgical management. JBJS 66A: 209-214, 1984. Zelko, R.R. et al Proximal Diaphyseal Fracture of the Fifth Metatarsal: Treatment of the Fractures and their Complications in Athletes. Am. J. Sports. Med. 7: 95-101, 1979.
Pritsch, M., et al An Unusual Fracture of the Base of the Fifth Metatarsal Bone J. Trauma 20: 530-531, 1980 Soufflet, M. Fracture of the Base of the 5th Metatarsal (Jone’s Fracture) Radiologic Classification (After I.M. Stewart) translated from Courrier des Pedicures Romands, Chiropodist, April 1983.
Lehman RC, et al Fractures of the base of the fifth metatarsal distal to the tuberosity: a review. Foot Ankle 1987;7:245-52. Torg JS. Fractures of the base of the fifth metatarsal distal to the tuberosity. Orthopedics 1990;13:731-7.
Parkinson, D.E. et al Biomechanical Principals of Tension Band Wiring Applied to Fractures of the Distal Fibular and Fifth Metatarsal Base JFS 27(2) : 149-156, 1988. Lee, P. et al: Musculoskelatal Collloquialisms: How Did We Come Up with These Names? Radiographics 24: 1009-1027, 2004 Theodorou, D.J. et al: Fractures of Proximal Portion of Fifth Metatarsal Bone: Anatomic and Imaging Evidence of a Pathogenesis of Avulsion of the Plantar Aponeurosis and the Short Peroneal Muscle Tendon. Radiology (http://radiology.rsnajnls.org/cgi/content/figsonly/226/3/857).
© Al Kline DPM, 2006
February 17, 2007 at 8:19 am
I had a fracture and was put on the cast but after 2 weeks xray was taken and was told the fracture was healing and the cast was removed after 3 weeks without an xray but he swelling didnt disappear. I went back to the hospital and insisted on another xray and this time the orthopedic surgeon said my fracture never hael and mine is Jones fracture and he needs to insert a screw. Why was it not diagnosed properly in the first place
February 17, 2007 at 4:29 pm
I can sympathize. It took me a few days and three doctors before I saw someone who realized I had a jones fracture. They are opting for conservative treatment of casting which drives me nuts and keeps me off my job as a nurse. I hope the surgery works… internet sites state it has a great outcome.. good luck
February 28, 2007 at 2:17 pm
My Jones fracture was recognized immediately in ER after my fall. I tried the non-surgical route per Dr. recommendation which had me off my foot for six week with splint and crutches. I was in the hospital for a week with a blood clot in my rt. calf…same leg as fracture which occured one week after accident. Then I was allowed to walk in cast boot for another three weeks. The Ortho Dr. then tried to send me back to work moving furniture, even though fx did not heal…that didn’t work. So now four months later I am having the surgery. I do not see myself going back to moving furniture and hopefully the delay didn’t complicate things. Good Luck to all you other Jones Fx folks.
February 28, 2007 at 4:18 pm
Most of your comments support the notion that early fixation is the best option for treatment due to the high incidence of non-union and re-fracture.
Al Kline DPM
March 26, 2007 at 10:06 pm
This is my 17th week of a boot and now using a bone stimulator. This is the 2nd time I have done this. I am feeling really frustrated. I am a teacher and spend 99% of my day on my feet. I took 5 weeks off of work to help the healing process. Two weeks back and the fracture is worse! Now, the bone stimulator! I am seeing a podiatrist. Do you recommend an orthopedic/podiatrist?
April 17, 2007 at 5:29 pm
2 months ago i was diagnosed with a jones fracture, and wore a cast for six weeks–i didn’t stay off it as much as i should have, but i was pretty good about it.
i’ve had the cast off for two weeks now and i’ve noticed the following….
1. i’m experiencing very little or no pain at all–however, sometimes i feel a slight twinge if i stop short while walking.
2. the bone where the fracture occurred protrudes slightly– it definitely sticks out more than the bone on the other foot.
3. there is slight numbness/’pins and needles’ on the top of the foot.
should i be concerned or is this all part of the healing process? i don’t have health insurance, and am not looking forward to more medical bills….however, i want it to heal properly.
any info would be greatly appreciated.
April 17, 2007 at 10:35 pm
Hi Dan…your fx sounds just like mine. Cast for 6 wks at which time the xray showed a “bridge” across the top of the break and a swirly haze around the break. The cast came off and I was give a walking boot which I could remove at nite and to shower. Another two weeks and the Dr. took another xray that showed 3 “bridges” across the break and more swirly haze. He said I could walk without the boot when ever it was comfy. Tho, I will wear it in public so I don’t reinjure the foot! He said the break usually heals about 90 % in 2 to 3 months but won’t be as strong as before for about 1 year. I also have numbnes and tingling on the top of my foot and some puffiness. He suggested a compression stocking (which Medicare pays for) which I guess will distribute the puffiness and reduce the tingling. I go back in two weeks; but, from the initial prognosis and all the info on the net, I was really worried that the healing would take a lot longer and never be the same! The Dr. also mentioned that the healing process over the first year includes sensitivity to weather conditions. Be careful and don’t overdo it. “Dancing with the Stars” can wait !!
April 20, 2007 at 6:10 pm
I broke my foot walking in wedge shoes last SEPTEMBER and am very into trying any alternative to surgery that I can. I initially was in a cast and on crutches for 8+ weeks no weight and was very good about it all. It appeared as though I was healing well, so my doctor allowed me to start slowly putting weight on my foot. Then I was allowed to go to tennis shoes with a compression stocking. After about six weeks I went back in the cast because I still had a small, but noticeable bump on the side of my foot and still see bruising sometimes along with some discomfort/pain. I was put back in the boot and was given a bone stimulator to wear 24 hours a day (ugh). I still have the “bump” and experience mild pain at the sight of the fx. I have now been taken off the stimulator and have scheduled surgery. I tried all I could to avoid the surgery and wish I had just done it in the first place instead of trying to let nature take it’s course. I’m going on 8 months with this issue and just want it to be all over. Good luck to each of you.
April 25, 2007 at 1:24 pm
I thought I was the only one!
after 4 weeks in a cast I was told I was fine, with no x-ray.Then 1 week with out anything I had a huge lump underneath my foot so couldn’t walk properly. Went back for more x-rays and was told it hadn’t healed at all. So after now 5 weeks in a walking boot I am now waiting to go back next week, the consultant told me if it hadn’t healed it will need surgery. The frustration is emense and I just wish it woud heal. Hang in there.
May 10, 2007 at 9:35 am
I broke my 5th in Nov 05. Was xray’d and put in a cast for 6 weeks. Had ongoing pain in the area and was sent to a specialist in April 06. Saw him a few times and xrays showed break healing but slow. It is now May 07 and I still experience daily pain in the area. Went back to specialist last week who sent me to a pediatrist. She sent me for another xray this week. Still showed original crack but with some healing and union occuring. So, for all of you out there with this break, I feel your pain. My problem is going on and on and on. I now see the specialist again next week to see what he know wants to do. Be patient and keep off your foot as much as possible when you have this break. My issue was that, once the cast was off I was back walking all day at work, running, exercise etc perhaps all too early. Give it a good break (pardon the pun) and rest as much as you can or you may end up with pain 1.5 years later like me.
Cheers and good luck.
May 31, 2007 at 5:51 pm
I just was diagnosed with JONES this past Tuesday. i’m now in the non-weight bearing for 6weeks, x-ray at 4weks. I was told a 6week walking cast after the initial, and a boot after. Does this sound too conservative??? I’m so active, and this bites. Three yrs. ago in July, I missed a step and ended up with a L. Frank dislocation, and it was horrible, but healed perfectly. I’m with the same doctor.
June 27, 2007 at 3:44 pm
Debbie, I just broke mine 2 weeks agoa and have the exact same prognosis. With the Jones, it has a high rate of repeating, and takes a long time to heal. I’m out for 6 weeks, x-ray after four. Walking cast after six, for at least 4 more weeks. Than avoiding uneven ground so as not to overly stress the area for as long as possible.
June 29, 2007 at 3:04 pm
I broke mine on May 22, playing basketball with my son. I was directed to wear a walking cast 24/7 besides showering. I went back to the doc 3 weeks later and the break was actually worse than before! Anyhow, I’m scheduled for surgery next Thursday and just hope it heals right the first time. I’ve read so many horror stories about the on-going problems it’s freaking me out. Oh-well – no more B-ball for me!
November 27, 2009 at 2:20 am
Just did this – still in cast but the Doc said it would look worse after 3 weeks when they remove the cast than the original break becaseu the way it heals and replaces itself- so the part about being worse sounds normal.
June 30, 2007 at 11:43 am
Hi! My story is familiar. I broke my 5th metatarsal and had the surgery on May 10th.
After going through a fiberglass cast I am
now in a boot with the proviso of not putting any weight on it. I return to the
Dr. next Tuesday to see if the bone healing
is enough to be able to put weight on it.
Christine, I don’t think that anyone can tell you exactly how long you will be incapacitated. It appears that it requires
quite a bit of judgment on the part of the Dr. Judging from this Blog and other internet sites, it is dependent on many
factors such as the nature of the break, and the health of the patient.
The important thing I learned from this and other web sites that you will heal and the likelihood of complications from the surgery appears to be low.
July 31, 2007 at 6:19 am
Hi all!
Spent hours in the hospital lastnight for what I thought might have been torn ligaments. Nope…Jones! Now I’m in a boot and crutches. I’m having an awful time getting used to the crutches. My arms are aching and shaky. Any ideas to help with getting used to using them? (muzakshal@hotmail.com)
I’ve been looking online and it looks like a Jones is very much like an Avulsion fracture.
I’ve been reading all of these stories about having to resort to surgery after all. It all sounds so scary. I’m a teacher an currently off on summer vacation…but will be going back in a month. I’m assuming I’ll still be in my boot. That’ll be interesting!
Guess we all just have to hang in there!
August 4, 2007 at 4:06 am
Hi,
I have just had a fracture of 5th MT 2 days ago. the doctor in the Emergercy room told me that it was a fractured base of 5 th MT with displacement but not a Jones fracture. I was asked to partial weight bear with a dynacast and boot on for at least 6 weeks. I doubt whether the bone will healed in a diplaced position. Should I find an orthopaedic specialist for second opinion of having operation at an earlier stage?
August 7, 2007 at 7:27 am
Hello and welcome to this site. Just some updates for you readers out there. We have 3 articles that highlight this condition and its treatment in the Podiatry Internet Journal:
http://podiatry.wordpress.com/2007/05/05/intramedullary-fixation-for-the-jones-fracture-a-case-report/
http://podiatry.wordpress.com/2006/12/18/a-review-of-the-jones-fracture-with-simple-classification-for-conservative-versus-surgical-treatment/
http://podiatry.wordpress.com/2006/12/18/jones-fracture-a-case-report-with-special-emphasis-on-fixation-placement/
Happy reading!
August 7, 2007 at 7:29 am
Just a quick note:
This fracture is mostly undertreated and very misunderstood. Please seek out secondary opinions of treatment in all cases. For the most part, this fracture requires a surgical correction to achieve the best results. Good luck and happy reading!
August 7, 2007 at 2:35 pm
Hi all!
Went to see my family doctor today. I had the x-rays and report sent from the hospital ER to him. My fracture is 1 week old now. I’ve been on crutches and a Herman Munster boot. Doc says that he wants me to try and start walking with the boot, and to go for more x-rays in 5 weeks. SO…5 more weeks walking around in this thing.
I was not having any pain when using the crutches, but am now feeling an ache at the fracture site and in my ankle. Is it too soon to be putting weight on this?
Doc also told me today that my fracture is not displaced so I should not need surgery. Again…sound right?
~Shalyn
August 14, 2007 at 1:53 am
Suffered a displaced 5th metatarsal fracture. Have been in cast for 4 weeks with minimal weight bearing.It has been 4 weeks after the cast has been removed (total 8 weeks ) and still there is a pain persisting in the area of teh fracture and swelling in the region of the fracture, ankle and the leg.(dipping edema ) Would I need to undergo surgery after all this?
August 14, 2007 at 7:54 am
Jyoti,Robert:
I feel sorry for your injuries but welcome to the site. To a large extent the handling of the healing is a mental exercise and it
does help to tell others about what is happening to you.
Jyoti, we are pretty much victims like you of 5th metatarsal fractures. You may need to consult a podiatrist or a orthopedic surgeon for an evaluation of the need for foot surgery.
My story is that I fractured my foot in the last week or so of April. I had my 5th metatarsal broken but it was not a Jones fracture. It was operated on on May 10. Now, it is week fourteen of my postop recovery. My present condition is walking in a “boot” without crutches. My next visit to the Dr. is today. I wonder if tonight whether I will be back to using two shoes.
Robert, I am delighted that the military have new x-ray machines to look into your foot and pellets to help the healing. What is curious is that the major help in healing this condition that has been known for thousands of years is still immobilization and patience.
Take care, everyone.
Ed
August 16, 2007 at 4:18 pm
i have a fracture from soccer in my right foot the doctor said jones fracture and gave me a boot and i tried walking without the boot and i can confidently walk and move without the boot and it has only been broken for 2.5 weeks am i healed?
August 16, 2007 at 4:44 pm
I had surgery the end of June with
placement of a bone graft and screw
for a Jones fracture.I’m on crutches, in a cast, with no weight bearing. My xray from last week shows no healing. I was treated for 11 months (workers comp) with conservative treatment, bone growth stimulator, and PT.How long should it take to see progress?
August 24, 2007 at 11:35 am
Nobody has good news about this break. I rolled my ankle and broke my 5th meta and I went to a foot specialist. The xrays show that the break goes almost completely across, but stops just shy of the area with low blood supply. He simply said he didn’t think it was close enough to operate and told me I could start walking on it whenever I could handle the pain. Anyone have a result like this?
September 11, 2009 at 12:30 pm
Hi I was just told my fracture would take about 6 weeks to heal. No advice as to weather I should walk on it or not so I ended up hobbleing on it pretty soon after! It is now 4 weeks since i fractured my 5th metatarsal. There is still slight bruising and raised at the fracture site. I can now walk on it well but if I step on uneven groud I do feel it. I will rest it as much as I can bare to help healing as quickly as possible. I Glad to hear of someone else who started walking on it pretty soon after, I don’t feel so bad now!!
August 28, 2007 at 4:47 am
Hi,
I have my FU with a trauma specialist for my 5MT fracture last week. He suggested OT for my fracture. So I have tension band wiring done last Friday ( nearly three weeks after injury). He asked me to do more active ankle and foot exercise as this will cause the tension band to pull the fracture site tight together to stimulate healing, however I should avoid weight bearing for 6 weeks for fear of blowing the implants. It depends on how the growth of the bone is to allow me to weight bear. If healing is not satisfactory after 3 to 6 months, bone graft may be necessary in the worst case. So the only thing I can do now is to wait and see.
By the way , can anyone tell me what a bone stimulator is?
August 28, 2007 at 8:13 am
Alice:
I have been using a bone stimulator for about two months. It is a device that sends
electrical waves into the bone. It has been known since the 19 century that electrical waves produce a piezoelectric effect that vibrates and stresses a bit the broken sections of bones. This stimulates bone growth and repair.
There have been many experiments with rabbits, rats, and dogs and more recently with humans. In the last number of years a number of commercial units have been marketed. The one that I have been using is the Physio-Stim by Orthofix. It is easy to use. You can look it up on the web if you wish. It took five weeks for the effect of the stimulator to be apparent; but I believe that it worked for me judging
from the xrays. You should ask your Dr. about whether it is called for in your case.
Hopefully, your insurance will pay for it because these units are not cheap.
Ed
October 18, 2007 at 8:30 pm
Hi all,
I know its been a while since someone wrote on here, but here is my story.
I broke my 5th meta on 14th may 07 at work and ever since that date I have been pushed around from doctor to doctor. The hospital that I was treated at knew it was an acute jones fracture but chose not to operate, putting me in a cast with no weight bearing for 6 weeks. On the 6th week, they xray’d and took me out of the cast claiming that it was better and for me to go on light duties at work for 2 weeks and then go back to my normal duties (which involves walking around all day as well as pushing in chairs etc.) On the 2nd week of light duties I was seen by another Ortho through work in which they took an xray and found out that the bone had only partially healed. I went back to the Fracture clinic at the hospital with this information, they took another xray and claimed that it was fine with no need to operate or even see me again.
It is now oct 07 and I am still having constant pain under the fx area as well as the pins and needles and pain through my peroneal muscles. I am now seeing a physio as well as a podiatrist which is making orthotics for me to wear.
I had another xray last week which showed the fracture has healed but i have small bone fragments floating around (sesmoids) around the fx. The fx still feels like its broken though, so I am highly confused and frustrated as work is now starting to think I am bunging this on and trying to get more money out of them thru workers comp.
Should I bother getting another opinion through another ortho surgeon? or should I get an MRI to make sure that it has actually fully healed? or should I just go back to the Hospital with my symptoms and stress that, even though it has ‘healed’, that I want to go into surgery and have it rebroken and pinned anyway??
If anyone has any ideas on what I should or could do please please please let me know, I’m really at my wits end now
court.bowen@gmail.com
- Courtney.
November 8, 2007 at 10:07 am
Well, Today marks three weeks since the onset of my acute jones fracture. About a year and a half ago i had a stress fracture in the same place and thought it had went away, but evidently it never completely healed. As of right now, i’m on the conservative treatment of 6 months in a fiberglass non-weightbearing cast. However, prior to my injury i was really getting into cycling and planned to race next summer. By the looks of things (as in, what i’ve found in research) I’m not sure if the conservative treatment, which can take months to heal it entirely, is the best option right now. Also, being on crutches, i cannot perform even the most minor of tasks around my office like printing, copying or faxing simply because i can’t carry anything. From a human resources perspective, my association is spending much more on me than i am returning in work and effort, as they have arranged for a cab to pick me up from home every morning and take me back every evening. They would not and could not continue such a service for months. Should I have surgery?
November 20, 2007 at 1:47 am
Last year I developed pain in my right foot. I believe it was probably a stress fracture. I fractured (Jones Fracture) my right 5th metatarsal (in a hockey GF) and was put in a back-slab cast for 4 weeks. It was x-rayed and removed, despite being told it was 75% healed, but would be fine if I took it easy.
At the end of July I did it again, but this time much worse. I had surgery within the week, including a screw insertion and a bone graft to fill the considerable space between the break. Spent 4 weeks on crutches and wearing a boot. After that I had gradual weight bearing in the boot. I’ve been walking with discomfort now since the start of October, seeing the surgeon and having xrays every 4-6 weeks. The surgeon believes it’s healing, but very slowly. I’m not convinced so I’m seeking a second opinion in December. I’ve had a radiologist look at my xrays and he’s convinced there is a definite “non-union” and will probably require further surgery.
Anyone else had a similar experience? How long can I expect before I’ll be right?
December 7, 2007 at 3:37 pm
Hi group. I suffered (I think an avulsion) fracture November 24th playing recreational field hockey with my husbands family. We have no medical insurance, so I was reluctant to get it looked at. After a few days, I decided to have it x-rayed, because I could tell it wasn’t just a sprain, having had sprains and strains in the past.
Sure enough, my left foot shows a fracture on the fifth metatarsal, closer to the base of my foot. The bone wasn’t displaced at all. The doctor said it’s not a Jones, if it was, she said I would have needed surgery. She put me in a fiberglass walking cast with a boot, said a removable air cast was not good enough, but didn’t require crutches. From there, I was supposed to check back in three weeks (Dec 18…my birthday…what a present *sigh*).
So two days ago, our 2 dogs took off on me. I had to chase them through the yard with about 6 in of snow. Stupid, I know, but I was the only one home and these are not chap mutts…I didn’t notice anything then, but since then, I have more pain and now it feels as though I am stepping on something (almost as if I have a floating bone, maybe???) It’s not all the time, but in certain positions and it’s right at the break.
I called the docs off, they wanted me to come right in today, but I couldn’t. The next avail. appointment is Weds…so we’ll see. I’ll keep you poted. I am really discouraged reading ll of these posts. I didn’t realize that foot fractures required so much care and time to heal. I wince when I think about the med bills. As it sits, I owe $8,000 for the birth of our daughter 4 mos ago.
December 26, 2007 at 5:47 pm
On Oct.10,2007, I suffered a Jones fracture stepping down from the tub after hanging a shower curtain. It has now been 11 weeks of not walking, very little weight on it & my orthopedic DR says I can put more weight on it & walk with one crutch. This is difficult as I have used the 2 crutches all this time. It was 75% healed at 9 weeks. I am looking forward to walking again. He said I will need PT. Is that common? I feel like my crutches are a part of me. Will I be walking normal again? I will always be thankful for health after this!
January 21, 2008 at 12:02 am
So nice to hear other people’s experiences. I had never heard of a Jones fracture until I fell over three days ago and gave myself one. I live in Germany and the doctor looked at the xrays and told me that surgery and conservative treatment both have a similar failure rate. I was given a vacuum boot and crutches and told to come back in a week to see if any displacement has occurred. If it displaces, they will operate. If it doesn’t, then I have the choice. I was leaning towards the conservative treatment but now I’ve done a lot of reading, it seems that even when the fracture does heal this way it remains vulnerable and likely to break again. I am trying to be positive but do not want to spend months not working, not dogwalking, etc, if I have to have surgery at the end anyway. Or, possibly, heal and then break again and have surgery. Four days left for consideration…
Good luck to all your feet!
January 21, 2008 at 6:51 am
I have treated roughly 100’s of Jone’s fractures over the past 15 years. I would say that its about 50:50 whether you will refracture if not fixated. This is pretty close to what the literature reports. It really all depends on the type of break. The peroneal tendons have a strong influence on pulling away and distracting a fracture fragment that gives this injury such a high non-union rate. If you’ve every had to put one back together in the operating room, you know exactly what I mean. Good luck!
February 6, 2008 at 10:02 am
It was really great to read everyone’s experiences!
I fractures my 5thM on December 11th and the emergency docs gave me the impression that I would be weight bearing in a week, healed up no problem. (not actually sure if it is a Jones’ Fracture or not. I have been reading info to try and determine, but I am still not certain – what I do know is that it was an undisplaced, oblique fracture of 5th M)
That was 8 weeks ago – and so far my follow-up xrays have showed NO HEALING – none. Sitting here at my desk, my foot aches and pains.
Since then, I’ve gone from a aircast boot, to a non-bearing weight cast, and now to a fibreglass cast and the Ortho Dr. has advised me to walk on it as much as possible.
However, reading after these stories, I am wondering if that is the best advice (because it does start to really ache and pain when I walk too much).
My Dr. mentioned surgery, but only as a last resort – but given this information, it would seem that it should be considered more as an inital option.
Thus far, I’ve been told that there is no reason that it should not be healing – I am young, etc… but after reading this blog, it sounds like not healing with this injury is actually very common.
I am now waiting for a CAT scan appointment, and I think that the Dr. is going to consider those results to determine the necessity of surgery. I am thinking that perhaps it is the best option, considering the non-healing and the incidence of re-injury if you don’t. That may not be my decision, however.
I am now feeling like it could still be a very long time before I am back to normal. Sigh… I miss my shoes, driving (it is my right foot!) and being in my office – it is on the third floor, so I’ve been re-located. Plus, I cannot do my job properly, which is frustrating. My manager has been extremely supportive, but I don’t like doing things at a less than appropriate level.
Any thoughts? :-)
My best wishes to everyone and I hope that your healing is speedy and final!
February 11, 2008 at 6:47 am
Just thought I would post a follow-up on my progress. I had the third week x-rays done and not only have the bones not moved but the break is blurred and the doctor says healing has begun. He said this was a very good sign three weeks in but that I should not get excited because the next three weeks really count.
I have done as I was originally told; sat around for three weeks with my foot elevated in the vacuum boot and used crutches to go to the bathroom and to go to make drinks. Luckily, my neighbours and my husband are walking the dog and my husband works most of the time from home. I know this is not possible for everyone – I have a part-time job and my employer has insisted I stay off for the full six weeks. Not all employers are this understanding and some people are more necessary to their organisation than I am, maybe. However, the doctor told me that my healing is due to three things: taking the instruction seriously to keep the foot still, having good circulation, and lastly, luck. He insisted that I carry on resting for the next three weeks in order to really bond the bones. I am hopeful that this will be the case. Having read some of the more unfortunate experiences on this blog, I am happy to provide a more optimistic result.
One curious thing, though – apart from the initial accident, my foot has had more pain this week than at any time. Is it possible that the healing process causes pain (or has something bad happened? It seems one can’t be sure until the next x ray in three weeks’ time…)
February 12, 2008 at 2:08 pm
I broke my 5th metatarsal on Dec 5th 2007. That will be 10 weeks tomorrow and as of last x-ray last week, there is no sign of healing at all. There is also an awful lot of pain, at times extreme. The emergency doctor put me into an air cast and said I could walk on it right away. My own doctor told me, when she finally saw me, that she would have had me off it for two weeks at the start. So, except for the first weekend and another 3 days for bad days of pain I’ve been going to work. Luckily it’s a sit-down job, but I have to go up and down my stairs at home (we live in a loft), get someone to drive me to work, since it’s my right foot, clomp around there and then back again. I use a cane since I don’t have the upper body strength for crutches. I see the specialist on Friday and I am expecting at the very least I’ll be off work for awhile. I’ve had to cancel a trip to New York to see Davy Jones early next month since I refuse to clomp around NYC in this cast. I am incredibily frustrated and hope that this will get fixed soon. It isn’t a Jones fracture, it’s further down the shaft straight across with a gap on the outside. I had originally thought that this far down it would be fine, but I guess not for me.
February 16, 2008 at 9:12 pm
update – not good. I have to wait another 6 weeks for another x-ray to confirm it’s not healing. The specialist said there may be fibrous tissue that is just not showing up on x-ray. Keep walking on my foot and have a good day.
February 18, 2008 at 8:25 pm
My 13yr old daughter sustained a fifth metatarsal fracture in mid Dec 2007.At this time she also broke her second toe. Following fortnightly x-rays and non weight bearing whist on crutches with a back slab there was still no sign of union in Feb of this year. During the 8wks of initial treatment we were given various do’s and don’ts by different Drs, all seemingly to disagree with what the other had said and recommended. We have since seen an othopedic peadiatric specialist who has recommended the fitting of a cam boot. We have proceeded to do this and are due to go back for an x-ray and review in 4weks. It was explained to me that the ability to weight bear whilst wearing the cam boot will keep her foot immobilised but will alow for the tendon to push the bone back in place and prevent joint fluid from entering the break. My understanding is that the previous treatment was allowing the tendon to continue pulling the bone away from the break therefor causing non union. I also believe from what was said that the joint fluid that enters the break prevents callcification of the bone forming. It has been an extremely long and frustrating process keeping in mind that we were initially told it would heal quickly. My daughter is a very activie 13yr old, devoted to many sports and participates in an elite level of netball. Our only hope now is that the treatment we are currntly undertaking finally works or else it will be another 4wks down the drain and surgery.
February 27, 2008 at 2:17 pm
Sally-
The use of a cam boot to prevent joint fluid from going into the joint is something I have not heard. I got my JB at the beginning of Nov and after the first 6 weeks of non weight bearing the ex-rays showed the the top of the break was healing but not the lower section. Went back four weeks later in Jan and almost no change. Went back last Friday and hardly any change. My doctor says not to put any weight on it for another four weeks. It seems like everyone else was told to walk on it in a boot. Now mine was swollen up until a few weeks ago and then started to look like a normal foot. I decided to not follow doctor’s orders and actually put weight on my foot and sort of walk. No pain but my foot swelled up a bit. Doe anyone else have their foot swell up when put weight on it? She will not tell me why she does not want me to walk like everyone else. It appears that your daughter’s doctor has a reason that you should put weight on your foot as soon as you can. I wish I could find a study that shows that joint fluid going into the break prevents healing so I can bring it to her. Judgeing from the lack of union rate as well as the refracture rate I am ready to ask for a screw fixation. I am not sure that I can talk my doctor into doing it and because I belong to an HMO I can only do what the doctor advises. My doctor does not like surgery- mentions failure rate and infection but I never see those statistics in any search I have done.
March 2, 2008 at 4:13 pm
Further update on my progress. In case you haven’t seen my other two posts, my doctor recommended conservative treatment in the form of a vacuum boot, crutches and absolutely NO weight on the foot for six weeks. Well, with only a bit of cheating, I managed it. My reward was being told that the fracture has healed – still slightly visible on the x ray but the doctor is confident that all will be well. I am now allowed to use just one crutch as walking stick and keep the vacuum boot but now allowed to put weight on it and walk as normally as I can but to take things gently. This means I can go back to work, thank goodness.
The next stage after two weeks is to use a custom-fitted carbon insole for my ordinary (flat) shoes and begin ordinary life again. After two weeks of this, further x rays will be taken and some physio given, if needed.
My foot still hurts when I try to walk on it without the boot, so I am glad to have its support while adjusting to walking again. My physio friend explained that the six weeks non weight bearing was to give the bones a chance to knit without the tendon constantly pulling on the end of the bone every time weight is put on it.
Again, I’m lucky I’ve had support which has enabled me to follow this advice, and it has been a frustrating six weeks. However, things are looking good and I hope the rest of you also mend well, whichever treatment you opt for. Good luck.
March 6, 2008 at 9:32 am
I broke my fifth metatarsal on Nov 14,2007
was in a hard cast for 13 weeks. It wasnt healing so I had surgery on Jan 25 , 2008
for internal screw fixation. Six weeks after surgery I am actually going back today for an xray to hopefully determine if
I can start some weight bearing on my foot.
I have not walked in 4 months, and have found this whole injury to be incredibly depressing and frustrating. Of course in looking back I should have insisted on the surgery from the beginning. My ortho was
very conservative in his treatment of me and from all of the reasearch I have done regarding this type of injury casting a true
“Jones Fracture” does not have a good outcome and most people end up having the surgery afterall.Because I have been non weight bearing for the past 4 months my foot doesnt even feel like it’s actually part of my body. I havent even been able to start any PT, I went once for some range of motion exercise and was up the whole night in worse pain than when I broke it or the day I had the surgery. I feel like I have “lost” the past 4 months of my life. This type of injury limits everything you can do as anyone who has had it knows. My advise to anyone who has this type of break is to insist on the surgery asap or go to an ortho who is aggressive in treating it.
Good luck to you all!!
March 12, 2008 at 6:22 pm
Shanaee returned to the specialist last week for another xray and progress report. Great news, the break has finally healed, upon close up of the xray you can just see where the brek was. Her cam walker is now off and she has begun doing some simple phsio which invoves walking in water. Her joints are extremely stiff and she still walks around as if it is broken but that is suspected i supose after such a lengthy period of immobilization. She is booked in t see a phsyio therapist next week. It is amazing the extreme caution that follows an injury such as this in hope that it doesnt ocur again. Joy at last the long wait is finaly over. I sincerly hope everyone else progresses well, i empathise with you all over the duration and frustrations involvd in the healing process.
March 14, 2008 at 10:29 am
Well, Jones Crew, I went back for an Xray 6 weeks after my surgery for internal screw fixation and it has not started to heal AT ALL! Even the DR. was scratching his head. He sent me for a consult with a trauma spec in foot and ankle surgery who said he wouldnt consider doing anything else surgically for 3 months after my first surgery (which would be 4/7) so in the meantime they gave me a bone stimulator to use for the next 4 weeks. I have heard mixed results about those so I dont have alot of confidence in seeing much in terms of improvement. It appears I may have to have yet another surgery, bone grafting this time and maybe some plates. I am so frustrated, this just seems like it’ll never end. Anyone else out there use the bone stim after a failed surgery?
March 17, 2008 at 7:16 pm
I fell on Dec. 20th,,didn’t go to a doctor for 10 days, then discovered I had a Jones Fracture. Just like so many of you,, 4 weeks of hard cast, then 6 weeks of Cam Walker. First 2 weeks, no healing!! Next some hopeful signs of healing at 6 weeks. Now,at almost 3 months, still not healed. The doctor said to go back to flat soft shoes and very limited walking while it healed further. He’s ordered a bone stimulator also. I was having almost no pain in the Cam Walker. Now, after 3 days without it, my whole foot hurts. For the first time my ankle and the top of my foot hurt. I’m wondering if it’s just because all muscles are shot from 3 months of doing so little walking. No therapy was suggested, but I’m thinking it’s needed. Any thoughts for me?
March 22, 2008 at 2:28 am
hi everyone i got my jones fracture feb 29 dam leap year lol well i was told in the er it was a acute jones fracture and told to see a ortho well he told me to get the surgery for internal screw fixation and was in a immobilizer for a week then a air cast with toe touching only for balance after week 2 i got a xray and the bone didnt compress all the way he said the bone should fill in i hope if it doesnt after 12 weeks then i have to get a diff screw installed
March 27, 2008 at 6:36 am
I’ve been posting here the progress of my conservative treatment. Today is my last day of ten weeks’ treatment so far, six weeks immobility in vacuum boot and crutches, two weeks walking with vacuum boot and one crutch, two weeks walking with carbon insole and no crutches. Tomorrow I have another ortho appointment to check progress. Well, I don’t feel my foot belongs to me anymore, even my leg seems out of control. I’m hoping to have some physio as follow up treatment if the foot is sufficiently healed tomorrow. I think I need physio to bring my foot and leg back to fully working order and into my consciousness to give a little confidence. I walk like a fragile old lady and scan the pavement to check for unevenness or obstacles as I’m not in control of the injured foot and cannot compensate with a natural reflex. Ankle pain almost every day – no idea why. All this is probably normal but depressing after having had everything go so positively up until now.
Shall post tomorrow after seeing the doctor again – hopefully, more cheerfully!
Take care, everyone, Barbara
March 27, 2008 at 7:20 am
Barbara, I have to say I am jealous that your walking after 10 weeks. And also I totally understand your saying you dont feel your foot belongs to you anymore. I dont know if you’ve read my info in past postings, but I am almost at 5 months of no weight bearing, I’ve had it all, cast, surgery for screw fixation and now a bone stimulator, beacuse it has not shown any signs of healing since the surgery. Frustrating doesnt really cover all of my feelings. I actually go back today for an xray to check for any signs of healing. It’s been almost 3 months since my surgery, so if there is no sign soon, another surgery may be needed. This is the most frustrating, limiting, aggravating injury I have ever had. I keep waiting for some ray of good news to come my way, maybe today…
Good luck to us all!!
March 27, 2008 at 11:45 pm
I fell at work and was diagnosed with a 5th metatarsal fx on 3/21/08. It was the most excruciating pain I have ever felt. Saw the ortho surgeon today and diagnosed it as a Jones fx. Lots of pain and swelling. He said I tore ligaments and need it elevated above my heart for the next 4 days for the swelling to go down so it can be casted. Then non weight bearing and elevated the next 4 weeks. Then new cast, 2 weeks NWB then a walking boot. 6 weeks off work minimum plus no guarantee it will heal. I get it that the statistics are not good for re-injury later. After reading everyone’s experiences I feel I need to talk to the doctor more seriously about surgery now rather than later. Get the screw in there to help this heal. If he doesn’t want to I will be asking why not and, depending on his answer, will get a 2nd opinion. Thank you all for sharing it has been very helpful. I will let you all know what happens.
March 28, 2008 at 10:32 am
Stormy, speaking from my own expierience, unless you are an athelete, most Dr’s will not operate as a first option. They tend to assume this type of break will heal using conservative treatment (casting) and dont consider what NWB for weeks/months does to disrupt a patients life/work. From all of my research and my own expierience this type of injury does not heal well ( quickly)
with conservative treatment and even with the surgery ( which I have had) after months of conservative treatment I am still NWB and going on my 5th month since I broke it. The Jones fracture is a miserable
injury to have and as the patient you have to be assertive and demand the surgery as an
immediate option. I wish I had, or was given that option intially, perhaps I would be walking by now. Atheletes should not be given the priority because they are considered more active. Talk to your Dr about this now, good luck to you!
March 28, 2008 at 5:45 pm
i was lucky with the first 5 min of talking to my dr he said i should go for surgery
April 5, 2008 at 5:51 pm
I had a jones fracture from basketball and the doctor said i should have surgery to have the best results to play at college. So, i had surgery and i was just wondering how long until i am off the crutches and walking again?
April 7, 2008 at 10:22 am
Hi Greg,
I think everyone is different, but the Jones fracture does tend to take a while to heal. I had my surgery in Jan and am still
non weight bearing. It just hasnt started showing any signs of healing yet. Maybe you’ll have a quicker recovery. Good luck to you!
April 8, 2008 at 9:48 am
Update on my fracture. After 16 weeks the x-rays showed it has finally started to heal. It is filled in about 1/2 way across, not good bone yet, but real improvement. He said they called it delayed union. I almost said “You think?” Anyway, my next xray is in May and I can start trying a hard shoe now sometimes. I only do that at work in case I trip over the dog or cat or anything else at home. Still have major pain sometimes but at least there is a possible end to that tunnel. I can’t wait to drive again and stop being trapped. At least I’ve been able to walk since the beginning, but maybe that was part of my delay. I think 4 months and counting is quite long enough, thank you.
April 9, 2008 at 12:38 am
ok update week 5 after surgery im weight bearing 1/3 of my body weight the bone is healing nicely
April 9, 2008 at 10:41 pm
I broke my foot 2\188 at work. Got up from the desk, took 4 steps, went to turn and felt a pop and unbearable pain. No swelling, no bruising. Went to my Primary Dr., took x-ray. Yup broke. Sent to podiatrist. He said it was a Jones fracture. Cast it. Said I could put weight on it as tolerated. Now 7 weeks later, no sign of healing. Bone stimulater for 1 week already. Go back 4\21. I am frustrated, angry, and fed up with my cast. I feel that Workman’s comp is running the show. All decisions have to go through them. Like they live my day to day life. I care at home for a disabled sister-in-law and mother-in-law. Hard to give baths with a full cast.
Dr. said if I have surgery, I could be totally off my feet for 2-6 weeks. Probably longer. The not having a definitive answer stinks.
Sorry to vent. Thanks.
April 11, 2008 at 4:50 pm
Dabra, I’m really sorry you’re having such a bad time. Because this fracture is not life-threatening, people don’t really understand how debilitating it is, both physically and psychologically – at least everyone on this blog can identify with the waves of depression and frustration caused by having one’s life so compromised.
I had my last check-up and told the doctor about the pain I was still having and that I was scared of refracture and thought the pain was warning me. He x-rayed again and told me the bone was now completely healed and to ‘move, move, move’ (Well, I live in Germany, so “bewegen, bewegen, bewegen”. Since then I’ve tried to push through the pain, I’m back at work, I’m walking the dog and trying to normalise. I caught sight of myself in a shop window the other day and I look like a drunk person walking along. I’ve no idea where this pain comes from but my toes won’t bend enough to spring me into the next step and I have pain on top of my foot. My husband says that after only one week since losing the metal innersole, I am expecting too much and should be more patient. The problem is that I’m not seeing even the slightest improvement day by day. I have another appointment in three weeks’ time, hopefully with less to complain about.
Good healing, everyone.
April 14, 2008 at 6:54 am
Barbara, It is nice to know that people on this site can at least relate to how limiting this injury is. I’m sure walking is difficult for you. Have you had any PT? I just started last week and truly beleive I need it to gain muscle strength back and
it sounds like you would benefit from it also.Perhaps you should talk to your DR about it. I finally got a bit of good news from my lasy xray, the bone is finally showing a small bit of calcification!!! After 5 months thats great news, so I can put some weight down on my foot, it’s in walking boot and I’m still on the crutches but it’s a start. Hang in there Barbara, keep on walking!
April 15, 2008 at 2:52 am
I just finished my third week since the fx. I’ve been to the ortho surgeon twice and have so much swelling that he will not cast. I have had it elevated above my heart and now have most all the swelling down. I see the Dr in 3 days and get my first xray and cast. My ankle sustained so much tissue damage – torn ligaments and blood vessels – that my ankle has no shape. The ankle is 1/2 again larger than the other with no edema. I have not put any weight on this foot at all. He has said non weight bearing for at least 6 weeks. I am on workers comp and now as I look at the shape of my foot and the probability that this is long term, I am getting very discouraged. I don’t exactly feel pain but it is uncomfortable to have it down for very long. It feels like it’s going to sleep and the whole foot will turn a purplish color. Almost immediately when I elevate it the color returns to normal and feels better. Has anyone had this problem? If so, how long did it last?
The depression is getting to me. There are days when I feel like I am in a prison.
And are any of you dealing with food issues like me? I am so concerned about putting on weight. What are you doing for exercise or to keep yourself from gaining weight? I have some very dear freinds that are bringing food over all the time. It’s too easy to try to eat away these feelings. I told everyone low carbs and no chocolate. So far so good. Please, any suggestions for exercise?
April 16, 2008 at 4:46 pm
Hey people i have been reading all these messages and i wanted to know if you guys can actually move your toes and ankles around comfortably? I was told my injury was a minor jones fracture but i can move my hole foot around after one week? theres just a little pain on the side of my foot
April 20, 2008 at 6:23 pm
Stormy, sorry to hear your having such a hard time. I am 5 months since fracture, having had casts then surgery. I have just started ( last week) putting weight down on my foot. I am down to 1 crutch but still wearing walking boot. My foot still gets purple when I have it down for any length of time and like you as soon as I put it up the color returns. I was told its from lack
of circulation. I understand your frustration/ depression . I think most of us with this injury dont initally realize
how long term it can be ,it does get very
hard coping day to day.
I agree , the food issues can be tough. Its easy to eat when going thru the recovery
just keep in mind that we will walk again and need to get into our summer clothes!! I’ve tried to do other exercises( stomach, etc) whenever possible.Try and stay positive, I know it can be hard but remember you will heal and be back to your old self. Hang in there!!
April 26, 2008 at 1:39 pm
I’m amazed at how many other unfortunate people are having to endure this ordeal. With the reading I’ve done, I find it’s very common in elite athletes. However, not much comfort being in such famous company.
I’m finishing my eleventh week, 4 weeks in a cast and the last 7 weeks in a walking boot. I feel everyone’s pain, having exepienced all the frustrations of not being able to drive, use of crutches, lack of exercise, and the knowledge that a complete heal is likely not in the cards on the first round of conservative treatment. I’m heartened by all the nice actions of people wanting to help, from my friends who drive me EVERYWHERE, to strangers holding the door, offering to carry my grocery bags, to the politicians who put in place measures to aid the handicapped such as parking spaces, ramps, automatic doors, to the medical industry who make available appliances such as shower benches and replacement tips and pads for my crutches. Not a lot to make one feal better, but it’s something.
I’m pissed off at the health care process that forces me to go throuh extended conservative treatment where the success rate is low. Clearly statistics show that surgical repair is the most effective form of treatment but they’ll only provide that for the aforementioned athletes who get surgical repair at the time of injury. Heck, even bone growth stimulators would be helpful but you can’t get that covered until at least 90 days. My surgeon has prescribed custom orthotics to help the long term process but my insurance won’t poney up a dime for those.
My injury was due to walking in poorly fitted shoes. I had two pairs of Merrill outdoor shoes. They always caused mild discomfort for my right foot and I had worn them a little because of the discomfort. But after a week of wear in January, the stress fracture had developed which turned into a fracture upon getting up from the floor one day. My orthopedic surgeon said that poorly fitted shoes are one of the main causes of the Jones fracture. Like most other things, they don’t make shoes like they used to.
My best to all of you…time flies when you’re having fun…just look at it as a challenge to beat the odds, be the best patient, heal better and sooner than everyone else by following Dr’s orders, staying positive and proving all the experts and statistics wrong.
April 29, 2008 at 3:11 pm
You guys have me really worried about my treatment. Last Thursday while playing softball I rolled my foot over. Went to the doc on Friday and after a series of x-rays, they confirmed it – Jones. So the doc (PA, actually) put me in a boot (no crutches), said to keep it elevated whenever possible, and come back in 4 weeks. Reading your posts, it seems most (if not all) of you were put in a cast right off the bat. My pain threshold is seriously high as proven by my continued game play for the final 1.5 innings. The x-rays showed a very clear break (wide at the bottom and narrowing towards the top) which looked to be all the way through the 5th metatarsal. Perhaps my ability to walk into the doc’s office kept them from casting it?? Should I get a 2nd opinion? Thanks a million.
May 1, 2008 at 11:45 pm
I think I have you all beat. I am sporting 2 yes that is 2 jones fractures. One on each foot. lets say my orthopedic was not too pleased. Anyway, they are about a week apart from each other, the first one was done surgically, so now i have a sweet screw in it and the other one im doing without the surgery. i thought having one foot was bad… anyway, because of the fact my ortho thinks im a retard, he thought id be better in two casts rather than boots, mainly to protect me from myself… What information i have to say is BE CAREFUL. When he went into my first foot he said the bone was incredibly hard, which could mean i walk on the outsides of my feet. I am a Chef so i am constantly on my feet for well over 10 hours a day 6 days a week. Not being on them and in the kitchen is killing me and seriously jeopardizing my job. SO BE CAREFUL 6 week minimum NO WEIGHT, keep it elevated at all times, ice it 20 minutes every hour for the fisrt couple of days and then a few times a day after that, baby it, treat it like one of those spheres of chemical goo from “The Rock” don’t poke at it or see how well you can wiggle your toes, take a multivitamin every day and a baby aspirin every day to help prevent blood clots.
May 3, 2008 at 1:05 pm
Andy J, I would say yes. I personally wouldn’t leave a Jones fracture to a PA. I would go to an orthopedic surgeon.
In the end, I think I could probably have gone directly into the boot instead of the cast… but even in the boot, I would have had to been non-weight bearing and using crutches. The boot immoblized the foot, kept the foot from going into flexion, and it’s a pretty tight fitting device which helped keep my foot from swelling. In the cast, once the original swelling went down, the cast was very roomy which allowed swelling from poor circulation to develop. The boot almost acts as a compression stocking. So using the boot while in non-weight bearing mode would have worked and in the end you’d be wearing the same boot while in graduated weight stages.
May 4, 2008 at 4:12 am
I sustained a Jones Fracture while walking across a large speed hump om my way into work on Jan 11 ‘08. I heard a loud snap and immediately thought tendons/ligaments and was quite surprised at the fracture diagnosis.
I saw a GP, had xrays which said fractured 5th metatasal. Dr had his nurse put this huge wobbly plaster cast on my foot and said have a week off work and can return. I have to drive 45mins each way and it was my right foot. He said “no matter, the car is an auto isn’t it?” Er, yes but it was my right foot.
After discussion with family, I saw a different GP who laughed and said no way, I had to stay off my foot for 8 weeks and get that cast changed to a fibreglass one.
I followed the cure for 8 weeks and no sign of healing, so off to the Orthopaedic Surgeon I went. A lovely straight talking fellow who said it was never going to heal without surgery.
A week later I had a bone graft with a bone marrow transplant (hoping for some good stem cells), a metal plate and 5 screws place in and over the break. I was also ordered total non weight bearing for 6 weeks until he said so.
It is looking good and I am allowed now to do gentle walking which is wonderful after 4 months of no walking. I still have a huge amount of swelling, a lot of pain and walking is difficult. I am unable to walk bare foot or move my toes without pain. The only shoes I can wear are reef sandals with velcro tops that can be extended with the swelling. I am taking it one day at a time. I see the surgeon again at the end of next week, hopefully he will be able to shed some light on the pain I am still experiencing in my foot.
At our last visit he did make a point to tell me “he would not and could not tell me when it (my foot)would be back to “normal” again”.
It’s good to see I am not alone, although I would not wish this on anyone. Thanks for sharing
May 7, 2008 at 7:15 am
Kyle, you sound like you have us all beat, but let’s see how long it takes you to heal. You might be more fortunate than it seems and heal quickly. And I took you up on your multi-vitamin suggestion (and have added calcium supplements to the regimen).
Sharon, stories like yours are the reason I asked for guidance. Four months is an incredibly long time to be off of your foot! Your repair is more extensive than the usual single screw driven from the top of the tuberosity down through the center of the stem.
Dan, thanks for your reply. I have an appointment with a foot and ankle specialist (orthopedic surgeon) on Friday. I’m doing my best to be the best patient like you suggested. I must say, my foot feels better than a week ago, though I am doing my best to keep the weight on the inside part of my foot. Perhaps I have begun to heal?
Has anyone else had a period of time where it felt pretty great (without putting weight on it), but then found out it wasn’t healing?
Thanks everyone and good luck to all!
May 7, 2008 at 3:09 pm
Dabra, thanks for the understanding! I’ve now had a month of walking ‘normally’ and am still feeling tightness across the middle of the foot and weakness and aching in the ankle. Saw the doctor yesterday and he’s offered me a course of physio, which I started today. Nice friendly physio, who said the ankle needs stabilizing and strengthening to regain my proper balance (I’m still putting more weight on the strong foot than the weak one), so exercises for that. The tightness across the middle cannot be accounted for unless I haven’t been walking long enough or ‘aggressively enough’. Well, I’ve been walking enough to lose in one month the four kilos (8 1/2 pounds!) which I gained during the six weeks immobility. People do bring you cakes and goodies to cheer you up and you do bloody well need cheering up. Enjoy your food – it’s one of the few enjoyments when you can’t do anything else. You can lose it easily enough afterwards ‘aggressively’ walking to loosen up your foot…
So, I left the dog behind as he doesn’t want to go far or fast, and I walked around the national park in which we live for about an hour, trying to forget the foot and guess what? All pain went and I was walking fast and normally balanced. I couldn’t believe it. Now I’m home, the tightness is back but maybe with a lot of such exercise it will go completely. I am in much more cheerful mode after just one walk – what a rollercoaster this injury is.
Don’t lose hope everybody; it seems that everyone has their own path, method and timing to recovery. Mine continues but at the good end of the scale. Be patient and don’t give up.
Oh, and Kyle, my heart goes out to you but, please, how did you do two Jones fractures one week after the other?
May 7, 2008 at 10:55 pm
Hello. I guess I am here to tell my story. I am 18, broke my foot one week ago. It is a Jone’s fracture caused by stress. Since I broke my other foot 2 years back, had a 10 week healing in a normally 4 week healing fracture, the doc sympathized with me. I had a screw put in 2 days ago, along with bone grafting. The needle they use for that is huge. about the roundness of a pencil. Vicodin is nice. I am in a soft cast. I am told 2 weeks an x ray, analysis a change to boot or a hard cast, then 4 weeks light movement. I don’t believe that 4 weeks number from personal experience. But after surgery w/ grafting, does anyone think 4 weeks is a realistic number? I hope I can walk at graduation.
May 9, 2008 at 1:05 pm
Well guys, I saw an ortho doc today (Friday) and he scheduled me for surgery on Monday. I truly thought my foot was healing as I have next to zero pain while in a boot. An x-ray shows my fracture is actually worse than it was two weeks ago when it happened. Crazy, huh? WIth luck, the surgery will get me on the healing track. He told me I will be on crutches for 1 week and then a walking boot after.
Thanks to all that have told their story. It has really helped me put things into perspective. It also gave me the ability to intelligently debate my recovery plan with the doctor.
Ross, my doc said 8-10 weeks healing time. But, maybe your fracture is different in some way (?).
Good luck all. Take care and be sure to question your Rx if you don’t believe he/she has you on the right plan. Speak up! It’s your foot.
May 9, 2008 at 2:32 pm
Hey guys,
i fractured my foot during basketball practice 5 weeks ago. My first doc which is a family doctor gave me xrays and told me it was a jones fracture…all she gave me was a an ace wrap and crutches for a weak till i go to a foot doctor. The next week i went to a foot doctor and he told me crutches and a hard cast for 6-8 weeks…so im schedualed to go back on the 27th to see if it actually healed. Then after that they said i need a walking cast for 4 weeks then 2 weeks on a walking boot. Is this treatment common for anybody
May 10, 2008 at 1:56 pm
Andy, the surgery is pretty painful, I doubt you will want to be in the walking boot only after one week. I just stopped feeling pain/SUPER swelling like 5 days after it. When you stand up you will feel your heartbeat in your foot and the vicodin helps but makes you an uncaring asshole. You are in for a shitty 3-4 days, buy some dvds…
And I am not talking about full healing time, just until I can walk around a bit.
May 25, 2008 at 10:29 am
I’ve given up my cast now. There is still some pain walking, but that could be using my orthotics when my foot has been flat for so long. The specialist didn’t show for my last appt. so I have no idea how I’m doing. The tiny version of my x-ray looked good, so I’m going with that and I’ll see my own doctor in June. No running (not that I ever did) and I’m starting to walk my dog for short walks again. I’m VERY careful on stairs.
May 30, 2008 at 11:17 am
Hi all, after 5 1/2 long months of crutches casting, surgery and more casting I am finally walking on my own in shoes and feel almost normal again!!! I dont have to tell you all how nice that is. This was probably the most disruptive, depressing and frustrating injury I have ever had (hopefully the last one)I wish you all well in your recovery!!!!!
May 30, 2008 at 11:18 am
After two weeks in a boot, I saw my ortho doc and he performed the surgery (2.5″ screw). It has now been nearly 3 weeks of crutches (and a split and ace wrap) and I finally was able to switch off to a walking boot this morning. Yeeayyy! So, Ross, you were right. I must have heard wrong when they told me how long I’d be using them. Crutches are really tough for the first week and then you get used to them, though they remain a bit of a hinderance! I was told 4 weeks in the walking boot. We’ll see.
By the way, just so everyone isn’t freaked out about the surgery, I didn’t have much pain at all. But, experiences will vary! I had the surgery on Monday, took a pain pill before bed Monday night and Tuesday night, and switched to ibuprofen on Wed night. I haven’t needed any pain management since Wed night. I may have gotten lucky?
Good luck to everyone. It is very trying, but taking it extra-easy seems to be doing the trick (well, that and a 2.5″ screw!). Take care.
June 4, 2008 at 12:45 am
I sustained a jones fx on March 6th of this year. I was playing basketball and fell over, thinking i had simply rolled an ankle I continued to play until I realized it was something a bit more serious. I went to the ER where i was given crutches and told I would be fine in 6weeks.
Of course never being one to trust and ER doc, I decided to see an Orthopedic surgeon who upon showing me the films revealed that I did in fact have a Jones Fx.
At this point he recommended a conservative approach to treating the problem, to which I agreed, despite the fact that prior to the injury I was playing basketball or running at least once per day. He told me that immediate surgery was only recommended for elite level athletes, and while I may participate in athletics on a daily basis, he thought I would be fine with conservative treatment.
I should say that I am 25 years old…and in Above average health…I was put on crutches with no weight for 5 weeks but without a cast and only in the big black boot. When i returned for my 5 week x-rays the bone was about halfway healed. I was instructed to ditch the crutches and use simply the walking boot. I should also mention that I felt little to no pain in the boot and after 5 weeks walking in the boot (10 weeks since the injury) I felt no pain and was completely asymptomatic, however my x-ray showed no further healing from 5 weeks earlier. Since I was pain/symptom free my doc turned me loose in my shoes to see how it would react. I made it 5 glorious days well 3 of them glorious before my foot swelled up and i was experiencing pain…
I returned to the doc immediately and insisted on surgery. May 23 i had a screw inserted into the 5th Mt with a bone graft. I was told the fracture was healing on the plantar aspect of the MT but still incomplete dorsally….I am returning tomorrow for my first set of post surgery x rays and hopefully to be moved from a soft cast back in to the boot while I will likely need the crutches for a an indefinite amount of additional time.
I have had a rough go of it in dealing with this although I will say the that during the conservative approach I was very ignorant about how serious the injury is and just assumed that it would heal as long as i followed directions. I have since changed my tune and realized what a vital role nutrition plays in the healing process. Your diet can be your best friend in this situation. If you are meticulous about this it can significantly improve your chances of healing quickly. Important but difficult things to stay away from are alcohol, caffeine, sugars, and red meats…all of these things can disrupt calcium absorption in some way and should be avoided or minimized in order to give you the best chance at a quicker recovery.
For pain management and to aid in the healing process you can also try acupuncture which has an excellent reputation for those who are willing to give it a serious chance.
Finally – It is essential that as soon as your foot is out of the cast you begin a physical therapy regimen, even if it is something as menial as exercises to return your ankles slowly to their normal ranges of motion. The more proactive you are about therapy, the less trouble you will have when you are given the green light to start walking normally on your foot. If you ignore your rehab you will have a much greater chance of injuring yourself further due to the compensation for your injury in your gait. Make sure the person in charge of your physical therapy is aware of exactly what type of injury they are dealing with so that they can plan accordingly.
I know this is a tough injury to deal with as it has really had me frustrated at times…but getting angry or upset changes nothing…you are still in the same place as you were before…the important thing is to stay positive and stay proactive…everytime you eat think is this helping me get back or hurting me…It is worth the sacrifice to get back to your activities of daily living…and i wish all of you the best of luck
June 6, 2008 at 2:14 pm
I feel bad for you Brian, you should’ve had surgery right away. Anyways. I went to the doc today (4 weeks post surgery). He told me to crutch with full weight bearing for a week in the boot. Then a week of the boot only, no crutches hooray. Then I can get into a normal shoe. The end is in sight. I go back in 3 weeks to see if its still healing. A bump has formed around it :) Great sign. I have drank a lot of alcohol but I am still ahead of schedule. I guess I’m young so I heal quicker. Good luck to all!
June 7, 2008 at 12:06 am
barbara, i had broken my right foot at work. I am a chef and i was in a walk in. There is a small table in the walk in that keeps product off the ground i hopped over it and landed on my right foot and it just snapped like a twig. A week later I was hopping over to turn a light switch off 5 feet away from the couch and i ended up jumping on my shoe and tumbled over breaking my left foot and cracking the bone on my right foot where the end of the screw is.
I have just gotten back from my 4 weeks in two casts and i have signs of healing on my first broken foot that had surgery in both the new crack and the fracture site. my recently broken foot on the left shows no signs of healing yet but no pain at all. So it’s six more weeks of being off my feet and out of work. HR says i officially get fired july 5th and ive had to extend my apt lease another year. ugh this is such a pain in my ass to not be able to walk whatsoever…
hopefully at the end of these six weeks ill be able to do something. I’ve been placed in two of those frankenstein boots, which i wear some of the time. Since I can’t do anything but sit on the couch i usually take them off and just sit here and put them back on if i have to move around.
June 7, 2008 at 10:32 pm
Just to give a quick update. I went to the doc this week and my films showed good healing. On top of which I am pain free and was instructed to begin walking in a boot whenever I was comfortable with it. Since my appointment was 2 days shy of 2 weeks post-surg, I waited 2 additional days before adding 25% of my body weight to my surgical foot. So far I am completely pain free and doing rehab exercises so that I am able to return to athletics as soon as my fracture is completely healed. I am following the rehab program i found in this article.
http://www.theacc.com/genrel/092005aaf.html
Being an athlete I have found the information both helpful and as a source of optimism.
June 16, 2008 at 2:01 pm
I njured my foot on 5/25 playing softball and was diagnosed with a jones fracture on 5/26. It has been 4 weeks since the injury and foot has good and bad days. My Dr. wanted a hard cast, but because of the summer heat I wanted nothing to do with a hard cast and elected to wear a walking boot. But I often go without the boot because it seems to aggrivate my foot even more, although I am being good about not putting weight on my foot. I have read a majority of the posts on this blog and I have a couple of questions: 1) If my bone hasn’t showed signs of beginning to heal at my check-up tomorrow night, should I schedule surgery? 2) How long is the recovery time from surgery?
Thanks,
Andrew
June 16, 2008 at 10:46 pm
Andrew,
I do not want to tell you what to do, I mean it is your body. I attempted the conservative approach at first and my bone showed good healing from week 0-4…however it showed none from week 4-12 which was what prompted me to opt for the surgery. However, If I could do it all over again, I would have had the surgery as soon as possible. As it was, I waited 12 weeks until surgery which was about 3.5 weeks ago. I can tell you from my experience that the way my foot feels now is far better than it did 3.5 weeks after the initial break. I am currently walking without pain in a boot and working on my rehab so that when the bone is healed I will be ready to return to activities.
Dr’s try the conservative/non-surgical approach because most people want to avoid surgery if they can. If your biggest concern is being able to use your foot again athletically, then surgery is probably the best option. Typical recovery time from a procedure with a screw fixation and a bone graft is 6-8 weeks. If you are young and healthy you should have no problem recovering in that time frame.
June 19, 2008 at 9:22 pm
hello all!
thanks for all of the helpful information on this site! i had my jones fracture about 3.5 weeks ago and was put into a hard cast for 5 weeks with no x-ray ordered until the 5 weeks is up. the big plus seems to be that i was diagnosed right away and splinted then casted. yes, i too got the orders for the crutches. the bruising under my arms is quite nice – and the looks i get on the street from strangers as i’m crutching it at least 8 blocks to and from work some days is quite amusing.
a question for everyone – i have 4 dogs and have had to walk them by ditching my crutches. i use my good foot, have a thick soled cast shoe and use the heel of that to scoot along. has anyone ever done some weight bearing on their heel during the healing process? what have your results been? will this totally not allow healing to begin? i unfortunately, like some here, don’t have round the clock support at home where i can be on crutches all the time. any anecdotal stories similar to mine are appreciated.
keep the chin up fellow jones fracturers!
June 19, 2008 at 11:57 pm
Hello all. I am officially off of the boot tomorrow. I hope this is the last of the injury. Good luck to everyone with this. The end is in sight. Now to rebuild my muscle!
June 22, 2008 at 2:17 am
Hey all I fractured my 5th metatarsal on the 2nd of jun 2008 while me and my friends were on a grad trip and my leg was put in a cast for 4-6 weeks. 3 weeks later I can walk without crutches but my leg is still in a cast. This was the worst time to fracture my foot as it’s the beginning of summer and my friends are all going to the beach/waterfalls/on boat trips etc and I can’t fully enjoy them… Though I’m told that I can take the cast off after 1 or 2 more weeks hopefully!
June 26, 2008 at 2:10 am
hey everyone!
i broke my 5th almost 7 months ago playing soccer. i went straight to a walking boot, no weight for 2 weeks, then in the boot for another 6 weeks. after that the doctor said it was healing and i did not need to wear the boot any longer. but no running for another month, well i was stupid and decided it was ok to go back to sports, pushed through the pain and now there is a large, quarter size bump just above where the break was. HAS ANYONE ELSE HAD THIS BUMP? i dont know if i need to go back to the doctor or if its normal after a break… any advice would be greatly appreciated!!!
June 27, 2008 at 4:54 am
Melissa – I know that I had that bump right when my break was made (not to freak you out!). So, better safe than sorry, I’d say go and check with the doc. Good luck! I’m getting my hard cast off after 5 weeks next Wednesday and am hoping for a boot (and not another cast or surgery!)
July 1, 2008 at 1:05 am
Sean,
Thanks for responding! I think I will have it checked out when I get a chance to slow down! good luck with your foot!
July 1, 2008 at 5:13 pm
Hi Everyone.
I broke my 5th on June 26 and was told by the doc it was a jones fracture. I went to the hospital and was in an aircast within 6hrs. The doctor told me that i would be on crutches for 7-10 days and then be able to walk with the boot on for 6 weeks. I am normally a quick healer and have already started putting conservative weight on the foot (without pain) and its only been 4 days. However, reading all of the comments makes me wonder if a non weight bearing approach is smarter.
Any tips would be great
Thanks
July 2, 2008 at 4:25 pm
Hi all! Just got to the ortho today and got my cast off! Woo woo! I saw a different doc who looked at my original xray and said that my fracture was a bit too low to be a Jones. He thought the first doctor had misjudged. Egad! At any rate, now in a boot for 6 weeks and only need crutches if there is pain. So far so good. The pressure from the boot actually feels REALLY good on my foot.
Best of luck to all in the healing process. I still have a bit to go but am glad that I transitioned this way today.
July 4, 2008 at 9:28 am
Pete, if I were you, I would keep the weight off until your next doctor visit. I broke my fifth metatarsal on June 13 – that was Friday the 13th! – and origionally was put in a soft shoes with crutches. Not feeling comfortable with that, I landed an appointment with one of the leading U.S. orthopidics in NYC a few days later and they immediately said Jones Fracture, casted my leg and NO weight at all or it will not heal. I’m a marathon runner, very active and am going crazy being so immobilized, but it’s probably the smartest thing to just wait it out until you get cleared from your doctor. If you mess it up now, you will regret it later for sure!
To those who have made it through this horrible fracture…keep providing the encouraging news for those of us here who are struggling through it! It helps alot to know there is light at the end of the tunnel!!
The best to everyone!
July 6, 2008 at 10:04 pm
Hey Everyone
I saw the doctor this week (6wks post surg.) and was told that the screw and bone graft are healing very well. I was taken out of my walking boot and told i could start wearing shoes. I immediately went and had my gait assessed and then was fit for new running shoes that will offer me support and help correct the over-pronation that is occurring during my heal-strike.
The shoes feel great and i have no pain to report after about 5 days of walking around and i have gone on a long bike ride all but one of the days. My Doc told me that i should slowly ease myself back into lower impact activities just no basketball/volleyball or anything along those lines. I am planning on taking batting/fielding practice with my baseball team this week and could not be more excited.
I am finally seeing the light at the end of the tunnel in terms of this situation. March 6 (the day of the break) seems so long ago…This has been such a frustrating experience, It was hard to stay positive but, being negative solves nothing.
Tips I could offer to those who have recently suffered a Jones fx. would include opting for surgery in the case of someone who lives an active lifestyle – the blood supply to this injury is so spotty that playing the waiting game via the conservative approach may keep you out of athletics for way longer than you could imagine.
Also Nutritional changes during bone healing, No Soda (due to phosphoric acid), caffeine, smoking or alcohol to name a few because those things inhibit calcium absorption which is needed more than normal during bone repair. I stopped all of these things (well i never smoked anyway) as well as no red meats and getting accupuncture treatment on the area around the foot during my post surgery recovery and I am now walking well and pain free at 6wks post surgery.
I know I not everyone is the same, so I wish all of you the absolute best of luck with this frustrating ordeal. I will continue to check back and update you guys with any more developments such as my future return to the basketball court (fingers crossed).
Good Luck again, take care!
Brian
July 8, 2008 at 9:39 am
Wow, I just found this site today & have spent ALOT of time on it reading everyones stories. It really helps reading about others who are going through the same thing. I don’t have a Jones fracture though. It’s a spiral fracture on my fifth that goes from the top around & down to the bottom. They weren’t very optimistic that it could heal on it’s own since it’s slightly displaced, but decided to try. After 7 weeks in a boot & non-weightbearing….absolutely no healing. So I’m going to hear tomorrow about surgery & a plate. They arent sure about a bone graft, but it sounds like it’s necessary from listening to everyone on this board.
Did I mention that I don’t currently have health insurance? The only time in my life & of course this happens!! I stepped off a chair just right from putting up a birthday sign for my seven year old & “Crack”!
I will check back soon to see how everyone is doing on their recoveries. Maybe now I won’t be as depressed knowing that there are so many going through the same frustration.
July 8, 2008 at 3:22 pm
I got my Jones fracture Mid March… It was due to stress (exercising to much). I’m 21 years old, fairly heavy but athletic. The incident occurred when I was walking down the stairs and my ankle rolled in (the exercising just weakened it). Anyway, I saw an ortho doc the week of and he put in in a walking cast (non-weight bearing for 6 weeks). I kept going back and it showed no new bone growth. He recommended surgery and I didn’t like the idea so I got a 2nd opinion. The other Dr. agreed and I got surgery about 5 weeks ago. I saw him yesterday (after being non-weight bearing for that long), and he said it’s healing slowly but I can walk w/o the crutches.. I’m currently using 1 crutch b/c of the pain from using my atrophied leg/foot. I agree to all of you that this is a prolonged/depressing/frustrating ordeal. My Dr, also suggested for me to get a bone stimulator which I am picking up on fri. I just hope I can trust him when he tells me I can play sports in the fall…
July 9, 2008 at 9:36 pm
Just back from my doctor today and after 4 weeks in a cast, there was NO bone growth and it appeared that my fracture was slightly wider. Not good. I was recasted, given a bone stimulator and go back in 2 weeks to check in. Has anyone had good, bad, indifferent results with bone stimulators?
July 11, 2008 at 5:00 pm
My surgery is scheduled for July 22nd for the plate and a bone graft. REally nervous, but I’ll be glad to make a positive step forward in my healing.
How expensive are bone stimulators to rent & are they really effective?
July 11, 2008 at 10:03 pm
Hi everyone! I broke my foot on May 10, 2008 and it is a Jones fracture. I originally had a back slab on for 10 days with total NWB and crutches. Three days after breaking my foot (just by twisting my foot on some uneven ground), I was experiencing a lot of pain at the back of my calf. Working as a nurse and knowing that this is a classic sign of a DVT, I went to the hospital and sure enough discovered after an ultrasound that I had a blood clot in my lower leg. The foot itself never caused a lot of pain, but the blood clot made it feel like my leg from the knee down was on fire whenever I had my leg dependent. Thankfully this is no longer the case, and I wouldn’t even know I have a clot in my leg, except for the fact that I’m taking blood thinners and have to get my blood tested frequently. After the initial 10 days of the cast, I got a walking boot, but wasn’t allowed to put any weight on my foot yet. Returned to the doctor 2 weeks later and was told that I could start partial weight bearing with the boot and crutches as I felt able to, and to return in a month. I saw the doctor on July 2 and it has finally started to heal! I was told to gradually get rid of the crutches, and am now able to walk with the boot crutch free which is so nice.
I have a little boy who just turned 11 months old today. I have never broken any bones before and this whole experience has been one of the most frustrating things I’ve ever had to go through. When I broke my foot he wasn’t even crawling yet, and now he is crawling and walking along furniture, and is trying to walk on his own. I am so thankful to my in-laws for all of their support during this. We don’t know what we would have done without them. We rented a wheelchair for in the house, so then I can at least carry my son on my lap as I wheel around. He’s a big boy, and I’m not allowed to carry him yet. I’m supposed to return to work from maternity leave in the middle of August, but I may not be able to depending on my foot. I work 12 hour shifts on my feet all day with lots of lifting and physical exertion, so time will tell. Reading everyone’s stories is nice, because people who haven’t experienced something like this just don’t understand what it’s like.
July 12, 2008 at 7:58 pm
adsqprgh ayejn uaobjnw aetv cguhsi pomvwra sugewj
July 16, 2008 at 12:33 pm
Hey all! I sustained a Jones fx on January 24. I think too much exercise and was initially a stress fx that I just ignored. No pain, no gain, right? Anyway, was put in NWB cast for 7 weeks, and then had screw fixation with bone graft on Marh 12. Was put in boot after surgery and then allowed to walk after 8 weeks. Three orthopod visits later (each visit one month apart) and I am back in the Boot because the outer part of the bone refuses to heal. When on earth am I going to be able to exercise again? I miss my golf, my tennis, running. Anyone else have similar experience? Am I just being whiny? Or, should I just accept the fact that this is “the nature of the injury and keep on track with the doctor’s orders?” Thanks for your input!
July 20, 2008 at 9:18 pm
My fracture occured June 13 (Friday!) and it was dx as a Jones. After reading many of the research articles on the internet, it appears that physicians differ in their criteria. At any rate, mine is not an avulsion and certainly appears to be in the “zone” to be classifeid as a Jones. I am lucky, that I work with some top orthopedic surgeons and decided to go with the intermedullary screw, 6 days post fx.
I have been in a nearly knee high aircast walking boot, totally non-weight bearing since my sx on June 19th. Started a bone stimulator on July 3 and last week ( 4 wks post op) we saw the beginnings of bone healing on x-ray. At 6 weeks if all looks good, I am to start partial weight bearing, then, hopefully full weight bearing at 7 weeks post op. I haven’t asked but get the feeling I will be wearing this boot for a while, before getting into any sort of normal shoe. I am thinking of getting the shorter boot, if that is that case. Has anyone used the shorter aircast walking boot?
After reading all the horrific stories of timely healing and slow progress, I am keeping my fingers crossed that having the early fixation will speed my healing and recovery. I’ve been careful about nutrition: calcium, magnesium, lysine, vit.K etc, in my diet and supplements. I have cut back on caffiene but must admit,I have not given it up altogether (nor my glasses of wine on the weekends)so we’ll see. I am curious about those who have tried accupunture and am going to look into starting some sessions.
To all of you who are just just starting out, I wish I I could tell you: GO FOR THE SX. But I really won’t know until I start weight bearing, how this is going to turn out. I ‘ll keep you posted.
GOOD LUCK EVERYONE!
July 22, 2008 at 5:58 pm
Here’s some encouragement for those of you who are NOT having surgery and feel like the healing will never happen. I broke my 5th on June 13, Jones. After the first 4 weeks, no bone growth. I was recast and sent on my way for another 2 week – all this time, NWB. I was also given a bone stimulator to use 10 hours a day. Just got back from the doctor where I was sure the news was going to be surgery as my only way to heal. To my absolute surprise, my cast came off and can now gradually add weight so that within 10 days I am back on two feet fully. I literally had no bone regeneration UNTIL I started using the bone stimulator. It made a significant difference in my healing. I also took some of your suggestions to add calcium daily – a good tip and it sure can’t hurt!
If you have the choice and can get a bone stimulator early AND use it as much as they suggest, I believe that it helps. I know how horribly hard this break is. It’s discouraging, it’s furstrating and it seems to never end or heal. I hope that everyone takes good care and finds some light at the end of the tunnel.
July 23, 2008 at 12:09 am
whats up guys….
I have to tell you guys that I did the conservative way for 6 weeks and ended up having to get surgery in the end
MY advice….get the surgery from the start….its a whole lot easier and less stressful
I cant walk but i’m not in a cast and the procedure was simple and easy
Good luck to those with a jones fracture…it is very frustating but you will get thru it
July 26, 2008 at 12:46 pm
On July 2nd, my 17-year old son landed on his foot wrong dancing (ironic, uh)? Went to the emergency room on Sunday 5th, Orthopedic on Monday, Orthopedic surgeon on Monday (one who is part of the Steelers’ team doctors), and on Friday he had surgery (July 10th). Because he is an up- and coming- athlete (6′5″, 285 lbs.), they opted to do the surgery right away. He was off his foot totally for 3 days (no movement at all, and had it elevated). For the next 3 days, he used to the crutches to get around limited. After a week, he was allowed to move about on crutches with NO pressure to the foot. It has been 2 weeks since surgery, and the stitches our out. It looks good. Does anyone have experience with therapy? Healing time? Football season begins in 4 weeks. He has a great chance of being scouted to a good school. Anyone’s thoughts on his recovery? I am concerned of his foot healing correctly before playing again. But, after 5 years of hard work, I would like to see his dream come true, too. Anyone?
August 3, 2008 at 2:46 pm
I am 10 weeks post surgery. My doc said the bone “looks like a freakin rock” I am walking normal with no complications and am only 6 weeks away from being clear for all activities including basketball. I am riding my bike and doing elliptical to get back in shape and am able to play baseball/softball with the only restriction that I jog around the bases. I am so happy with the results of my surgery, the only regret I have is not getting it right away.
August 6, 2008 at 11:29 am
Now 3 months out of surgery! I still have minor pain everyday but it is decreasing and walking is awesome! Good luck to all, you’ll make it through.
August 13, 2008 at 9:55 am
I tripped and fractured ( jones) my right foot on July 3rd. I have been in a hard cast, just below my knee since. The xrays are showing good signs of healing however my Doctor will not consider weight bearing until the completion of the 8th week. I am told to expect a non weight bearing boot for a week to 10 days and then a partial weight bearing device for another 10 days. I have a very conserative Doctor who is very hung up on following the rule book with no exception or deviation. If all goes well I will probably be out of work 12 weeks.
August 14, 2008 at 4:33 am
After six weeks in hard cast without signs of healing my Doctor suggested surgery with bone graft.
I would like to ask those who had the experience of surgery: is this a routine operation? any ortopedic surgeon will be OK or one has to look for specialists in Jones fracture. From your comments I got the idea that this is a routine procedure. Am I right?
August 14, 2008 at 9:49 pm
Mike…
I can tell you that my orthopedic surgeon was a foot specialist, but other than that, I’m not sure that you would need a Jones fracture specialist.
I sustained a Jones fracture on May 24 and had my surgery on July 2nd after 5 weeks in a hard cast without healing (in fact it was worse after the 5 weeks). The whole procedure was quick, I had pain after…but nothing more than expected. I was in another cast non-weight bearing for 6 weeks following the surgery, have a tiny scar and have finally been released to go back to work on August 18.
I would have to echo the sentiments of most others here – if I had it to do over again I would have opted for surgery immediately and by-passed the first 5 weeks that did nothing more than waste time.
Hope that helps somewhat. Good luck…I know it seems like the agony will never end, but it does!
August 18, 2008 at 6:02 pm
Hi everybody…after 5 months of conservative treatment my foot is finally 100 percent healed with the new bone fully developed. I just wanna let people know that with the right doctor and the right diet, conservative treatment does work for the most part. I am also an athlete playing basketball for a team, and i did just as the doc told me and now i feel as if my foot has never been better
August 19, 2008 at 10:26 pm
So, just thought I’d give an update on my progression. I am nearly 9 weeks post op. I had my sx 6 days after injury. I was non weight bearing for 6 weeks then started partial weight bearing and progressed to full. Had another xray today. It is healing nicely and the doc said, I can do anything I want. It still gets sore, especially by the end of the day, if I have been on it a lot. Did an hour bike ride the other day. Biking hardly hurts, walking still a challenge. I am returning my rental scooter. For those of you who are interested. check out roll-a-bout.com. It was a lifesaver at work for those 6 weeks.
As far as the rehab: check with your doc. I did come out of my boot and did some ankle range of motion, scar massage during those 6 weeks. Now I am working on a variety of exercises for strengthening and balance, even though I am weight bearing, I want to be prepared for hiking before I get into it.
Oh and I am still going to use the bone stimulator. I definately think it made a difference. Don’t forget icing. Although I must admit that as soon as I began weight bearing, my skin color and swelling improved, I am still trying to ice after exercise/therapy or at the end of my work day. I expect that it will get sore for a while, but I am so glad that I went for the sx, right away. also, I am back in many of my shoes. I find that firm bottoms, like dansko clogs feel better than tennis/runnign shoes for any length of time.
Hope that helps. I will let you know if I come up against any snags in my progress. Good luck everyone
August 24, 2008 at 12:05 am
I just found this site and am so glad. I’ve read all the stories and everyone is so different, yet similar.
My displaced Jones Fracture occured on June 26th. I went to the ER, was told to not weight bear, and make an appt with the Ortho asap. The Ortho diagnosed me and planned surgery for July 2nd. The screw was inserted and I was put in a very thick, up to the knee fiberglass cast that was just removed last week. So now, after 7 weeks, I’m in a camo boot, still not allowed to weight bear, and feeling anxious about being cooped up so long. I go back in 4 weeks for another xray, and I’m hoping I can partially weight bear by then. I’ve never injured anything before, so this experience has really been an eye opener. Lucky for me, I work at home, so my kids and hubby have been helpful and I’ve been able to elevate my foot as much as possible and recover. The only thing I can’t do is wear the camo boot to bed because it drives me crazy. Instead, I wrap an ace bandage around it and rest it on a pillow.
August 25, 2008 at 2:54 pm
HI everyone.
Two weeks ago I fell walking home late at night, I believe I simply tripped over my Rainbow sandal. You can believe I threw those away, especially with all of the pain they have caused. I couldn’t put any weight on my right foot but initially I thought I was okay… maybe that was the wine talked. So my boyfriend gave me a piggy back ride home. All the while I was in shock and found this to be incredibly hilarious. He on the other hand did not. haha. The following morning I realized that I was seriously injured and caught a cab to the ER. After an exam and an x-ray the doctor told me that he did not believe my fracture to be the kind to need surgery. I was relived especially because I was flying out of down the following day to go camping for a week. They fit me with a giant black ‘moon boot’ and crutches. I got special treatment at the airport and was given a wheel chair to bypass all other passengers. that was nice :o) . After a extremely difficult week of camping and completely over exerting myself I got home and had an appointment with the podiatrist right away. I kept trying to be optimistic and that he would just tell me everything was fine. I had spent a half hour before the appointment cleaning and rubbing dirt and sand off of the boot- to attempt to make it look like I had not been ‘gallivanting’ in the woods for 6 days.
One they performed their own x-rays and an exam he concluded that I indeed would need a pin to create a reunion of the bone. I have also been experiencing pain in my ankle, so instead of having surgery the following day- they sent me to get an MRI to determine if I have torn any ligaments that need to be mended as well while they are in there. I had an hour long MRI that wasn’t bad at all besides the really LOUD beeps the machine made. I now have a CD-ROM thing with all of the info but I cannot review it until next Wednesday with my podiatrist when he returns from vacation. Of course I get injured when all of the doctors are on vaca! Anyway. I was really hoping to not have surgery, but after doing a little research and reading everyone else’s comments I am thankful that my doctor is opting to do surgery right away. Living in Seattle I don’t have a car and count on my feet as transportation. I am also about to start my senior year at university and am optimistic I will only be in a boot by then. My doctor told me about 4 weeks in the boot post surgery… but from what I have read my healing is going to take a lot longer then I had originally thought. As much as I hate the idea of something being permanently DRILLED inside of me, I am starting to grasp that it is for the best. and that my overall healing will be better in the long run. I recently had started practicing Bikram yoga and am sad that I had to stop going. They said they would hold my subscription for when I am healed, so that is nice. I am just worried about getting active again, and if the screw is going to effect me. Well I guess I will give an update once I am hopped up on pain killers and sitting around. Was everybody’s surgeries out patient? Im worried about my boyfriend having to take care of me initially. Was it just awful?
August 27, 2008 at 3:39 pm
Hi everyone. I was glad to find this site. Its been reassuring to know others understand the frustrations that go along with being “cooped up” for so long….
My story is….I was running to jump into my pool on June 8th. When I pushed off my foot (which was slightly turned sideways on the pool coping), I felt a snap, and instant pain as I hit the water. I went to the local UCC and was found tp have a broken right 5th metatarsal. (Since then, I found out it was a Jones Fx., but no one told me this at the time). I was given some ortho shoe with velcro, and was told to use crutches with NWB until I went to see Ortho for my consult. 2-1/2 weeks later I went to Ortho. The doc there re took my xray and told me the bone was properly aligned and since I seemed to be able to walk on it, he said I could weight bear as long as I was wearing a supportive tennis shoe, even though he stated that he almost always casts a break like mine…(he was an old doc) I was glad to hear this, but still had quite a bit of pain. I figured since the doc wasn’t concerned about it maybe I shouldn’t be either…A couple of weeks later, I called to make another appt. in Ortho because I was in a lot of pain. I was seen the following day. Another xray was done. The dos didn’t say too much except they gave me 3 weeks off from work ( I am a nurse and work in a busy pediatrics unit), and they gave me a boot splint to wear. I was told I could partially weight bear. At that time, I was give another f/u appt. for 3 weeks. (Now, at this time, No one still had mentioned “Jones fracture”)….O.K., so 3 weeks go by. I get to my appt. Have yet another xray done, and the doctor says to me…Gee, its been about 8-9 weeks, and there is no signs of this Jones fracture healing at all. He said this wasn’t good obviously. He then set me up for an appt. with the Ortho surgeon to have him consult. That appt.I have that appt coming up in 2 days from today…To say the least, I’m pretty frustrated. As A nurse I also know that someone screwed up and there is no way that I should have been weight-bearing at all with this type of fracture. I am almost at the 12 week mark now and I have a lot of pain on the outside of my right foot. I’m pretty sure this surgeon is going to want to place a screw in my foot because its been so ,any weeks and still no union of the bone . It really ticks me off that people get jerked around like this. I could have been totally healed by now…Instead, I am just starting out after almost 3 months after breaking it!!!
To all of you out there with similar stories…I share your pain and frustration!!!
September 6, 2008 at 7:34 am
i tripped on a stone on august 30th . waited 2 days and went to the doc . was diagnosed with a jones fracture,i had just come off a foot injury 2 weeks prior to that, a torn fascia. the right side of my foot has not felt right since my fascia injury. i wonder if it became weakened and thus more susceptible to this injury. good luck to all of you jones people. i am an active person and this is a nightmare for me.
September 6, 2008 at 10:21 pm
I sustained jones fx July 1…just walking down into the cabin of a boat and rolled y foot…the guy driving the boat cod hear the sound of the break..it was painfull. I went about 1 week non weight bearing, then the next 5 weeks walking in a black boot that came up to my knee. NO healing at week 6 and opted for the surgery about 2 weeks ago. My first follow up to surgery show no healing yet buck the screw definitely closed the gap in the break. I am now on 4 more weeks of non weight bearing and then will go back for x ray…I am praying that there is some healing when I return for my xray in 4 weeks. i am taking off my aircast at night just so it is more comfortable to sleep…I wonder if that is impacting any healing? this injury is very depressing.
September 7, 2008 at 10:33 am
just read a few other posts…natalie…the surgery was not bad at all…first 2 days are bad but really not after that. The worst part about this process is sitting around doing nothing, literally nothing. Rest, time, and non-weight bearing seems to be the most effective post surgery healing solution. my kids are 2,5,6 , my wife basically does everything while I sit around…it is very frustrating.
September 8, 2008 at 3:35 pm
I was on holiday and roolled my ankle hard off the curb and completely wiped out… I was partially anesthised from too many beers and managed to ride my bike back home. Woke up the next day with a huge ankle and almost fainted when I stepped on the floor. Having suffered several bad sprains I did the usual rest, ice, elevation, etc… and the ankle got better day by day… walked around on it for 2 whole weeks with pain but still thought it was a sprain. Even went surfing, played drums, drove for 10 hours and went to an outdoor festival. Finally went to the doc cause it wasn’t getting better and there was a fracture of the 5th metetarsal… Strange thing is it didn’t hurt so bad that I couldn’t walk… Anyways in a cast for 4 weeks now… 2 down, 2 to go… Anyone else here walk around on a broken foot for days/weeks before going in? Also, any idea if this will seriously delay healing?
September 9, 2008 at 2:56 pm
I was MOH in in friend’s wedding and the NEXT day, on my way to the post-wedding brunch, rolled my ankle on a garden hose. Thank goodness it wasn’t the day before!
I thought it was a sprain or strain, so elevated and iced and it seemed to get better. Five days later, saw a GP at the student health office who had x-rays done just to be safe. Turns out to be an acute Jones fracture and a couple of hairlines too. The GP sent me to a sports doctor, who referred an Ortho and gave me a walking boot. Am seeing the Ortho in the morning.
Been non weight-bearing for more than two weeks now…But what freaks me out it that it DOESN’T HURT. I suppose I should be counting my lucky stars, but this doesn’t seem right. It feels weird sometimes, but has none of the pain I had when I broke my arm in high school. The doctors are not concerned and say I’m just lucky. The sports doctor said I’m tough…which I’m NOT. I have feeling in my foot and can wiggle my toes, but not as much as usual. Is this lack of sharp pain something I should be worried about, or am I just nit-picking?
September 10, 2008 at 11:31 am
almost same situation with me… although it hurt to walk the first 2 weeks before I got the cast, the foot itself didn’t hurt and I could move my ankle around and wiggle toes no problem… 3 weeks later in the cast and no pain at all except for the occasional calf cramp from the cast… I’m hoping this is a good since… cast comes off in 10 days if all goes well… Then again al I had was a small fracture with no displacement
September 11, 2008 at 11:33 am
I was in a similar situation to the last 2 posts where after wearing the boot a while (after a few weeks of no weight) my foot didnt really hurt so my doc put me in shoes and said to give it a shot. I made it 3 days before it all swelled up and i had ankle and knee pain because i was compensating for my foot. I went in for surgery at the end of May had a very quick and successful recovery. I was playing baseball and softball by the end of july and have been cleared for running and basketball this week. I am very excited to see how the foot responds although I am definitely easing my way back into these things. Some tips I could give is to focus on your nutrition and rehab exercises – really work at them and it will pay off. I also had acupuncture done which I think really helped the healing. And finally when you are back in shoes talk to your doc about a good pair of gym/running shoes for you to wear around until you are comfortable enough to wear other footwear. My doc suggested brooks and I went to a running specialty store which used a pedograph to analyze my gait and fit me with the proper model of shoe. I only wish i could find a pair of basketball shoes or cleats that I have as much confidence in. Good luck to all of you stay positive, focus on getting better and you will be before you know it.
September 11, 2008 at 6:58 pm
I broke my 5th on July 2nd when I rolled my ankle. Non-weight bearing cast for five weeks (used a walking scooter); Second X-ray showed little change. Walking cast for another five weeks. Third X-ray today showed it is no better (if not worse) than on July 2nd. I have surgery scheduled for October 3rd. I wish I would have just had the surgery in July rather than wait three months. Tired of the boot. At least it’s my left foot. Something to be grateful for.
September 11, 2008 at 8:40 pm
I sustained my jones fracture to my right foor 5 Jan this year playing mini golf lol!!I immediately saw my local GP who put me into a cam walker for 6 weeks, my 1st and 2nd x-ray showed no healing. I was then referred to an ortho surgeon who put me into a fibreglass cast for 3 weeks to see if it would heal. My 3rd xray showed some healing and I was told I might have been lucky to avoid surgery scheduling another set of xrays in 6 weeks. Well after six weeks even without the xray I suspected it had not healed as I still had pain whenever I walked short distances.
I had my surgery two weeks ago and am hoping it will heal this time. I am determined to stay off my foot until its healed and even though I am totally bored doing this I can’t imagine this going on much longer. This injury has been extremely frustrating and at times depressing so its been good to read other’s stories.
September 11, 2008 at 9:33 pm
I am a RN an Indiana Jones and acquired a Jones fracture from a fall on a boat deck 04/01/08. A hairline fracture diagnosed in a small island hosp USVI.4/8/08 I saw Ortho-surgery specialist in Indianapolis. I left, casted with more than a hair-line fracture. I am 53 years old and not in the highest bone-growth period of my life. I am like all of these other 119 replies totally frustrated with the fracture and the treatment I received. Three xrays later [12] weeks my fracture is a stage 3. Surgery is finally planned. July 10th was surgery and a titanium plate and 4 screws and bone-grafting were done. I had worked as a RN doing bedside care until July 5th. My 94 year-old father, had an appointment with his orthopedic surgeon, who had replaced Dad’s rt. hip a few years earlier, He asked me why I was casted and I told him my story. This physician stated that he always does open reduction internal fixations on acute Jones fractures using a pin or screw and his patients require 3-5 weeks and are walking. He said he never waits a few weeks for these to heal because the circulation to this site is too poor for a good healing, without long-term non-weight bearing, if healing even occurs then. He always treats these when they are acute fractures. I told my physician that I wished I had gone ahead and had the surgery in April.He stated hind-site is always 20/20. I thought I had gone to an Orthopedic Specialist for his expertise and years of experience healing orthopedic fractures. I guess I had some expectation that he might have a little fore-site on the way to healing this situation. I guess I felt it was his duty, given my stature and age, to make me see the wisdom in his advise, and it should have been said clearly and succinctly you need surgery this week or next week at the latest. I have gone through all my acquired sick-time and 7 or more weeks of 60% pay,I have had a jobless person help me with home-care for 300 bucks a week and have eaten into 2 CD’s to pay for my slip on the deck. I get to go back to work this Monday on transitional duty in a motorized wheel-chair. It will be Sept 15th. I have lost time money and nearly a 31 year career in nursing because of my lack of foresite. My advise is to get ortho-surgeon who has read all of the latest journals and studies and isn’t afraid to be a little arrogant about what is right and what would be a mistake. This would probably be an Ortho-surgeon from a Medical school who heads and directs a dept. and publishes his or her own research. It certainly will never be another Ortho-surgeon who operates out of his own hospital.A hospital that may not have a lot of pressure for recorded results or as much monitoring of its physicians as it should have. Pain after the ankle-block wore off was excruciating. Post-op they worked very hard to get control of my pain to get my blood-pressure down off the ceiling. After 2-3 Dilaudid pushes and 2-3 improved Blood-pressures they pulled my IV and sent me home. My ankle-block was still in effect when I went home. I only had percocet and ibuprofen to tame pain that was off my personal scale of 1-10. I felt angry frustrated and bewildered as to why I did not have a dilaudid PCA button to push in response to my pain. I wondered if I might be about to stroke, from a high blood-pressure that resulted from pain that had me writhing and crying. I would have prefered surgery in April with placement of 1 pin or 1 screw. Tired of casts boots crutches wheel-chairs and my little bed-room in the downstairs of my house. The sad thing is I am probably one of the more fortunate Indiana Jones’.
September 19, 2008 at 2:29 pm
Hi all. I twisted my foot on an uneven sidewalk walking to my car while digging in my purse for my car keys. So now I’m in week 5 of a scheduled 8 wearing this awful cast which I have come to hate with a passion. I’ve been told no weight is to be put on this foot for 8 weeks. Then I go to get the 2nd set of x-rays and the cast removed. I had expected that by that point I’d be on the final stage of recovery but now after reading all these posts am very afraid that I’m in for a long process. I was hoping to be “normal” for my son’s wedding two weeks after this cast comes off. But now I am totally confused as to what I should or should not be doing. I find it more comfortable to keep my leg out on the footstool as the cast is looser then. When I put it down, my leg seems to swell up and the cast gets tight so I have no idea which is supposed to be better for healing. I am also afraid that after 8 weeks of trying to keep sane at home that I will be told it hasn’t healed and being put right back to square one with 8 weeks of my life wasted. My doctor (an orthopedic surgeon) said that surgery would normally be for athletes so I went along with his preference for conservative treatment. At the time I never even heard of a Jones fracture or that it might be so cursedly hard to heal. I wonder if I should get a second opinion or ask for an interim x-ray. I am so confused. I AM glad that I read to cut out sodas and caffeine. I totally didn’t think of that so all those Diet Cokes and Hershey’s Kisses are going to be history after today. So now it will be milk and I’ll get some calcium tablets.
September 23, 2008 at 1:14 am
Hi Linda, you never know you might be one of the lucky ones, I know somebody who had the same fracture and she just had to wear a boot for 12 weeks. I would, however, ask for interim x-rays before the eight week mark. I know what you mean by wearing the cast, I absolutely hate it, I am very tempted to get it removed and just wear the boot. When my foot gets swollen I get a cold pak and place it on the cast, it does cool the foot down. When I first broke my foot I ended up with a DVT so now I am paranoid about getting another so every twitch I get a bit jumpy. Keep you chin up, you only have 3 weeks to go, I only have 2.2 weeks to go.
September 24, 2008 at 10:32 pm
Hopped onto a curb 8/29/08 while delivering a pizza (I move fast when I work). Immediate pain in my left foot. I yelled out several profanities but still had another order to deliver. My car is a stick so I had to do the clutch thing very carefully.
Taking the order to the door I did the Igor thing, dragging my left foot, all hunched over.
When I got back to the store and took my boot off it looked like someone had cut an orange in half and stuck it under my skin.
Anyway, ER, xray, fractured 5th. NWB. Saw ortho 5 days later, confirmed jones.
Now I’m 3 weeks into the crutch thing, dealing with workers comp (only 2 days ago did my employer send the insurance company the paperwork), and starting to go a bit mad.
My outlook has been pretty positive, but the thought I could be on crutches for many more months is enough to send my wife out for more whiskey.
I’ve been good about not putting weight on the gimp foot, but when I move my foot a certain way, the pain is exactly the same as the day after I had the cast put on.
I see the doc in less than a week and if no healing has occurred I’m pushing for surgery.
The foot part, the pain, it’s not bad. It’s the %#@% crutches, opening doors, not being able to carry stuff. I’m planning to sew some saddlebags for my crutches so at least I can carry stuff around the house.
Before this happened, I walked everywhere, to work, to play music, to the grocery store, etc. Now it’s drive drive drive. Walking kept me happy, fit, and balanced. Now, well, the crutches are good exercise but it’s not the same and I’m starting to feel a little down.
I have two jobs but can only do one, and the one I can do is on the second floor of a building without an elevator. Every morning I’ve gotta hump my laptop up 18 stairs and every other day I ‘almost’ lose my balance.
Sorry for the rambling post; don’t really have a point I just wanted to share a bit of my experience.
Good luck to you all.
September 25, 2008 at 6:24 pm
Seth, I admire you have conquered the stairs and gone to work. I have been home because I have 12 steps to get into work and I’m up another flight after that. No elevator or ramps. Biggest headache for me is the cast and crutches and not being to carry much. At least I have a tank top with a built in bra and I stick everything in there! I look like a deformed kangaroo most times. Just try to take it one day at a time, that’s all I can suggest and what keeps me sane. Hang in there!
October 1, 2008 at 1:44 pm
OK, I’m out of the cast and doing physio… Foot still hurts but slowly getting better day by day… As for the physio all he makes me do is stand on one foot for half and hour to regain balance. Exact same thing every session (had 5 so far) while he reads a magazine! Is this normal? Anyone else have experience with physio and the stuff they make you do? Just to compare…
October 5, 2008 at 9:15 am
Hallo guys!
I was diagnosed with a fifth metatarsal fracture in the base part of the bone. I don’t know if it is a Jones fracture but I watched the rx and can say that it is more or less between “B” and “T” type as described in the article above. Another thing is that the crack extends to the jiunction with the bone called cuboid. I enjuried on 10th september and on 15 the emergency opted for the cast. Now, from the ospital (another one) they say that it should be better to go for surgery. But they complain that too much time has been spent and it is not sure that the operation can be done (?). On next Tuesday I have to meet the surgeon for decision.
Anyone with a similar fracture? And similar experience?
Thanks and have a nice time.
October 11, 2008 at 4:26 pm
Hello all…I am so glad that I found this site! I broke my 5th in my right foot 7 weeks ago. The ER dr. made the mistake of telling my husband that it was a clean break and I would be up and running around in no time…and in the mean time I could drive (just use the left foot). When I went to the orthopedic surgeon with my mother-in-law a few days later, the Dr. diagnosed my break as a Jones fracture and scheduled me for surgery the next week. He laughed at the idea I would think of driving…oh and pulled me off all weight barring activities until further notice. Since surgery I have had my mother-in-law, my mother, and a close friend come and stay with us (since I have 2 school age children as well). I have injected blood clotting shots into my stomach, had my cast changed 3 times (the 1st one did not set, the 2nd was fiberglass, the 3rd it was time to xray and I begged to go backed to the pre-op air cast so I could shower).
Tomorrow I go in (first appointment my husband has attended since my ER visit) to find out if I can be in a walking boot yet.
I was beginning to feel very alone and depressed with this. Like someone said in an earlier post…it is not life threatening, but I can’t do anything by myself. It has def. taken it’s toll on everyone else’s patience too. Somehow my husband can only remember what the NP said in the ER and can’t understand why I am not independent yet. He actually got irritated because he came home and the only thing I could tell him was how I was on the PC all day :( I am just not sure what else I am supposed to be doing…
I hope tomorrow I have good news that will lift my spirits. All of your stories were very nice to hear too…both the highs and lows! Good luck to everyone in their recovery process!!!
October 12, 2008 at 9:11 am
Hi guys, i fractured the fifth metatarsal on the 13th of September while playing soccer! It was barely 5 minutes into the match and i was out! I was taken to the ER and took an xray, it showed only a small crack and the doctor said i would be up and running in 2 weeks time! After a week, i decided to go visit the orthopaedic and he delivered the bad news! He told me that surgery would be the best option as i’m an active person but i do not like the idea of having a screw inserted in my foot so i decided to go with the conservative treatment. He did not put my foot in a cast but on the following week i went for another xray and i requested for a fibreglass cast just for safety reasons! I was in the cast for 2 weeks till today!I really feel useless and frustrated man!I have never had an injury for so long! Tomorrow i’m going back for another xray! I really hope i will get good results and back to walking soon! I’ll never take walking for granted again!
October 12, 2008 at 3:39 pm
Hi all,
please report on your post-surgical experience. I had the operation on Friday, now I’ve done injections of unasyn (antibiotic) 1,5 two times per day and clexane. Still terrible pain if I move the leg from horizontal position…probably it is the cast they put after surgery that press on my foot in the wound? It is normal in your opinion?
Let me know your feedback.
October 13, 2008 at 3:48 am
Had an xray today and this time it is worse! My god, the fracture line is actually longer. I decided immediately that i want to have the surgery. Tomorrow evening i’m going to insert the screw! Wish me luck! Really scared! Gd luck to every1 else that got this stupid injury, have a speedy recovery! Will b back to update on the surgery.
October 14, 2008 at 12:29 am
Angelo, I had pain for about 3 days after surgery and I managed it with anti inflamatory and panadol so it was not that bad. I did not have antibiotics and had no problem, though I did have clexane for 10 days but only because of previous DVT. I found wearing the cast for six weeks, 2 back slab and 4 with fibre glass terrible as it kept anoying the wound and felt terribly claustrophobic. Happy to say that my post surgery xr shows signs of bone regrowth, though not complete union yet, dr says to wear a boot for next two weeks and then back into runners or hiking boots. I started physio yesterday as my ankle and calf very wasted, asked when I could go back to gym and they said around 4 weeks but will do some hydrotherapy on the weekend.
Gary – best that you get the surgery done now and not waste any more time, good luck, you are on the road to recovery.
October 14, 2008 at 5:00 am
Hi Meg, thank you for telling me about your experience. Have a nice and quick recovery!
October 15, 2008 at 12:38 am
Thx Meg. I just had surgery yesterday, its now swollen and it does hurt but the pain is bearable. My foot is not in a cast like u guys, a big waterproof plaster is just paste over the surgical wound and i can see quite alot of bleeding,this is worrying me quite abit. Anyway, I can’t wait for it to recover!
October 15, 2008 at 5:21 pm
Hi Gary, don’t worry about the bleeding I had quite a bit but could not see because of the cast, could feel it when it dried though as it kept pulling on my stiches. ring your surgeon if you are really concerned.
October 15, 2008 at 8:00 pm
Happy ending for me. After 8 weeks in NWB cast, it came off tonight and x-rays show it has healed {no surgery}. So now I have to work on getting the strength back in my foot and ankle. Doctor said a few more days of using the crutches until I get strength back will be all it takes. So hopefully I won’t have any further problems. I’m sooooo happy. I hope there are no unforeseen problems with it….but I’m keeping positive.
October 17, 2008 at 12:46 am
Hello all.
I fractured my foot on Oct 2nd, went to ER and was told I had fractured my foot and referred me to an Orthopedic doctor which I seen the following day. After Dr. reviewed my x-rays, I was told I had fractured the bone below my baby toe. (my left foot). The doctor seemed a bit iffy when he turned to me and suggested surgery. So I asked what were my chances not having the surgery and he said 50-50 chance. So I opt for the 50% chance not to have surgery. Now I’m in a hard cast with instructions no weight bearing. I have been sucessful, with exceptopn of mistakely balancing my self on my toes on the bad foot to
prevent me from falling. Did anyone have this experience? Did you do any more damage? I have to keep me foot elevated because of the swellin I still experience. Is this normal?
October 20, 2008 at 10:23 pm
Hey Fred,
Read your story about PT. My PT guy has from day one a lot of different Range of Motion (ROM) exercises. Started on the stationary bike, then a balance board, band exercises, steps and lunges. I am know in week 4 of PT with 2 more to go. ROM and flexibility is almost the same as left foot. I broke my 5th on 2/18/08. Wore a walking cast until 7/30/08 when I had a plate put in. Seven weeks non-weight bearing. Got the final cast off 7 months to the day 9/18/08. Cam walker for 1 month. As of 10/17/08 I am in my shoe full time with no restrictions.
I would request a different physical therapist. He sounds like he’s not doing his job. I would file a complaint. Balance is good, but you need the ROM to improve.
Just my two cents.
Hope all goes well.
October 22, 2008 at 1:38 pm
Hi Cheryl,
Thanks for answering my post… You have confirmed what I was feeling all along… Finished my 9 sessions with him and it was the same each time. Stand on a foam matt with eyes closed on one foot. Luckily I have been doing my own ROM exercises and other things… All in all I’m doing well… Even jogging up to 3K and playing drums again. Think I will file a complaint though… Good thing health care is free in Belgium… Would have been really pissed to pay for that… I can’t stand like a bird for free :)
Rgds,
Fred
October 22, 2008 at 9:56 pm
hello jones fellows…there is a lot of strenth in these stories, it’s heartening.
I received my fracture by an embarrassing misstep in my own livingroom on July 29, rolling my ankle and coming down hard on the side of my foot. Fracture is at the base of the 5th MT, clean break, no displacement. The orthopedic doc did not do immobilization at all, no cast, only a slipper with velcro straps and a hard plastic sole, to limit flexing. So, NWB but no cast. On crutches for 6 weeks. Pain was not bad at all, so after 6 weeks was told I could walk in “good shoes” – hiking boots, Merrills.
At follow-up 4 weeks later, things had gotten worse by the xrays, the gap had opened slightly. The doc was urging surgery, and I went along until the day before the operation, then backed out – just didn’t feel right about going through with it. Pressed him for alternatives – oh, do surgeons hate that! We are now trying to get the sonogram bone stimulator approved by insurance – this IS the U.S. – I have started doing herbal treatments and will look into acupuncture. And will try harder to stay OFF it, as much as possible.
Seems logical to me that if low blood flow to the area is a big part of the problem with healing, than anything that stimulates and opens up that area is good. I may end up with surgery in the end, but want to try other avenues first.
But does it seem odd to any of you that I was never in any kind of cast at all? From these stories, sounds like immobilization is considered important…even if it doesn’t always work. Am wondering if I should get a second opinion.
Any thoughts would be appreciated.
Laurie
October 23, 2008 at 5:28 am
IMO I would get them to put it in a fibre glass cast get another x-ray at 4 weeks and then if no improvement then opt for surgery ASAP. With my JF I was in a walking boot foor for twelve weeks before going into a fibre glass cast which did not work, ended up with surgery anyway 8 weeks ago, orignal break was in JAN 08!!!!
October 24, 2008 at 7:31 am
Laurie–seek another doc’s opinion for your situation! Unless you can “afford” months and months of crutches, casts, and no activity, your plan for recovery will most likely be a waste of time and you will end up with surgery. I think most folks would say the same thing.
October 24, 2008 at 8:48 am
Thx for the thoughts. I definitely will seek a second opinion, and realize that I could very well end up with surgery. I don’t know about that “most folks” thing, though, Brenda. At least if you put any stock in medical studies. I’ve seen some reports online claiming that treatment with sonography gives the same success rate – 90 percent – as surgery. Here’s one: http://www.medscape.com/viewarticle/420773
If this is true, then where are the success stories? Is it a sham? Or maybe those happy folks who healed without surgery aren’t blogging, they’re too busy out there running around, back to normal life! Certainly most of the folks writing here have had similar experiences – I don’t discount that at all, just wonder if it’s representative of the experiences of all who have had the misfortune to suffer a jones fracture.
Who knows. We all have to feel our way with this, don’t we? I’ll let you know what happens.
Laurie
October 24, 2008 at 5:41 pm
Hi everyone,
Addressing Laurie’s comments I am a success story of a surgery for this fracture – after 12 weeks of conservative treatment i was fed up and practically demanded surgery – here is a timeline of how things went after that…
surgery may 29
cast off 2 weeks later
walk in boot 1 week later
walk in shoes July 2nd
return to full activity august 10th
Honestly, from my experience the surgery is the way to go – my foot is fixed w/ a screw and a bone graft – I saw my doc for the final time in september and he was amazed by my results. I credit my recover to nutrition, following directions regarding weight bearing, aggressive PT beginning as soon as the cast was off, and in my opinion acupuncture was very helpful.
I followed this program for my PT and it worked great – http://www.theacc.com/genrel/092005aaf.html
I am now back to normal activities of daily living – with the only real change is that I am stringent about my footwear now.
Good luck to everyone – keep your heads up – you can get through this
October 25, 2008 at 4:26 am
I don’t know why i’m so pesismistic but i keep worrying about my bone not healing even after surgery. I had surgery on 14th October’08. Its now 1 week and 4 days after surgery,its still swollen and hurts abit.I’m really praying the bone heals, i can’t stand being like in crutches anymore! Has anyone experienced no healing even after surgery? I really worried!
October 29, 2008 at 8:13 pm
Here is a non-surgical success story! I rolled my foot walking over a rutted gravel drive. I thought it was just strained or at the worst sprained. Kept walking on it due to a packed schedule that day, but ended up in so much pain that I went to an outpatient clinic for x-rays. Broken! They put me in an AirCast and on crutches. They scheduled me with an Ortho doctor next morning. More x-rays showed I had a spiraling Jones fracture. She kept me in the boot non-weight bearing for two weeks, then in a Jones compression wrap for two more due to excessive swelling. Then back in the boot for five more weeks non-weight bearing. I used crutches and a knee walker to get around. After a total of nine weeks non-weight bearing in the cast, Doctor said I could start walking on it as I felt comfortable. Three weeks later x-rays showed excellent healing and I got out of the boot and back in tennis shoes. After that long in the boot I had significant atrophy of the muscles in the foot and ankle, but a couple weeks of physical therapy got me back on track.
Doctor is putting me in orthotics to help prevent a rebreak, which she says is common the first year. No more flip-flops or barefoot – only shoes with good support.
I was extremely lucky to have found a great doctor who knew what she was doing from the start. It’s a pain to be off the foot for so long, but worth it to have the foot healed properly!
Best wishes to all of you who are still struggling with your Joneses.
October 29, 2008 at 8:43 pm
Oh man…This site is scary. I suffered a Jones fracture on Monday, October 20, so after reading all of your posts you can understand my concerns. The ER doctor initially told me that I’d be walking on it in 2 weeks and completely healed in four, running on it and ready for ski season. So after researching a 5th Metatarsal fracture and identifying the three more common types I decided to visit a specialist and my worst fears were confirmed. He suggested a plaster cast but was a bit weary because I’ve never had one so I opted for the walking boot. He said there was no guarantee that either option would lead to mending of the bone. I go back in two weeks for x-rays and after reading everything I could find about conservative treatments I’m doing everything in my power to keep it immomilized, but its proving very difficult to do. It’s only been a week and I’m already going a little stir crazy. I’m glad I’ve found this forum so I can at least share my experience with people who are suffering through the same frustrations and what seems like certain misery.
November 1, 2008 at 2:51 am
muscle stimulators…
Special enzyme engineering makes these lipids even more functional and enhanced mineral retention. Then there are different quality…
November 5, 2008 at 5:15 pm
It has been very interesting to read everyone experiences here. I tripped down three stairs and ended up with a Jones fracture on Monday. For the moment I’m in a NWB walking cast. I go back to the doctor weekly for x-rays but life is challenging as a stay at home mom with a 6 month old and a 3 year old. Looking forward to reading others updates….
November 8, 2008 at 12:00 am
I have read all these stories and I have admit it’s nice to know I am not alone. On
Sept 6 I was walking down a set to two steps and missed one.
This caused a Jones Fracture that required surgery on Sept 12 during which a plate, screws and wires where put in to correct this injury.
I was in a split for 2 weeks, then a hard cast for 6 weeks. This week I had the hard cast taken off and have earned an Aircast and (a long hot shower).
I have not been allowed to bear any weight on the foot.
My last xray was Nov 03 and there is no sign of healing. I will go back to the doc in 2 weeks. I beleive there is no healing due the fact that my crutches and I don’t get along. I have fallen 4 times since the surgery and each time had pain shoot up to my knee. The foot is still swallen and has a weird, tingley, numb feeling when touched.
I am not sure when it will feel normal.
My foot does turn purple when I am in the shower. That returns to normal once I get back to my beloved chair.
It’s a good thing I have a laptop computer or I would seriously go crazy. At times it feels like it’s my only link to the outside world. Whoever thought going to the doc would be considered a field trip.
November 8, 2008 at 12:15 am
Jen, I can understand your situation and don’t envy you. Must be hard with 2 little ones. I have my grandson, he is 3, several days a week between shifts with her husband. I am wiped out by the time he leaves and he is a very easy child to take care of.
November 8, 2008 at 11:00 pm
Hi all,
Reading these posts has led me to have my first cry since I twisted my foot on an uneven pavement on November 5 (2008).
I heard the bone snap and knew I was in trouble when I saw a bump at the side of my foot which swelled up rapidly.
I opted to go my physio first asap as he had just very successfuly helped me repair my other ankle 2 months ago and I wasn’t sure there had been a fracture – I thought it was the liagment I heard tearing.
He sent me for an xray and the radiologist told me not to go back as there was a clear fracture and 2 cracks.
I was not told it was a Jones fracture, either by her, by the doctor I saw at that medical centre nor by their physio who I only saw because the doctor sent me immediately there to get put into a cast.
This physio put me in a boot because the fracture was considered “stable”. Nothing was displaced but I was told up to 6 weeks of crutches, no weight bearing at all reviewable after 2-3 weeks.
The only reason I found out about Jones Fractures was because my original physio called asking about the xrays and when I told him what happened, he insisted I get the xrays back and ask specifically about whether it was a Jones Fracture.
He said he had seen too many of these types of fractures walk back into his door after being set in casts because they had not healed at all and patients were in worse trouble down the line.
I phoned the other physio and asked him directly if it was a Jones and he said it was but reiterated that it was stable and there should be no reason to not expect it to heal fully. He then mentioned that my doctor should have talked to me about an orthopaedic referral anyway – he hadn’t at all.
SO I left a message with his nurse who told me he wanted to see me the next day (two days after the injury).
At that stage I had spent the worst night of my life in that boot with a peculiar pressure point in the pad of my foot being triggered by the angle of the boot sending shooting pains through my foot all night long.
I live up 23 steps which is NOT FUN. I had to get out the next day and see this guy who then told me I had a Jones Fracture (??) and that as one of the cracks extended into my joint (double ??) I needed to see a bone specialist.
I had, of course, done as much research as I could in the meantime and had already found out that any anti-inflammatory medication is a big NO-NO as it interferes with bone healing (most painkillers come under this category), that I must start taking a calium supplement with boron, Vit K, Vit D3 and silica and that Bromelain is a good natural anti-inflammatory and also helps in muscle and tissue repair.
A good diet is crucial to any repair in the body and it is really important to give up all caffeine, sugar and red meat so your calcium absorption can increase.
This doctor knew absolutely NOTHING about any of this. I am incredibly unimpressed at finding out all this in this way – why on earth don’t doctors gve you the full bloody picture straight up? None of us has time to waste in this situation.
Worse for me, I am a musician (low earnings NO insurances of any kind, self employed so no compensation and if I don’t work, I don’t earn) and make my living on my feet apart from teaching which I cannot afford to give up for 6 weeks. Luckily I can teach from a chair but the inactivity is driving me berserk and it hasn’t even been a week yet….
I was so desperate after three days that I went back to teaching on Day 4 but the effort of getting from my massage (which turned into a Reiki session as the therapist wouldn’t massage me with this injury) to my music school which was just up the street was unbelievable on crutches and I’ll never do that again.
Today my shoulders and back are sore from the effort.
I’m going to see the bone specialist asap even if it costs me my last penny. I am NOT taking a chance in the Bone Fracture Clinic at the hospital, even though that’s free, because this is my foot = my future walking capability.
I am a very fit and healthy 44-year-old who has gone from 5 days a week at the gym and walking or running everywhere to lying around on the couch all day.
But I am suing the council over that uneven footpath! I’ve never broken a bone in my life.
I have questions for anyone who can answer them:
How soon can I start exercising my upper body? I need to do something but just don’t want to overexert my system while it is occupied with healing.
Does everyone elevate their hurt foot? ie are we all meant to spend our days flat on our backs with the foot up or just through the night?
Is anyone with a boot taking it off regularly to ice the foot? Or is it better to leave the foot as stable as possible? I’ve taken the foot out to reposition it in the boot as the pressure pain was killing me but I was VERY careful not to move the foot around at all.
Are we all wiggling our toes? I was told to do this but am now worried about any movement – how impossible is this? I jog the damn foot just by trying to get to the loo on crutches even without any weightbearing!!
Showering? My husband says the boot is starting to smell (Oh Lord, thank you for shredding the last of my dignity.). Should I be washing it after just four days???
Thanks advance for any advice and I am going to get some Quantum Healing sessions done on the foot as well. I’ll do anything to be out of this in 8 weeks time. Otherwise I’ll be completely broke…..
Em
November 9, 2008 at 11:17 am
EM,
SEEK AN ORTHO-POD SURGEON RIGHT AWAY. THERE IS A 14 DAY WINDOW THAT THE SURGEON HAS TO WORK WITH. YOUR PRIMARY CARE DOC SHOULD BE ABLE TO REFER YOU TO ONE IN YOUR AREA.
WHEN I FIRST WAS INJURED I WENT TO WALK IN CLINIC WHERE I HAD XRAYS. THE DOC CAME OUT AND SAID THERE WAS NOTHING HE COULD DO THAT I HAD TO SEE A ORTHO-POD SURGEON. I WAS REFERRED BY THE CLINIC TO A WONDERFUL DOC.
HE TOLD ME TO TELL THEM WHEN I CALLED THAT IT WAS A COMMINUTED,”JONES” FRACTURE.
WHEN I CALLED I RELAYED THIS INFO AND THEY SAID COME IN A COUPLE OF DAYS LATER TO TRY TO GIVE THE SWELLING A CHANCE TO GO DOWN.
I WENT IN HAD ANOTHER SET OF XRAYS AND THE POD DOC STARTED LAUGHING. I ASKED WHAT WAS SO FUNNY AND HE SAID I HAD A VERY BAD SITUATION GOING ON WITH MY FOOT AND IT WAS GOING TO BE LIKE A PUZZLE TO REPAIR. HE WAS ONLY LAUGHING TO KEEP ME UPBEAT DUE TO THE FACT THAT HE WAS ABOUT TO TELL ME THIS WAS GOING TO BE A LONG PROCESS.
FORTUNATELY FOR ME I HAVE TEMPORARY DISABLITY INSURANCE WHICH DOES NOT COVER WHAT I MAKE BUT IT IS ENOUGH TO COVER THE MORTGAGE AND I WORK FOR A GREAT COMPANY WHO WILL HOLD MY JOB.
TO ANSWER SOME OF YOUR QUESTION:
I WAS SHOWERING WITH A PLASTIC BAG COVERING THE SPLIT AND PLASTER HARD CAST. DON’T WORRY ABOUT THE SMELL THERE IS NOTHING YOU CAN DO ABOUT IT. NOONE AROUND YOU CAN SMELL IT.
I WOULD SUGSEST TO GET A SHOWER CHAIR, THIS MAKES IF MUCH EASIER WITH LESS CHANCE OF SLIPPING.
I WAS TOLD TO KEEP THE FOOT ELEVATED AT ALL TIMES AND DURING THE TWO WEEKS AFTER SURGERY I WORE A SPLINT AND HAD TO ICE IT AS MUCH AS POSSIBLE.
ONCE THE HARD CAST WENT ON OF COURSE THERE WAS NO WAY TO PUT ICE ON IT. STILL ELEVATED AND NO WEIGHT BEARING.
AS I STATED BEFORE, MY LAPTOP HAS BECOME MY CLOSEST FRIEND, KEEPING ME FROM GOING NUTS.
MY HUSBAND WORKS NIGHTS AND SLEEPS DURING THE DAY. AND ALL MY FRIENDS WORK DURING THE DAY BUT I AM ABLE TO EMAIL THEM. KEEPS MY CONNNECTED TO THE OUTSIDE WORLD.
I WAS NOT TOLD TO TAKE ANY VITAMINS EXCEPT I DID LOOK INTO THIS AS WELL THRU RESEARCH AND FOUND IT WOULD NOT BE A BAD IDEA.
I CAN WIGGLE MY TOES BUT IT WAS NOT SUGGESTED AS THERE ARE TENDONS THAT WILL MOVE AND PROLONG HEALING.
I CAN SAY THAT IF YOU HAVE SURGERY RECOVERY IS DIFFERENT FOR EVERYONE.
AFTER SURGERY I HAD NO PAIN, BUT NOW THAT I HAVE THE AIR CAST IT IS STARTING TO ACHE AND IS STILL SWALLEN. I AM TAKING IT DAY BY DAY AND LISTENING TO MY DOC.
GOOD LUCK AND CAREFUL WITH THOSE STAIRS. I HAVE ONLY ATTEMPTED STAIRS ONCE AND THAT WAS FOR MY DAUGHTERS BRIDAL SHOWER OTHER WISE I WOULD NOT HAVE GONE.
November 9, 2008 at 4:04 pm
Thanks so much for all your info.
I am puzzled by so much, I was told to wiggle my toes so that’s weird but I undestand about having the foot elevated as much as possible.
I am calling the bone specialist today to try and get an appointment asap.
I guess he’ll know from my xray if surgery is the best option but I feel so much better informed now!
The problem I have with surgery is that I am a singer and cannot afford to have a normal anaesthetic tube down my throat past my vocal cords. I have to have either a soecialist tube which means a specialist doing the application or a spinal block – either way it means no freebie at the local hospital on Medicare!
Thanks for sharing your experience.
Em
November 9, 2008 at 4:22 pm
Em,
I had my surgery done in a surgical center. I did not have anything put down my throat. They gave me an IV and off to sleep I went. My surgery was to be about 45 minutes to an hour but I messed my foot up so bad that it took 2 hours and 10 minutes. I will keep updating my story. You keep writing in. It does help to know there are people you can chat with going thru the same thing. You might be able to sing if you can crutch and then sit down.
Good luck
November 9, 2008 at 7:32 pm
Hi Margie,
Oh thank God! I was wondering if I would have to have a spinal block! Then I was imagining that going wrong and being a singer in a wheelchair…..not good.
At least I can teach sitting down!
I am so angry at the runaround I’ve been getting over all this. I’ve been told by the surgeon’s office I can see him directly at the hospital Bone Fracture Clinic and why have I waited this long because I don’t have much time left to make a decision about surgery, the cheeky cow!
I fired right back at her that it was pretty hard to make the right decisions when no-one tells you it is a Jones Fracture and what that means, you only find out two days later because your own physio is curious and suggests you get the xrays back and get a second opinion, you then find out the doctor should have spoken to you about an orthopaedic referral right from the start so you waste another day getting back to that doctor so you can get the damn referral and then you have to wait the whole weekend to find out from the surgeon’s secretary he is booked until March but you can see him at the bone fracture clinic…………..then you find out you CAN’T because you have to go through Accident and Emergency to get to the bone clinic. Sorry, was I shouting?
One massive and very tearful tantrum later I have an appointment with the surgeon for today at 5pm. Sheesh. Anyone else feel like they have been reduced to the status of a two-year-old???
Em, in sympathy with all Jones Sufferers and off to take her Calcium supplement and Silica capsules. And sulk. And watch more DVDs. Ugh.
November 9, 2008 at 7:41 pm
Margie et al:
Just some info, I’m taking Wagners Calcium Complete (sometimes called Calcium Complex) because it has Boron, Vit K, Vit D3 and mangnesium which are all good for bone healing and formation.
Also Planet Earth’s colloidal Silica which absolutely helped heal my other ankle when I tore that ligament – that was a grade 3 tear which should have taken 4-6 weeks to heal and took just 2-3 before I was back running.
I’m also taking Bromelain, a pineapple extract which has natural anti-inflam and soft tissue healing properties as well as being a pain killer, because I am avoiding those since reading about them interfering with bone healing (scary). You can also eat fresh pineapple but I suffer from Insulin Resistance so have to avoid fruit.
Vit C is also essential for healing as is Zinc.
I’m also drinking liquid chlorophyll (tastes pepperminty, vitamin aisle at Coles supermarkets) since leafy green veges are recommended and everyone knows cows who live on chlorophyll through grass-grazing have the most calcium dense bones of ANY animal (and they don’t drink milk either!).
Hope this helps y’all!
November 10, 2008 at 5:14 pm
Wow, I just came back from seeing the Orthopaedic surgeon and I’m confused all over again…
He says it isn’t a ‘true’ Jones fracture at all, he wants me to weight bear on it as soon as possible (monitoring the pain and taking as much as I can handle) and edxpects me to be up and walking when the boot comes off in 6 weeks time!!
He seems incredibly cheery about it all and quite unequivocal. Mind you, he also doesn’t believe in vitamins or diet having any effect and frankly that to me is a clue as to what kind of medico he is but he was justifiably concerned about smoking (I don’t) and that makes me curious. If you can be worried about the toxins in smoking and that effect in the body, how could you ignore the role of diet in health?? Silly.
He also doesn’t believe any physio will be neccesary afterwards! Just walk alot, he says! Not sure that’s right. I rolled the ankle and there is definate ligament damage!
Anyway, I’m going to take his advice cautiously. I just don’t think weightbearing is sensible in the first week of a fracture so I’ll keep resting until the pain subsides and try it maybe at 3 weeks.
I strongly believe a good diet produces good health so will continue with the vitamins etc anyway but the main thing is NO SURGERY!
Now, a very interesting thing he did say was that taking another xray at 4 and even 6 weeks is useless because new bone formation DOESN’T SHOW on the xray so you can’t tell about any healing! This is fascinating because loads of people here have said they and their surgeons have freaked out because their subsequent xrays show the same fracture….
Now if my guy says xrays are useless at determining new bone/calcium formation until 3-6 months after a fracture, why is anyone rushing for surgery after just 6 weeks on the basis of an xray which couldn’t show that healing anyway? That seems really, really important!
This guys says you must determine healing on your ability to weightbear versus the pain it produces and any signs of continued swelling and says all the fractures of this type he has seen never show any bone healing until 3-6 months so he judges his patients on the above and he has never seen a problem. The one thing he did say was that it was possible to suffer some residual pain for up to 3 months after the fracture but that this then subsides quickly.
Curious,yes? Are people having unneccesary surgery?
Em in wonderment.
November 10, 2008 at 7:38 pm
Em,
First you can yell whenever you feel the need. lol
I would listen to the bone doc since it is his specialty. I am sure he sees this more than one can imagine.
Many docs don’t have the same feeling about many vitamins as us lame people. I will take anything that I beleive will help. My feeling is if it doesn’t hurt me it will be okay to take. I don’t think they are against a healthy diet, just all the pills and home remedies.
I wish I could send you a picture of my foot but of course I don’t have the xrays.
I do have a pic of the hardware that was put in. Very interesting picture.
I was told that because my bone was a comminuted fracture; a fracture in which bone is broken, splintered or crushed into a number of pieces. A fracture is considered comminuted when there are at least 3 bone fragments. Surgery was the only route. I actually had a small piece taken out due it being a small sliver he could not reattach.
Jones Fracture also known at 5th Metatarsal Fracture is what I have. It’s comminuted due to the many pieces.
The 5th metatarsol is the most outer edge bone of you foot.
I don’t think yours is a Jones due to it not having the 5th metatarsal involved.
This is why I say to listen to the ortho doc. They know best.
Will be waiting to hear back.
November 11, 2008 at 9:54 pm
It’s always good to get a second opinion since doctors have various diagnoses/advice. I did not know I had a Jones fracture until four weeks later after the injury occurred and the cast came off for X-rays which showed no healing of the bone. Initially, the docs just told me I had a fractured bone in my foot and did not elaborate. When they put another cast on, I inquired to my condition and the ortho docs informed me that I have a Jones Fracture. I also asked what can I do to help with the healing and was told to elevate and stay off it as much as possible. Another doc was walking by and I asked him what I could do to increase my chances of healing and decrease the chances of nonunion. He told me to take alot of calcium, Vitamin D, stay away from red meats, drink alot of orange juice and water (to reduce the chances of kidney stones due to increased intake of calcium), avoid alcohol, caffeine and red meats. In addition, I eat salads everyday which include green leaf lettuce, mushrooms, spinach, broccoli, bell peppers, carrots, and cashews. After two weeks of his advice (6 weeks post injury) I had my foot x-rayed thru the cast and saw calcification occurring. I’m now at 11 weeks and the calcification is continuing, but slowly. I go back to the ortho docs on Thursday (Nov 13) to check my status and to determine whether or not I will need another fiberglass cast. Most likely, I will have another one. From these posts and other forums, a Jones fracture will take a long time to heal by going the conservative route. Like some of you, I’m avoiding surgery as much as possible and realize it may take 10 months before I can go back to hardcore exercising.
November 11, 2008 at 10:28 pm
One thing folks trying to avoid surgery might also consider is a bone stimulation treatment. There are several different methods – combined magnetic field, sonogram, emf – that involve stimulation of that area of the foot to encourage bone growth/healing. I got my jones fracture July 27, was scheduled for surgery in early October after there was no evidence of healing, but decided to try this alternative route first. Started on the magnetic version of the bone stimulator last week. It’s very simple, a device you strap your foot into at home, turn it on for 1/2 hour a day. They CLAIM that the results are as good as surgery in cases of non-union, around 85 percent, but that the average time to healing is around 4 months. In addition, of course, I’m also building up the calcium. Having a hard time staying off caffeine, though, with this sedentary lifestyle! Am swimming several times a week to get exercise; that helps both mentally and physically.
I realize I may end up with surgery in the end, but will try this first.
November 12, 2008 at 6:22 am
Hi everybody,
this site has been the source of information and frustration :) I rolled my ankle on Nov. 8th (4 days ago now), kept it cold and elevated the night and got to ER next evening (after taking a ferry, a taxi, a plane and a train). XRays showed a clear fracture, it is in the middle of the 5th metatarsal. The ER guys and the doctor I saw next morning said an operation is necessary; however, the doctor did not cast the foot, just gave me some elastic bandages to use with it.
Next day I went to another hospital, where the opinion was that there is no need for surgery unless you want it, and that the surgery would not speed it. Got a light cast-kinda-thing, and some promises about being able to swim in 4 weeks and run in 8.
Now the trouble is, I live in Japan. The doctors do not speak English. I am worried that I am not getting the entire picture, and whether should try to get one of them hyper-expensive international clinic doctors to look at it… The concept of “sick leave” also does not exist here and so far I have not succeeded to in getting a certificate from the doctor to order me stay home. I have no car, the perfectly functioning subway system has thousands of stairs… In addition, I am (or was) in the middle of applying for positions at several institutions outside Japan and my current contract is ending in January…
I have never ever broken anything before, even though my life has been filled to the brim with all kinds of injury-prone sports. So ironic to break a bone by just..tripping indoors on a nice floor. Initially when I was told about a month of recovery, I was just worrying about my coming business trip next week, but after reading all this – the reports of the foot not feeling like your own, about months of inactivity… so, even though I believe the human skin should not be cut open unless really needed, I will not survive if I won’t be able to get back to my active life in months…
I know I am early into this (just 4 days!) and should not complain, but I am just so scared this’ll be dragging for months and months … my sports activities more or less define me, and the thought of not being able to be active…. just unbearable.
November 12, 2008 at 6:13 pm
Hi all,
Margie, mine is a break of the fifth metatarsal but apparently the break is just a little too high on the bone to be a true Jone’s Fracture. I have one clear break and two hairline cracks but all pieces are perfectly in line (not displaced).
I am inclined to agree with a conservative approach and in talking with a medico friend of mine, she says it is absolutely true about calcification not properly showing on an xray until 3-6 months after the fracture which means you just can’tget a true picture of healing before then except by monitoring your pain levels and ability to weightbear.
What I don’t agree with is trying to force weight on it too soon! I’m having more pain at night now than I did in the first week and I don’t know what that is about but my husband thinks it is the healing process…..
My medico friend says actively rolling through the foot (taking your weight mostly on the crutches though) has the benefit of keeping some of the muscles from atrophying too much so that makes sense.
Rich, having an xray at just 4 weeks is apparently useless for determining any healing. But the other advice you’ve been given and what you are doing sounds wonderful! I was told I should be back walking in just 6 weeks so if yours has taken so long is it because your fracture was displaced (the fracture pieces were apart from each other??)
Laurie, I’ve switched to decaff and make one great fresh bean coffee in the morning and that’s it. I put double cream in it to keep it all low carb and really enjoy it!
Lost Fin, if your break is in the middle of the bone, it isn’t a Jones Fracture. Jone’s is a problem fracture because it occurs at the base of the fifth metatarsal where there is almost no circulation and therefore healing is unlikely.
It must be so frustrating to be in a foreign country too but at least you are in a proper cast. Is your break clean with no displaced pieces? I doubt you would be back running in 8 weeks but then again my orthopod had a patient with a displaced fracture in the same place as mine (low on the bone, less circulation) who is walking without crutches in just 6 weeks so you never know. Staying positive is crucial and that fact is you can’t change this, you have no choice but to make the best of the situation and try to relax into it.
You need to insist on more information – why do you have two opinions about surgery? Do you NEED it or would it simply be more convenient? I was a five-day-a-week gym girl, sprinting and weights so I know how you feel but you can get around this. You can continue with upper body work at home no problem and make sure your diet is low carb to avoid putting on weight if that bothers you.
The fact is, this is going to change your life. It is horribly frustrating but give yourself a week to be justifiably miserable and then change your approach tomake the best of the situation.
I’m a singer/entertainer and vocal tutor. It just kills me that is have lost gigs at the most valuable time of the year and can’t have my singing lessons (I can still teach others though!).
On the other hand I’m now bookkeeping for my husband (who badly needs his books in order so that is a new job for me), watching over my baby nephew so my sister can go out and get her hair cut, watching heaps of DVDs I never got a chance to watch before and reading books as well as spending too much time on the internet and monitoring excessive plane noise over my flat! LOL!
My computer files have never been more organised too!
Chins up, all.
Em
November 12, 2008 at 6:39 pm
WOW! A lot of posts in the last two days. Em, I totally agree with on feeling horrible for yourself for a week and then go on with your healing.
I had enough of this air cast last night and took it off to sleep. What a mistake.
I guess I moved it wrong while sleeping and woke up with it very swallen.
I went and did a brave thing today, I went to the dog park in our town with my dog, my daughter and her dog. Of course she walked the dogs from the car to the park as I crutched around. It was fun to feel like I did something worthwhile. My dog loves the park and I feel bad that I have not been able to bring him.
I did just finish the favors for my daughters wedding so another thing accomplished. These are the little things that make you feel good. I am tired though. As everyone knows it is not easy to crutch it.
I do have a black and blue on my arm from falling in my kitchen the other night. I hope this goes away by 11/22 (day of wedding)
My daughter is going nuts this week getting holiday shopping done and cooking meals to freeze before she goes in to have 2 screws that have loosened removed from a prior foot repair.
Weight gain is up about 12 pounds since injury Labor Day weekend.
I have been watching what I eat but not moving and having hypothyroidism are causing me to gain. I was upset about it but I will take it off once I can get back to my treadmill.
I did not give up my coffee, it makes me happy.
Keep posting, it gives us all something to look forward to.
Margie
November 12, 2008 at 8:54 pm
Em,
thank you so much for encouragement! I have some times in my hectic life almost hoped for something like this to happen, so that I would have the good excuse to stop and think of things… but not now when I had all things lined up!
Aww… I’ve never had much of an issue of weight gain with all the sports going on, now I realize that it will be another burden on the self-image… But thanks for pointing this out, I will start doing some weight work with the upper body … What about swimming? Does anyone know at what stage it would be OK?
The break looked somehow clean and not displaced to me, however, what I got from the doctors was more or less “Bone is broken. Need / do not need an operation”. It is not even so much an issue of language barrier (which is, believe me, frustrating… the first one – the one that suggested operation – treated me like a retard since I could not speak proper Japanese) as I had a translator with me, they doctors in general just do not feel like they need to explain things to patients. The first doctor said something about 5 mm displacement, the second one said no displacement…
The foot does not hurt really, and the initial swelling has mostly gone (and replaced by this very pretty greenish-yellowish coloration); I was given a cast that I need to take off twice a day for applying medicated plasters (I guess they contain some anti-swelling stuff?) and now am worried whether I tie it up too loose or too tight… is it better to have it tight, or just enough to prevent accidental moving?
Tomorrow I will have another x-ray, I don’t know whats the point of that if new bone won’t be visible anyways until several months. But at least I will have another opportunity at trying to get some info from the doctor.
Thanks all for posting … keep on reporting on your progress!
November 13, 2008 at 12:05 am
I thought I sprained my ankle and when I felt that it wasn’t healing properly, I sought orthopedic intervention over two weeks later. A Dr. x-rayed it and diagnosed it as a Jones fracture and he used another term, which I can’t remember. But essentially, I have two fractures. A PT was supposed to bring a Bone Stimulator to me today, but never showed up or called. That aside, from reading these posts, I’m considering a second opinion and perhaps will inquire if surgery would bring a better result. My dilemma is not ordinary at all…..I’m 56, and have osteoporsis for which I am taking Boniva. Would a bone stimulator be effecitve in my case? Also, I am currently receiving radiation treatments for cancer and my last treatment is December 24th…..I’m perplexed as to how I can have surgery and still undergo radiation treatments. Well, I guess I’ll have to leave that up to the professionals. But, will my fracture remain untreated til then? I’m no happy…..any suggestions would be welcome.
November 13, 2008 at 6:41 pm
Hi all:
I just came back from my ortho and visit and they removed the cast and did not replace it with a new one. From the X-rays, the bone seems to be about 90% healed. He gave me a hard shoe and told me to start walking on it, and slowly adding weight to it by still using the crutches. He said that at this stage, weight-bearing should assist with the healing. Of course I’m going to take it slow, especailly since my ankle and calf are both stiff and cause some discomfort. But the foot feels good.
Em: My fracture was not displaced. The problem with the first 4 weeks was that I did not follow my doc’s orders. I did not stay off the foot, I took painkillers/anti-inflammatory drugs quite frequently which inhibits bone growth, and my diet was just horrible with no supplements. When I was given the bad news at 4 weeks, I totally changed my diet as discussed previously and stayed off my foot as much as possible with elevation. During this visit, he was surprised by how well it healed. I’m not out of the woods yet and plan on continuing my diet/supplement routine.
My next followup is four weeks and I hope to see more healing.
I’m 42 years old and the conservative way worked for me. I know at times it gets depressing, but just hang in there! It will be well worth it.
November 14, 2008 at 9:40 pm
I’d just like to remind everyone that Jones Fx’s are classified differently based on prodromal symptoms and history of the incendent. Familiarize yourselves with Torg’s classification because that is what your ortho uses to diagnose the severity of your injury and the subsequent treatment.
I suffered a Jones Fx about 4 weeks ago and upon hearing the news immediately ran home to research anything I could find about it on the internet and in online texts. Obviously, like most of you, I found the information very disconcerting and became unsatisfied with my doctors initial explanation. Upon returning with many questions, he explained that I had a type I fracture with a clear fracture line that was impacted which, in his experience, would only require conservative treatment to acheive successful union. Because it was a clean break, transverse, with the bones nondisplaced and impacted, and no indramedullary sclerosis, endosteal reaction, or cortical hypertrophy, surgery would not be required. But if it was type II or III he would have certainly used internal fixation from the outset.
Many of you are coming here and reading these experiences and they are indeed horrifying. But before you conclude the worst you should do your homework and discuss what you find with your doctor. Conservative treatment may work for you and if that’s what your doc recommended he’s more than likely telling you its not that bad.
November 15, 2008 at 2:02 pm
My fracture was a Type II in which my ortho doc was on the fence post whether or not to go conservative or surgery. It was not a clean break thru the bone; it fractured through the bone due to impact and also had a “Y” fracture that came off the original fracure.
Chris: Understand your point in your last paragraph; however, not all doctors are the same (hence, the old adage of “get a second opinion”). In my opinion, by reading this blog people are doing their “homework” by learning about other individual’s experiences and what has worked. I have also read numerous online texts/abstracts and a majority have stated (just like the abstract above) the best alternative is internal fixation. If it was not for this blog, I would not have learned so much regarding how to change my diet which has worked wonders. Some docs disregard eating habits/supplements as helpful while others laud it. In addition, I learned the proper conservative approach from other’s experiences that have benefited me. Finally, this blog helps people get through this together since it’s an extensive healing process and can get quite depressing and sharing each other’s experience actually boosts people’s morale.
November 15, 2008 at 3:41 pm
Greetings Jones FX Friends,
I am amazed, somewhat fearful and grateful for all I have learned from all of you. Thank-you for sharing your stories and advice. I’ve just had my fiberglass cast removed after 7+ weeks and am now wearing a walking boot for 6 more. I feel so much better about not being a wimp. I thought it was “just a little fracture” and tried to do more than I should because it seemed to be such a slight injury. Who knew? Did anyone tell me all this was possible? Did I ask? No and No.
I was shocked yesterday about having the boot and crutches for 6 weeks. So I didn’t really ask about what to do at night or how to get my weird leg, foot and ankle to become “normal” again.
I took the boot off last night to sleep in, all was well this morning. I am keeping it off when I’m in “the chair” and flexing my foot to help my leg cramps and Achilles stretch.
Any advice on getting strength and mobility back into my ankle and leg?
Again, thanks for sharing. I feel much better about how I have handled this.
Cheers and healing thoughts to all,
Janet
November 16, 2008 at 11:54 am
HEY,
Where are all the regulars? I have another appointment tomorrow and will keep you posted.
November 16, 2008 at 11:56 am
Sorry, I have not idea what my computer was doing, but after my last comment the screen changed and now I can see your entries. Weird huh? Well I am off to read your stories.
November 16, 2008 at 12:08 pm
Rich,
This forum is indeed a mix of ideas, thoughts and knowing your you are not alone.
It’s a great place to vent when you need to as at times you feel the people around you have no idea what you are going thru.
It’s true every doc has his/her own way of treating the injury. As always if your not satisfied with one you seek a second opinion. At the very least you (not you personally) need to listen to your doc, they are the experts.
November 16, 2008 at 12:13 pm
Janet,
My injury was Labor Day weekend and I am into my second week of an Air cast. At times I take it off when sitting in “my” chair as well. Last night I thought I would try to sleep without the cast or the support stocking. Although I have had trouble with the swelling,I was horrified to see just how swollen it became overnight. I will not do that again. I am going to take a shower and put the stocking and boot back on. I hope the swelling goes down before my appointment tomorrow.
I try now and again to move my ankle around but it does not move. I have to remind myself I have been with no movement or weight bearing since Labor Day. I guess that will be another bridge to cross when I get there.
Talk to you all later.
November 16, 2008 at 12:45 pm
Thanks Margie!
I have had 2 nights with “the boot off” and so far no swelling. My leg used to swell pretty regularly in the cast during the day. It would always go down by morning after being propped up on 2 pillows.
I managed to fracture myself on Sept. 28th. The Dr. said 4-6 weeks in a short leg cast. I went back after 3 weeks to be told 4 more weeks and then probably 2 with a walking boot. Friday I had the cast removed and was told 6 more weeks in the boot with the first 2 as non-weight bearing. I’ve just been very disheartened each time I “walk” out.
I’m trying to be up beat but there are times when this whole situation gets the better of me and I am saddened. Sometimes I feel as though people expect me to just roll with this and get over it. And while I am trying, I just think that if I could really see the end in sight it would be helpful.
I’m sure it doesn’t help that I teach first grade and feel as though I haven’t been able to do all the things I would typically do with and for my kids. They are a great class with wonderful parents, thank goodness. It’s just exhausting to “crutch” around and teach and be there for them.
Thanks for “listening” Margie and everyone else. I will keep you in my thoughts as you go to your next appointment.
Wishing you all good news and swift recoveries,
Janet
November 16, 2008 at 1:32 pm
Hi All:
My doc had me go directly from cast to “start walking.” I thought it was odd that I didn’t get an air cast to transition from since the bone is not totally healed but he believes healing will increase through weight-bearing. I saw another doctor who viewed my latest x-rays and he believes I should be in an air cast, non-weight bearing. So, right now I’m not wearing any type of cast and very cautiously walking with the aid of crutches until a decision as to the coarse of action is determined.
Intially after the cast was removed, my foot and ankle swelled up considerably and both were very stiff. The swelling has reduced and I’m carefully doing stretching exercises to reduce the stiffness. Little by little the ankle/foot is getting better with mobility.
November 16, 2008 at 6:43 pm
Hi all,
I was out of action due to going to my sister’s place so she can look after me and give my husband a break – ie I can look after my niece while she looks after the new baby! LOL! Not much rest really but good family bonding time.
Interesting new posts from people and the different experiences can seem bewildering to any newbies such as I was just over a week ago.
I guess the people who post on these sites tend to be those who haven’t had the best experiences and so are looking deeper and for more answers but that also widens everyones’ knowledge.
And it is the little things which seem to affect people. Being worried about the injury means feeling sensitive about every little variant so let’s share!
1. I got put straight into an immobilisation boot, aka moonboot, because my fracture was not displaced. I was told an undisplaced fracture CAN displace but only through violent movement. I was told not to make it tight because there has to be room for swelling. I knew not to take anti-inflammatories and stuck to Panadol but I’m not a great medication user anyway so I only took them at night when the pain interfered with my sleep.
2. I slept on my back with the foot raised on pillows and found the boot most uncomfortable at night for the first week. I got a horrible pain through the pad of my foot, in the middle just below the middle toes, which kept waking me up. I thought it to be a pressure point being triggered and my surgeon agreed. Interestingly, as the swelling subsided, so did the pain and this week I rarely feel that and I’m no longer elevating the boot at night because the swelling has gone and I can’t sleep on my back! I figure better sleep makes for better healing.
3. I was told to wiggle my toes to encourage circulation and I felt through the night like wanting to flex and stretch the foot which I resisted. When I got the boot, I was told I didn’t need a compression bandage as well but the boot/foot got smelly quickly and when I finally gave up, took the boot off and washed both, I put the foot into a compression bandage as a barrier for the boot so I didn’t sweat directly into it (it’s almost summer in Sydney!).
I don’t know if the compression bandage helped – my swelling has gone down quickly but I had to loosen the bootstraps every night til then because the swelling made the boot too tight.
4. This week (the second week) the swelling has gone and I have begun flexing a tiny amount when I feel like it through the night and rolling through the foot on crutches with a tiny amount of weight. While my surgeon said put weight on the foot asap and deal with the pain, I am opting for a more conservative approach because I CAN. So what if this is difficult? So what if this means I can’t do the things I was doing before?
5. This is the reality of having an accident/being ill, folks. Bones do not heal fast and there is a good reason for that so wanting things to go faster than my body can achieve is useless. Our lives are so fast nowadays we are forgetting that our bodies are ancient and don’t care about how modern life works – that is a head thing!
6. So I’ve changed my life to cope and to maximise my chances of allowing my body to heal this itself, as it was meant to and can do. I’m lucky, the break is clean so this doesn’t neccesarily apply to those with
bad breaks. However, be cautious about seeking surgery just to make your life easier – what does that actually mean? Your body was made to heal and maybe the time taken out of things to do that just has to be accepted.
7. This means I stay off the foot as much as possible and elevate it when I can. I only do the work I absolutely have to do and I ask for help to do it to avoid overstretching myself. I’m actually resting because I need to (and crutching IS exhausting!). The body uses more resources to heal and so I’m working with it by feeding it better and taking long breaks to micronap or veg out watching DVDs (‘House’ is good!).
8. I’ve gone low-carb to avoid putting on weight and so far I think I might have lost weight! It is not so bad snacking on a plate of cucumber slices topped with cream cheese and ham or having a low-joule jelly made with coconut milk, y’know. And my sister makes the meanest Power Pancakes which are wicked with sugar-free syrup!
Life is too miserable to miss coffee – pick your battles.
9. I’ve started an upper body regimen with handweights and dumbells, enough to raise a sweat and earn my shower. I have RSI in my wrists which makes crutches diabolical for me but I am coping so far and I think it is because of my upper body strength so I don’t want to lose that.
10. I’m learning to let things go because being miserable takes too much of my body’s resources and I need those for healing.
That was long but hope it helps!
Em
November 16, 2008 at 9:09 pm
Em,
You are fabulous! Great attitude and advice! #10 is the best truth!
Press on,
Janet
November 17, 2008 at 12:43 am
I couldn’t sleep so I thought I would check for new postings. I too have learned to let go. I am a person who has to have everything in its place and beleive me this is a huge adjustment.
Since I cannot do the housecleaning I cannot complain about how or when it gets done. I just get lost in tv, dvd’s or surfing the web.
Em, “House” is the best. I am into wathing “Lost”. I started with season one and I am half way thru season two. Totally awsome. I did not realize before this injury that so many shows are online. True life saver.
I also agree with our bodies being ancient and life is in fast forward. At 50 years old and except for the foot I am in good shape. The only thing reminding me of my age is the time it takes to recover from anything. Ugh.
Well I am going to try to sleep and I will report back after the doc on Monday.
Cheers all.
November 17, 2008 at 4:44 am
Hi all, I did my jones fracture in Jan this year, ended up with a DVT and no healing because I was weight bearing after only a few days. I had the surgery in September and had the cast off mid october, boot for 2.5 weeks and then into a normal shoe.
I have had alot of physio but my foot is still very sore will be going back to the doctor on Wed to see if the bone has finally healed. Will let you all know how i go.
November 17, 2008 at 3:10 pm
Hey, I just got back from the doc. I get to put 1/4 to 1/2 of my weight with crutches and walk. I don’t need air cast to sleep or when sitting around. I go back to doc in 2 weeks to see where I’m at and possibly start pt.
This is huge for me. I am beginning to see the light at the end of the tunnel. Just being able to put some weight is wonderful.
November 17, 2008 at 4:36 pm
Wow, a lot of discussion has gone on since I last visited the site!!! Thanks everyone so much for sharing your stories and thoughts. I really enjoy reading them.
My injury was September 12th, and I was one of those people was treated improperly for the first 6 weeks by a GP (only put in a wooden shoe) and finally referred to a specialist. At 8 weeks, I was put in a cam boot and a bone stimulator was ordered, only my insurance refuses to pay for it until the injury is 90 days passed.
I’ve been on crutches for just over 2 months now and go back to the specialist Nov. 25th… Blue Cross won’t cover the bone stimulator until after December 13th. I’m still non-weight bearing and last x-ray, my fracture has only separated further and shows no signs of calcification.
I would love to share more about how this whole experience has positively impacted my life when I have more time soon. :) I hope everyone is doing well and able to keep a good spirit.
Best wishes!!
November 17, 2008 at 6:23 pm
Margie! Good news for you and well done on the attitude.
I had forgotten about “Lost”! I saw Series 1-3 and will now track down the 4th – non-pay TV here is awful so I only saw patchy episodes before and hated not knowing what was going on but love being up with the play now.
I’m also watching “Brideshead Revisted”, the original Granada series, which is such a joy. Beautifully acted and filmed in that wonderful old-fashioned way, it is a reminder of how people used to live which has resonance for me at the moment.
As for La Foot, I have been trying a little weight-bearing but wondered if I had done the right thing because I had some pain I haven’t had before and realised I was sort of hopping on it instead of rolling fully through it.
So I’m giving it up for the rest of the week and will try again next week after more rest.
I have noticed that now I have more time for my family, they are telling more about what is going on in their lives and are actualy seeking my input – I hadn’t realised this WASN’T happening before!
There’s a lesson in that somewhere……
Em
November 17, 2008 at 11:19 pm
EM,
I watch all my shows online. If you go to fancast.com you will be able to find almost any show in full episode. I never saw “Brideshead Revisited” but I will look it up.
I have been trying to walk/roll thru with crutches but not very good at it “yet”. What is happening is I have been getting a sharp pain in my knee with increasing pain over the last couple of weeks. So when I go to put weight this sharp pain stops my in my tracks.
I did tell the doc about it today when he had me rolling in his office. He said to give it a week and if it the pain does not let up to make an appt with the ortho in his office. He feels one of my falls might have caused a slight maniscus (sp) tear but he is not able to say. And since he is not ortho he would leave that to him.
Has anyone else felt this type of pain?
I can understand how you would be hoping on the foot. It is a normal response to pain to get off it right away and that would be to hop. Try to relax and not do to much with it. Even though I was told to walk/roll he said to do it in moderation. He also said if it swells to sit and ice it.
MEG,
Your foot has been messed up since Jan? Wow.
I can’t imagine how you must feel. Does your foot swell and turn purple?
GINGER,
Sounds like your going thru some tough stuff. I am so glad I have insurance that is paying for everything. It is not bad enough to be down and out but to have to worry about med bills, ugh. Keep posting, it’s like therapy.
Hey, gotta go for now. We have online grocery shopping and delivery here and my food is here.
What would we do with the internet?
November 18, 2008 at 6:49 am
Margie
Yep Jan seems so long ago now, 2008 has been a nightmare of a year for me, good news is that its nearly over. The only swelling I was getting was around my ankle but even now this has subsided in last couple of days. The purple foot thing used to really scare me, especially since I had DVT, but this went after I started walking around without crutches. I really recommend that you get PT as I think this has really help me get back on my feet. I am know back at the gym mainly using the bike but have also started swimming.
Good luck sounds like you are nearly there.
November 18, 2008 at 8:46 am
hello again, all. Good to hear all the positive stories, and ideas for coping. And I agree, that the silver lining has been to give more time for family and friends, and catching up with bills. One wise friend said: “Sounds like you needed to just slow down.”
Had an appointment yesterday with a new osteo doc. Review of my situation: fracture July 27, clean break, but non union as of Oct 7 xrays. I backed out of the surgery my first doc was pushing, am now doing bone stimulator, have been on and off crutches, have not been in cast at all, throughout. Not a lot of pain, but soreness if I put weight on it too long.
Would like to share with you all what has become clear to me in talking to several doctors, reading online, etc. There is VERY LITTLE MEDICAL CONSENSUS right now on proper treatment of a jones fracture, esp immobilization vs. weight bearing. My present doc feels that for the bone to heal and regenerate, especially in this problem area, there needs to be a carefully monitored amount of functional use and weightbearing, and research seems to bear that out. (Again, this is a clean break – type 1, I think. Can be very different when displacement or shattering is involved.) Calcium doesn’t build up as well when the bone isn’t being used; this is what the bone stimulator is trying to simulate! He called immobilization, long periods of casts, rest, etc “old school,” for simple fractures. Not trying to cause trouble here, but just passing this along! I was fitted yesterday for orthotic imsets, that will take some of the pressure off the metatarsal, allowing me to walk more without pain and the need for crutches. A good thing! The insets feel very wierd and will take some getting used to, but definitely better than hobbling around on crutches for months. I am guardedly hopeful.
I agree with Em’s lovely statement that our bodies are ancient, and that healing from this injury requires a lot of patience. I’m still working on the patience part! As I guess we all are.
November 18, 2008 at 7:30 pm
Hi all,
Interesting thoughts regarding what is best for bone regeneration. I have to say everyone I know who is even remotely connected with medicine seems to think judicious weightbearing is critical because this is actually Nature’s way of stimulating bone formation.
We are always being told that using weights helps those with osteoporosis – because it stimulates and maintains bone density. Personal trainers will tell you working out with weights will help build bones.
My music school director also broke her foot a few years ago and was advised to get back walking as soon as practicable, which she did and has continued to do ever since. She is now 70 and last year had her bones scanned and she has the density of a 20-year-old which her doctor attributes to her increased walking and other activity since that accident!
The crucial factor is time which is also the most frustrating thing because it is that which we seem to have the least – that’s where we get tested for patience, I guess.
I’m entertaining myself by finally sorting my superannuation and finally finding out about income protection insurance for BOTH of us for which I never had the time or patience before – HA!
I’m also perfecting a lo-carb flourless chocolate cake – will let y’all know the results.
Em
November 18, 2008 at 11:38 pm
Hi All,
Back to the surgeon today which is 12 weeks post op and over 10 months since initial break. Glad to report that I that we now have union and the foot feels pretty good. I am still seeing a physio as my ankles are still pretty stiff and I have a limp but the site of the break is pretty much pain free.
When I first did my foot I did not stop work and I think was partly responsible for it not healing. Unknowningly it put a lot of stress on me as I had a pretty full on job. When it did not heal dragging on for so long I made the decision to give up work and have the surgery. This has allowed me not to have to worry about anything else but my foot. I know not all are as lucky as I that I could stop work but as Laurie mentioned I think this problem was meant to slow me down and take a look at what I was doing.
I did not take any supplement but reduced my caffine intake to only one a day. Did not have any carbonated drinks – not big on them anyway, made sure I was eating lots of veggies and having two serves of calcium a day. I did take calcium suplements for a while but did not like the side-effects.
I think getting phsyio after is very important. I am now back at the gym using the bike and cross trainer at the same time giving swimming a go.
I know at times it feels like it will never heal but it does and boy do I feel fantastic!!!
Meg
November 18, 2008 at 11:56 pm
Hi All, it’s me from Japan again. It has been really encouraging and good to read all the positive thoughts, and to realize that no, I am not the only one on this planet who sees her career and life plans being changed by this. It’s been a bit over a week for me now since the accident, and even though I am still getting into very dark moods and panicking about the possibility of being kicked out of my job, perhaps it is getting easier to think about the situation calmly.
On Friday I got another XRay, as expected no bone growth visible (at least to my eyes… the doctor as usual is not saying anything much), but also no change in the doctor’s opinion on the treatment: still in this light cast with anti-swelling patches to be exchanged twice a day, and hooray, one week of sick leave.
I have enlisted my friends to bring me veggies, fruits, yogurt etc almost daily, yesterday got indian curry from my favorite curryshop (!! boy that cheered me up!) have so far survived without coffee and sugars but some darn lovely friends from my home country sent me a boxful of chocolate…
Is it good or bad to wiggle the toes? I feel like they are growing into each other.. and the ankle is turning into a piece of concrete… so, if there is no pain, would it harm no move the joints even a little bit?
Among the good things – I think I am developing quite some strength in my arms and in the good leg by hopping around on one leg (my house is a prime example of non-accessible building, two sets of windy, steep, slippery stairs to climb between the bedroom, the kitchen and the toilet… so crutches stay parked near the entrance). Started doing again my mat pilates exercises, attached a dynaband to a doorframe, but very much missing any kind of cardio activity. I try to go out every day with the crutches, if nothing else than to go around the block once or twice, but that just does not feel like my usual 5k runs..
Most importantly, I feel I have no more need to complain, cry or whine to my friends about how my bone is broken and my life is in pieces. I also got over my worst fears and scepticism towards the local non-english-speaking doctors by talking on the phone with an ortopedist from back home. It seems that you do not need to be able to discuss things in English to be a competent doctor who knows what is best.
Our bodies are ancient… so true! If only the modern world would understand that also, that not everything can be done in Q1-4 thinking…
All the best and cheers to everyone!
November 19, 2008 at 1:11 am
Hi Everyone, Great to read everyone’s updates on what is and is not working for them. I’m am on week 2 of my Jones # in an aircast NWB. I do have 2 little kids that I take care of so I have had to learn how to adapt while taking care of them.
After coming to this site the first time I was pretty determined to have the surgery, but have calmed down and decided to try the more conservative method for now. After one week there was no healing, but also no displacement. I didn’t have a 2 week x-ray but will have one at three weeks.
I am also taking a multivitamin with extra calcium and drinking lots of milk.
I wear my boot almost all the time except to shower.
I do set the boot down to balance sometimes while I’m standing, but try to keep it elevated most of the time. Although it was good to read that displacement won’t happen easily.
Was there anyone who was weightbaring again after 6 weeks?
My x-rays are here if anyone is interested http://jennandlucas.blogspot.com/2008/11/different-kind-of-picture.html
Jenn
November 19, 2008 at 2:09 pm
Hey Jenn,
At my 4 week appt my ortho suggested trying to walk on it but when I did it still caused a little bit of pain and aching. He said give it another 2 weeks and try again.
Mine is a type 1 and upon hearing it was a jones fx i was also determined to have the surgery but he feels that the bone is in a good position to heal without it. My foot certainly feels like its gaining its strength so hopefully in 2 weeks i’ll be done with the crutches and on my way to walking normally again. I’ll keep you posted on how its going.
November 19, 2008 at 5:14 pm
Hi All,
Lost Fin, wiggle away if you can! I was told to wiggle and I was also told to stay off the foot for as long as I could in the first 1 or 2 weeks and then to try weightbearing bit by bit. Good to hear about your exercise regimen too! Good for you. I’m going to get a massage as well as soon as I can!
I’m a little concerned that so many people are having xray after xray when bone calcification just doesn’t show up on an xray for 3-6 months after a fracture! Is it because these fractures are displaced so your doctors are keeping an eye on wayward bone fragments? Or for those non-displaced fractures having multiple xrays, is it because your orthos are making sure they stay non-displaced??
I went on my own yesterday down to the local cafe, as opposed to just being ferried to and from my teaching, and felt pretty good but then in the evening got these shocks through the fracture area of the foot. My foot has been pretty sore through the night and today which is depressing but my husband reckons it is a sign of healing…..I’m staying off it today.
Thanks for the xrays Jenn – really interesting!
BTW, never made it to the low-carb chocolate cake….turned into low-carb millet/almond/pecan/chocolate chip cookies…don;t ask me how….
Em
November 20, 2008 at 11:22 am
Em,
My doctor is monitoring my fracture with xrays every 2-3 weeks to make sure my fracture hasn’t become displaced. He feels that if it becomes displaced he’ll do the surgery and it’s best to get it as soon as there is any evidence of displacement. For me so far so good, I go back in 3 weeks.
And as for the soreness at night, I’m experiencing the same thing. Sometimes it’s an intense tingling and sometimes borders on a burning sensation but it’s only fleeting so hopefully its a sign of positive things happening down there.
November 20, 2008 at 12:26 pm
Hi Everyone,
I am going back every couple of weeks for xrays do to the mess I made of my foot. It required so much hardware to repair that my doc wants to be sure nothing has moved. He said it was a difficult foot to fix.
Just reporting on what is going on with my foot. I am walking/rolling thru with crutches. My foot does not feel like it belongs to my body. The swelling was almost gone and now has returned with a vengance. The area around the incision and hardware feels tingly all the time.
As far as the foot, I am getting around better using the crutches, air cast and putting a little weight on the foot. I also have permission to move my toes, bend my ankle and move it from side to side as often as I like. Full movement will take a while.
The problem is that every time I step onto my foot I get a sharp pain in my knee. I can’t straighten out my knee without a clicking feeling and sharp pain. Doc feels I may have torn something when I fell originally and has referred me to an ortho. My doc specializes in feet that is why he cannot help with this. By the end of the night my knee is twice it’s size. I have an appointment next week to see what is going on with my new issue.
BAD, I am beginning to feel like I will never be better.
GOOD, even with the pain in my knee and my foot not feeling right, I can get around and do little things I was not able to do before weight bearing. It is nice to be able to put my foot down for balance.
November 21, 2008 at 4:34 pm
Hey all,
Happy to report that after a day of elevation and ice the swelling is down. Tomorrow is my daughters wedding so I already expect it to swell again. I will let you all know on Sunday.
November 22, 2008 at 3:02 am
Margie,
You will get better and it is important that you realise this and get ready for when you are. Think about how much you will love your legs for getting you where you want to go! And how you will never take them for granted again….
While you may have a problem with your knee, it is still a small thing compared with what we might all have suffered. Just think about breaking more than a foot bone and what THAT could mean in our lives – sheesh.
I did a trip through the supermarket today and apart from feeling like a freak and being disconcerted by the people clearly pitying me,I LOVED it. The foot is tired and a bit sore but I can rest it as much as I like and at least those people looking at me sideways got out of my way fast!
I got more weight on the foot today and no big pain or anything so I think one day of trying weight and one of as much as rest as possible might just be right for me.
Best of luck for the wedding! What a special day.
Em
November 22, 2008 at 5:57 am
This is the best forum I have found for this frustrating medical topic. I broke my fifth metatarsal a month ago. Like a lot of women, wearing the wrong shoes and rushing. They were platform sandals with straps that weren’t fastened tight enough. I thought I twisted my ankle at first, it was like I was going to fall, but in fact broke my fall with my own foot. How embarrassing. The pain was horrid! I had to walk to my car and driving hurt like mad (right foot). Walking into my house was worse. I made the mistake of going upstairs where the bathroom is a good walk away and knew something horrible had happened when I thought of actually crawling to stave off the pain! Luckily once I stopped putting weight on it, there is not much pain unless there’s pressure on it, and has been that way for the most part, separate from minor soft pulsating pain).
Next morning I went to urgent care at the general doctor and was told it was broken – fifth metatarsal, I don’t remember if the PA told me Jones or not. I cried like a baby and still feel very depressed about this – the loss of time is beyond psychological, philosophical, emotional, physical…I want to turn this into something good by becoming this super healthy person.
A few days later I went to the orthopaedic doctor, from the referal I was given by the PA. First of all, I have no idea why she sent to me to a doctor 15 miles from where I live. The service has been horrible. Wait 2 hours to be seen, 30 seconds of “God time” with the doctor who doesn’t say too much and then 2 minutes with the obnoxious (I dont know what he is) PA (?). They gave me a cast and told me 6 weeks, no weight. He called it a Jones fracture, but didn’t even point out where it was or what that meant. Neither the initial PA or the doctor showed me my x-rays! I was confused about this. I was able to get a copy of the first x-ray on disc at the general doc after asking…the ortho, being the horrible place that it is (dusty x-ray room and equipment, negligent staff, etc), didn’t have the ability to give me a copy on cd! (Sorry to rant, but this does feel good…it’s been a LONG TIME COMING. No one to talk to about this that understands the complexities and frustrations of this fracture, its limitations and ridiculous medical system).
A good note is, I was lucky to be able to be off work and school (stressful since I am a grad student with some very important classes this semester!). I feel a bit bad though, I would much prefer to be at work and at school. Nevertheless, I do not want to risk further complications. People seem to think crutches are the cure-all…not for me. Crutches and me don’t mix – not for long term transportation. I almost fell down using them and have been scared straight – using this wheely thing my Grandmother never used.
Anyway, my follow up appointment was this week (after 4-5 weeks) and I was told it was healing pretty well and that I could begin placing weight on it – 5 lbs a day till half my body weight, with use of crutches (no can do)… And math and me don’t mix, either. How we can estimate this, seriously?? After the 5 minute appointment (and paying the $25 co-pay), I was scheduled for a follow-up January 9th…confusing for several reasons. A). I was told this could take 4-6 weeks/use of crutches and boot to heal, (snotty PA countered that’s the initial healing phase). B). Being seen in Jan takes me over 2-3 weeks of the 4-6 more weeks with the cast. What I am supposed to do with this overlap of 3 weeks?
It is worth noting that I had to ask the receptionist if I could ask a few more questions since the appointment was so very quick. So I waited for Jr. PA, a complete idiot. He bragged about his ortho adventures, how me made himself walk without crutches (medical malpractice, anyone?) and told me in a sarcastic, rude way “I think you’re thinking way too much about this.” What the hell? I’ve never been so insulted. I am a patient asking necessary information about my physical well-being. I am also a “customer” who pays. He told me they get like 100 patients a day – (the McDonalds of doctors!).
Next day I decide to get a new doctor, though worried if this will incur a lot more charges. I was able to get a friend to pick up the new x-ray for me and have an appointment on Monday. Long story short – if anyone can answer the following questions for me, I will be indebted to your kindness.
1.My boot is huge. I have a small foot, size 5 (sometimes smaller, sometimes larger depending on the shoe). I was given a Medium black boot that goes just below my knee…they didn’t have anything smaller at the time. Two weeks of badgering them to fulfill their promise of getting me on that fits, I get a Small. Which sufficed up until now. How can one “walk” in a boot like this? My heel does not touch the bottom of the boot at all. Should I have been given a different boot or cast all-together? Is it common to use this boot through the duration of healing?
2.I am 31, and shamefully a huge diet cola drinker. I have been cutting down dramatically and will altogether eventually. Half my life really, big consumer of it. Could this be a bone density issue? Because of my age, they won’t do a test, but wondering if this has been suggested to any of you. I was more than surprised how easy this broke!!!
3.The incremental weight-bearing thing – how is this figured out?
4.How has your work and/or school treated you with time off? I really want to go back, just scared of hurting it again and delaying healing. Crutches are useless to me.
5.I always have my foot elevated, meaning, not touching the ground. I can’t be in bed all day, so sitting up, it’s elevated but not “above the heart.” Same for sleep, I can elevate it above the heart with pillows or sleeping with it propped up on the sofa, but eventually go to my desired sleep position – on the stomach and no elevation. And when I see my boyfriend, it’s hard for me not to spoon up next to him – my healing leg is always away, but wondering…Is all this, or any of this, bad for healing?
6.I am a huge fan of cracking knuckles – hands and feet. I haven’t done this once with my healing foot. Can I pop my big toe at least? Circle my ankle a bit?
7.Are there any exercises we can do at all???
8.What should I ask the new doctor? (in addition to many of the afore-listed questions, that is)?
Thanks for this forum and everyone who posted. I hope I can get some answers and look forward to, like the rest of you, returning to a normal life very soon. This is a life changing event, no doubt. There are moments of deep depression, but I plan to try to continue to make the best of it by never leaving what I can do today for another day. I had always wanted to begin jogging, then this happened. Makes you think.
Best,
Diane
November 22, 2008 at 7:17 am
After reading ALL these posts – two more questions:
1. How much weight did all of you gain? Or none at all? Were you conscious of diet and did you do any special exercises minding your injury? I read about some swimming and can’t figure out how that’s possible…
2. Moving toes and ankles – yea or nea?
Thanks!
Diane 2.0
November 22, 2008 at 12:43 pm
Diane, thanks so much for sharing!! I’m 31 as well — a single mom with a 10 year old daughter, and live alone the other half the time. I had so many similar questions, and 10 weeks in with no healing, I have a hard time being content with not knowing when I will finally be able to walk again. I’ll throw my personal experience at the questions I can identify best with. :) (Forgive me, all… this sort of turned into a rant.)
DOCTORS: My first doctor, my GP, saw me for 6 weeks before referring me to an Ortho — which is when I was finally told I had a Jones fracture and literally asked why I wasn’t ever casted. The new Ortho has a wonderful PA, but seems very short with me and in a hurry. I feel you on this, definitely. My whole life is upside down, and it’s so frustrating when I have so many unanswered questions. Over 10 weeks now, I’ve been ever-so-careful and am still sitting here with a foot just as broken as it was back in September. I’ve decided if he won’t actually sit and talk with me at my appointment next Tuesday, I’m switching doctors. Do I really want this man doing surgery on my body?
CRUTCHES, BOOTS, CASTS: I went the first 7 weeks with only crutches — no cast, no boot. (I have to keep a sound mind because I get upset about this.) When I finally got the boot, I wondered the same things. My heel would never sit flat and I was afraid by moving around, it was defeating the purpose entirely. I’m not supposed to put weight on mine yet, so I’m not sure about walking in it. I started stepping and rolling through like someone suggested a few weeks ago in the blog, and a lot of my numbness and tingling has actually gone away! (Thanks, guys!)
And Crutches, ha! I’ve fallen on my crutches so many times, I can completely understand how they would scare you. Because I live alone and have a daughter to take care of, I do a lot of hopping. Probably wayyyy to much. :) The most embarrassing thing… I’ll get to hopping around and actually lose my crutches. I’ve been on them so long, I have ugly callouses on my palms and have a lot of numbness in my hands and wrists.
WORK: I’m a city letter carrier for the Postal Service with a 9 mile walking route. Since I didn’t hurt myself on the job, they aren’t required to offer work to me. The first 8 weeks, I used what annual and sick leave I had saved and stayed home. I was finally released to go back but can only sit on a stool and case mail, and have to leave when there is nothing left to do. After about an hour of sitting on the stool, my foot starts to swell something fierce… so I’ve started taking my boot off after a few hours to lessen the pull of gravity while my foot is dangling from the stool. There is no way for me to prop my foot up at work — at all. Anyway, they’ve been very rude to me… but I hope it’s simply the nature of the company I work for. My bosses treat me like I’m a child who is in trouble and being punished. I’m trying to stretch out what leave time I have left by working at least 4 hours a day, but I wonder at what cost to the healing of my foot. I wasn’t financially prepared at all for this, so I don’t really have a choice. This has been a huge lesson to me in saving and planning ahead.
WEIGHT GAIN: For me personally, it has been less about weight gain and more about muscle loss. I walk for a living and my hobbies are hiking and whitewater kayaking. The muscles in my right leg have completely atrophied from being sedentary, not going to the gym, and from not carrying my mail route every day. I haven’t paddled since early September and my upper body has also very noticeably lost muscle tone. People have commented that I look like I’m losing weight, but it saddens me because I know it’s really muscle. I’ve probably put on a few pounds around the middle, but all of my clothes still fit just fine. It just makes me more anxious to get back to my regular day-to-day life so it’ll go away. :)
I’m really excited to hear about people’s plans to exercise through the injury and I wish I’d though of that much, much sooner!!
Since we’re all sort of getting to know each other here, I figured why not post a pictures of myself and make this a little more personal:
http://i91.photobucket.com/albums/k310/asch1977/CamBoot.jpg
Thanks again so much everyone for your posts, updates and taking the time to share and make us all feel comfortable. We’ve almost turned this into a social networking site. :)
God Bless,
Ginger
November 23, 2008 at 10:16 am
First Question: Is your name Bella or Diane?
And yes I’ve found that a majority of doctors are very condescending, and probably dont want their patients interfering or questioning their treatment. But we have the right to ask so keep pressing him with questions.
But really we cant give you too much advice because each jones fracture may be classified differently and each classification has its own prognosis and method of treatment. But since you were only given a cast and have been cleared to begin weight bearing we can assume that its probably a Type I, so I’ll tell you what I’ve been doing.
I have also been given permission to begin light weight bearing but I can tell you its hard to determine how much is just enough. I went a little to heavy for the first day and it resulted in intense pain all that night and a majority of the next day. It was probably due more to the weakness of the metatarsophalangeal joint than the fracture itself but I wont be doing that again. So I got in touch with a friend of mine who is a PT and he was surprised that I wasnt given PT before I was allowed to weight bear and suggested a few exercises to strengthen the muscles and joints before putting a lot of pressure on them. Here’s what he said I could do at home. Thera band calf presses, Seated calf raises, Ankle rotation exercises, and a recumbent bike if I had access to one. He said I should use discomfort as a guide and never let it get to the point of pain. And he said this will give me a better feeling of my limitations without putting myself at risk of reinjury, in case I put too much weight on it. He also said keep wiggling the toes to avoid atrophy and to help increase circulation. Hope this helps a little.
And yeah I’ve put on just over 10 pounds that I can’t wait to run off as soon as I can.
November 23, 2008 at 1:34 pm
Hi Chris, I’m unecessarily (?) paranoid my supervisor will think I should be at work and not researching this stuff from home…My workplace is not too worker friendly. I guess it’s silly to have a internet pseudonym (Diane)…it’s Isabel (bella). :)
Honestly, it’s hard for me to trust what the doctor/staff says. The rude guy told me that get over a 100 patients a day. In a office open 8-5, and not accounting for lunch, I think that’s like under 5 minutes per patient. I’m going to see another doctor tomorrow. I wasn’t told what kind of fracture I have as in type 1, etc. and my x-ray never even pointed out where the fracture is, etc. I took some pics of my x-rays (1st one and one from last week) that I’ll post on flickr if anyone’s interested and/or can clarify from seeing it:
http://www.flickr.com/photos/67997958@N00/
The fracture is on my right foot and I’m guessing its the little gap/cut before the ankle?
About PT, have never been told anything, which isn’t surprising. I did notice after applying weight to my foot that it hurt the rest of the day, and seeing how it was only 4-5 weeks after the fracture and everyone else mentions PT at around 8-10, I think it may be too soon. But will learn more tomorrow.
Anyone have a problem walking in the cam walker? It has a pretty high heel! If I wear sneakers on the good foot I’ll be lopsided…any advice for this?
As per weight…how did you weigh yourself? I’m petite so any weight is too much for me…I feel like I have as well and boy is that depressing. I plan to run it off ASAP as well and incorporate running into the rest of my life as well…after losing the ability to walk…and given a second chance through healing…I think it’s normal to just want to run!!! : )
Isabel
November 23, 2008 at 4:28 pm
Hi Bella/Diane,
When reading your story I was thinking how fast I would have been out of that docs office and into another. You have to feel good about who is overseeing your healing.
My doc lets me ask as many questions as I like and he is so informative that there is not a lot for me to ask. I have had many sets of xrays and my doc shows me each and explains what is going on.
I would not crack anything in you foot. That does not sound like something good to do.
I got hurt on Labor Day weekend and got permission last week to move my toes and do ankle rolls, and lift and point my foot as Chris stated. I am not in PT yet, but he said this will help circulation and stiffness.
There is not way to determine how much weight you are actually putting on the foot. I was told to start to put 1/4 to 1/2 my weight and to conintue with the crutches.
You need to ask your doc about what you will be able to do and follow what they say.
As for weight, I knew sitting around was going to be tough on the weight issue. I watch very careful what I eat limiting my carb intake. I actually lost 6 pounds which was nice. I guess not being at work and picking on all that is brought in is a positive.
As for as work, my boss and company I work for can’t wait for me to get back, but to do so once healed even though I have a sit down job as a client service rep.
They only time I had my foot above my heart was when I was laying down. When sitting in my chair watching tv I propped it up on two pillows.
Chris,
I have been doing the calf raises which is helping me to bend my toes without putting any weight on them. It felt weird at first to bend them but it is getting easier.
Same with the ankle circles, stiff at first but moving better now. I have been hanging my foot off the hassack and writing the alphabet with my foot. This has helped to give me more range of movement.
November 23, 2008 at 4:57 pm
Hi All,
When I fist got out of the cast into a boot I could not even put my foot flush with the sole of the shoe. I used my crutches for a full two weeks with the boot with about 50% WB. I had PT as soon as the hard cast came off and he got walking in a hydrotherapy pool in water up to my shoulders, this was really good as it got the ankle moving and was nice to walk unaided.
The PT also got me to do stretches and rotating the ankle. The PT also strapped my foot as I have a tendency to walk on the outside of my foot, this helped greatly with shifting the load of weight through my foot and alleviated any pain or discomfort through the site of my surgery. From this point on I was confident with walking without crutches.
The only issue I have now is a bit of pain through my ankle but visited a podiatrist last week to get advice on shoes. Comming into summer I wanted to get out of runners but its not to be with them recommending a running shoe to help with cushioning and stability.
I did put on weight, approx 4kg but am glad to say its comming off pretty quickly now Im back at the gym. I am only doing the bike, cross trainer and weights for about 30-60 mins a time. Have also done some swimming and found this really helped free up my ankle.
November 23, 2008 at 11:52 pm
It’s so weird, I don’t see my newest post here yet??
Chris: It does sound like I have a type 1 fracture from what you described and what I read…How many weeks into the healing before you were asked to try the walking with weight increments? Looking forward to PT…my toes are numb and don’t want to move them till I get the go-ahead,hopefully tomorrow.
Margie: What did you eat generally for your diet? Would love to know! My job sounds like yours too. Were you off (or are you still off) the duration of the healing? How long did it last?
Meg: Have you been given any shoe recs? I’m thinking Dansko, they get good reviews…their clogs and they have some nice sandals too…3 inch heels a bad idea if they’re comfort shoes?
thanks all
Isabel
November 24, 2008 at 12:21 am
Wow, lots of information coming in and lots of questions which is good!
Diane, your experience with snotty medicos is NOT unusual at all. You have to be prepared to remind these people that it is your money that pays their wages and that they are obliged to offer you decent customer service as well as basic courtesy!
It sounds as if you’ve had a lousy start so you have to concentrate on getting a good finish! Your xrays should be your property so get ‘em and keep ‘em (where do you live??).
1. When I was fitted for my boot,the physio made sure my foot was at the proper right angle so that my ankle rested flush with the back of the boot and the foot rested properly along the sole. It does, however, slide around a bit because I have high arches and my foot is inclined to lift. I was told it would be better to put my foot in a right angle becauser it would have less trouble getting back into flexibility this way. Your heel should be touching the bottom of the boot, I think.
If your fracture is non-displaced you should be able to take your foot out and reposition it yourself otherwise, get a good physio to do it for you.
2. Diet cola doesn’t have sugar (which is regarded by the body as a toxin and known by nutritionists to be a “thief”, meaning it takes nutrition AWAY from the body while adding NOTHING of value) but sodas have been implicated in some studies to interfere with calcium absorption and I was advised not to drink them. This fracture is surprisingly easy to incur so it may have nothing to do with your bone density.
3. Getting to grips with crutches is pretty crucial! You should have been taught how to walk in them but clearly your medical attention has been woeful (you have my great sympathy!). There is a protocol for handling them and it isn’t easy but you will need them to accurately gauge your ability to weight bear and be able to manage weight levels without jarring your foot and risking further injury. I avoided the crutches for a week because it was just so scary using them (I live up 23 stairs!) but made myself practise and after 3 weeks I am able to practice putting some weight through the foot using them.
Yes, the boot seems unwieldy but with crutches you can actually roll through the foot in a walking motion which is why using the crutches is so useful.
My ortho (also pretty snotty) told me to start trying to walk as soon as possible and to “move through the pain” which I think is ridiculous (here in Australia, we have a very hardy attitude!) BUT I also know weightbearing encourages bone formation so I decided to have as much rest as possible for two full weeks and then begin a little weightbearing/rolling through the foot this third week. So far so good, not too much pain and I’m not pushing anything.
4. I work for myself and am contracted to tutor at a private music school. I cancelled lessons for the first week and went back to work the second week (three evenings a week and Saturday mornings) but I can teach while seated so no real big deal although not great for my back. Again, crutches essential to get there and back. It is surprising how fast I am getting on them now! Ask for help, as much as you need. I am amazed how hard that can be and am aware this is one of the lessons I am taking from this experience – you also find out who your real friends are!
5. Sleeping is hard! I cannot sleep on my back but tried very hard the first 2 weeks to do that. This week I have given up the pillows and gone back to sleeping on my side. I don’t believe it will affect healing at all but find I wake up and have to turn to the other side and I watch out that the boot doesn’t feel ‘twisted’ at all.
I do notice that if I am on the side which rests the broken side down first, I feel it more. I sometimes put a pillow between my knees for better leverage because it keeps my back from twisting.
Seated, I try to keep the foot up but I don’t get obsessive about it.
6. I would not be cracking anything in an injured foot! Rest is crucial and I wouldn’t be pulling your ankle around until you are out of the boot or until your ortho/physio says it is ready. It is very likely you’ve also done some ligament damage
and while physios like you to get ankles moving asap with tendon/ligament damage, the first priority is bone healing and you do not want to displace the fracture.
7. I’m doing upper body work only.
8. Ask the new doctor if it is a true Jones Fracture (it may be a little too high on the bone to be properly Jones) and if it is displaced – this has a huge bearing on your treatment because a true Jones is typically at the end of the metatarsal where almost no circulation can occur making healing extremely difficult and surgery (insertion of a pin) or the use of a bone stimulator might be a better option. I am a fan of conservative healing myself but my fracture is not a true Jones (fractionaly too high) and is not displaced so a good candidate for natural healing.
Ask him all the questions you have asked here!
Move your toes? Yes, yes, yes! You need to keep circulation up.
Weight gain? I lost weight in the first week, put on in the second and as a result have gone low-carb now to help stave off any more gain.
Look, you do have to accept this isn’t going to be a short situation. It is life-changing and that cannot be helped. I was a five-day a week gym bunny running and sprinting….you can imagine how difficult this is for me too.
It is really important you accept the reality of the situation and look for ways to work with it and maximise your healing, than to work against it and end up weak and frustrated – that won’t get you anywhere. Use this forum to vent, get support and search for solutions!
Cheers,
Em
November 24, 2008 at 2:27 pm
Wow, thank you Em for answering all my questions! I really appreciate. Just got back from the new doctor – nice facilities and overall a better doctor – but rude and condenscending too! What is up with doctors today? Not only that, but I had to pay extra for some work forms to be filled out! Healthcare in America. :(
He didn’t seem to even know much about Jones fractures, dancing around the term like “If you say its a Jones Fracture it won’t heal” (what does that mean?!). He did call it a Zone 2 Fracture with no displacement.
He said I could begin weight bearing (not even mentioning the increments or use of crutches) and walking a bit in my boot until it hurts and said I could swim and use a stationary bike with special Rx shoes (of course he forgot to give me the Rx!). Has anyone just been given the green light even while the current x-ray still shows the break? Do you just start walking until it hurts and go on with life as if it’s pretty much healed?
He said I wouldn’t need physical therapy – although he did not address the issue at all during the appointment. I had to ask a nurse and she asked him. Could this be right??
He said healing takes different times for everyone. He didn’t tell me how much mine had healed. Shouldn’t he be able to?? He said I could move my toes and ankle. That’s good.
I just can’t get over how he couldn’t tell me if it was a jones fracture, or how he snapped at me for reviewing what we had gone through by saying “I went over that two times already.” What the hell? I’d like to give HIM a referal to anger management and personality classes for working with the public! Going to bad doctors makes me seem like a perpetual complainer, but I assure you it’s just bad luck and not wanting to be talked down to and misinformed. Anyway, I feel a smidge better, but still lost.
For my next appointment, scheduled for four weeks from now, would it be ridiculous of me to go to yet another doctor? My insurance assured me I wouldn’t be charged differently or more, just be responsible for the co-pays and any fees charged during the appointment.
Thanks everyone for your advice!
Isabel
November 24, 2008 at 4:57 pm
Yeah, I posted a reply two days ago and it still hasn’t shown up on the board yet. :)
November 24, 2008 at 5:38 pm
Wow, Isabel, firstly did you see a doctor or an orthopaedic surgeon? Any ortho would be able to tell you not only if it was a Jones Fracture but what grade while a doctor wouldn’t neccesarily…
What is critical about this is that only an ortho can determine if surgery is a better option but then again you say the fracture is clean and not displaced which makes you a better candidate for conventional healing.
Having said that, a Jones puts you in the minority for good healing and that is where things can get tricky because there is just not enough circulation to promote effective healing and that is where bone stimulators can make a crucial difference.
Ugh, snotty doctors just make me furious. No-one is more motivated to heal than a patient so why on earth do they behave as if they are the living end of health?
They also hate you if you are not paying a full fee, as if you don’t already pay your taxes and are absolutely entitled to their service! Many doctors are just bullies and with bullies the best thing is to be sharp and upfront with them. Tell them you intend to be as informed and responsible as possible for your own healing.
When my doctor snorted at my question about the usefulness of diet and supplements, I replied that I found his comment about being more worried about whether I smoked to be incredibly curious given that he was suggesting ingesting a toxin is harmful and yet ingesting good food cannot help! When he realised I was telling him I found his logic faulty, he backed off bigtime.
As regards healing, bone calcification won’t always show up on an x-ray for 3-6 months after a break so how much you’ve healed can only really be determined by how you feel ie how much weight you can bear and what sort of pain you are feeling. That is why a doctor cannot tell at what stage your healing is. That and the fact that bones take weeks if not months to heal anyway so you are in for the long haul – period.
Yes, some of us have been told to get walking while the fracture has clearly not healed and that is because weightbearing promotes calcification of bone. Again, you have to monitor your own pain level. Having said that, I gave myself 2 1/2 weeks of as much rest as possible before trying any weight on the boot.
This is what is soooo difficult, really, because pain is different for everyone and being in tune with your own healing requires you to focus hard on your own body – then again, you’ve got a lot of down time so if you were ever going to achieve this, this IS the time!
For me, any sharp pain is to be avoided while I expect to have an ache, prickly sensation etc. Also watch out for swelling which is a big indicator to back off and rest.
I have always been very healthy and paid great attention to my body and what I am feeling, after almost three weeks, is that healing is definately taking place because I WANT to put more weight down, I am getting those sensations, my swelling is gone and the colour of my foot is good, it doesn’t hurt to touch the break area and I want to wiggle things more.
What I have to watch is not pushing things, making real time for rest because I am lousy at relaxing. So I have decided to structure things properly – for everything I have to get done (whether it is meals, dishes, internet time), I get it done in a block and then make sure I rest through an entire episode or two of ‘The X-Files’ with my foot up!
As your break is not displaced, your advice sounds correct – begin trying some weightbearing immdeiately and back off when the pain becomes too much. Me, I am quite the wuss so I don’t push it and rely on my crutches to be able to vary the weight.
If you feel like seeing someone new, make sure that person is actually an ortho and preferably someone who is a foot specialist. You’ll only be even better informed by then so another opinion might be very good.
My ortho also felt a Physio wouldn’t be neccesary and I disagree strongly. Any accident such as this will have also disrupted surrounding tendons and ligaments and physiotherapy is incredibly helpful in getting those things back in shape uickly rather than relying on just walking to restore good function. Just a few sessions with a good physio enabled me to repair a Grade 2 tear to my other ankle in half the expected time! And thank God I did because this is the ankle now doing double duty because of the fracture on the other foot!
Good luck.
Em
November 24, 2008 at 7:03 pm
Thanks Em. Wow, sorry about your other foot! Hope you’re doing better.
The website says he’s board certified by the American Board of Orthopaedic Surgery, but his card only says MD. My other doctor has a M.D., P.A. (same thing I suppose)? I looked up Zone 2 and it said “Zone 2: Fracture of the proximal metaphyseal-diaphyseal junction, also called a Jones fracture. Results from adduction or inversion of the forefoot.” So it IS a Jones, then, right?
Since they didn’t give me an Rx for PT, I assume I just try putting weight nevertheless? Did you make your doctor give you a referral after he or she initially said you didn’t need one? Should I do the same? Since he said I could swim (how do you get in a pool???) or do the stationary, could that be considered PT?
And primary question at this point…how soon will I be able to walk with the boot without crutches or assistance? How long did it take all of you? And by extension, how long did it take all of you to take that horrible boot off and begin walking again as normal?
thanks, Isabel
November 25, 2008 at 4:56 pm
I just got back from my appointment…. it’s been nearly 11 weeks since my initial fracture. (I spent 6 weeks in a “wooden shoe”, was referred to a specialist, and then put in a Cam Boot 4 weeks ago.) My x-rays again showed complete non-union. Another 4 weeks in the boot and on crutches, completely non-weight bearing.
Here is my question. My insurance wouldn’t pay for the bone stimulator until 90 days in, which is in December, and the doctor still wants me start using it after my next appointment. I met an orthopedic PA at a friend’s house who talked about how they can go in and scrape the surface of your bones and secure them together with a plate to stimulate healing. I was wondering if the bone stimulator was the non-evasive way of doing the same thing??
I’ve read about how if your fracture separates too far, using a bone stimulator will not work. I wonder if he’s intent on keeping me non-wb to make sure my bones don’t separate any further apart than they already have??
He knows my active lifestyle and I’ve read stories that scare me about surgery and screw placement. I’m a walking city letter carrier, and my hobbies are hiking, running, and whitewater kayaking. I’ve had to fight really hard to keep a good attitude after 11 weeks on crutches — the callouses on my palms have actually started to crack and bleed.
I know the doctor is doing everything he can to avoid surgery, and I appreciate that…. but everybody here is familiar with how having a broken foot completely turns your life upside-down. Just knowing I can’t even start treatment with the bone stimulator until 2009 is so disheartening. I’m a single parent, and I know my daughter is just as anxious to get this over with as I am.
I hope everyone is doing well!
God Bless! :)
-Ginger
November 25, 2008 at 7:13 pm
Asking this because I plan to go back to work soon, but so worried about hurting myself again. I’ve tried some weight bearing and it is indeed painful. How long was everyone off work?
Thanks,
Isabel
November 25, 2008 at 9:23 pm
Isabel,
I work in academia as well. Being in grad school is perhaps the best moment for you to have this – as it is quite likely you can benefit from the possibility of reading and thinking carefully of what you do. If you have laboratory etc. work that will have to wait as it can be dangerous for you.
I was going crazy with numb toes after 2 weeks, but then I started massaging them twice a day, taking care not to move them laterally. I’m now in my third week of inactivity, and was shocked to notice that the calf of the injured leg has clearly started to wither away – it’s clearly thinner than the strong leg!
I also hated the crutches in the beginning – I have a pretty long walk from the train station to my home, and on the first day coming home. I really thought I would not make it! But you can not give up. I started going out every night, dragged by my BF, just to go around our block (it’s small). No matter how slow, taking 5 “steps” at a time and then resting somewhere.. and slowly I learned.
It is a sport where technique matters. In the end, you should have your center of mass moving forward smoothly, as horizontally as possible (no bouncing up and down), and time the placement of crutches on the ground so that they will not stop your momentum. It is a pain to learn – but think of the strong upper arms you will gain! (At least I am thinking of spring and sleeveless shirts!)
And you should not think that the bone broke because they were unusually weak – I have always drank a lot of milk and in a recent bone density measurement went off the scale (into the good direction), and still the bone broke very easily.
So, just take it slow. I have started to feel that for me this was a good thing, I was going off into several directions at once and stressed out to the max as the accident occurred. (I need to secure my next position and funding for that.) Now I’ve re-evaluated my options, discussed with many people (I would not have had time for this if I kept on flying high), and even though I am still hanging in the air as for the next career movement, I think I have much clearer image of the situation.
So, do not rush. First of all you want to have a strong and good foot to walk on for the rest of your life. My fracture is not a real Jones fracture, it is not displaced and so one of the best to have, and my doctor is talking about recovery times (no crutches) total of 8 weeks. I’m not expecting to be walking without limping for quite some time after that, but I’ll be just happy to be able to move around while carrying things in my hands – which will get me back into my lab work :)
November 26, 2008 at 4:09 pm
Isabel, yes I went back to the doctor and had to ask him why he had not referred me immediately to an orthopaedic surgeon which makes me mad because that is HIS job. I just hate it when doctors don’t give you a full explanation and diagnosis and reasons for why they consider a certain healing path or why other options are not being considered or recommended.
YOU are the injured person and the one who has to heal, they are just the consultants and you are paying them one way or another, whether directly or through taxes.
Gone are the days when doctors were Gods – we know they can’t know everything and that’s fine. People should be in charge of their own healing anyway!
My exciting news is that after just three weeks I am walking in the boot – not for long and not with full weight but without crutches and without producing much pain! YAAAY!
I’m therefore looking forward to being off the crutches within the 6 weeks and into some physio rehab earlier if I can manage it. I’m seeing my own doctor today.
I would say my fast recovery is due to staying right off the foot for as long as I could (2 1/2 weeks non weight bearing), keeping it up at rest, and taking the supplements I have.
I know for a fact that colloidal silica is one of the best things for connective tissue and I think that is why I’m not feeling too stiff and sore through the ankle too – silica definately helped me heal my other ankle in half the time expected.
I’ve also been taking Bromelain (a natural anti-inflammatory derived from pineapple hich you can get from eating it fresh), a Calcium preparation specially for osteoporosis (with Boron and Vit D for bone formation), Vit C and Magnesium.
Will let y’all know what my doctor thinks later!
Em
November 28, 2008 at 12:05 am
Just wanted to keep following up with my progress.
Had a three week x-ray doesn’t show any regrowth. But as it has been mentioned before you don’t see bone regrowth on an x-ray for weeks after it happens. But the radiograph shows it is not displaced.
The good news is when the doctor poked at the fracture there was no pain, so that is good because she expected it to be quite painful.
She still recommended I not weight bear for the full 6 weeks. Which is fine with me, even though lots of people on this board have started weight bear before the 6 weeks. So we’ll see how that goes….
One other thing she mentioned that may be of interest to people recovering is that Advil may be harmful for preliminary bone regrowth, so maybe use tylenol for pain killers.
The x-rays are here:
http://jennandlucas.blogspot.com/2008/11/different-kind-of-picture-week-3.html
Jenn
November 28, 2008 at 9:41 am
Ginger, you’re in a tough spot, with a job that involves so much walking. If you are under financial pressure to get back to work, that may effect your treatments decisions. (Any possibility you can be transferred to a desk job, temporarily?) But I also share the strong feeling that a more conservative, non surgical approach is a better option the long run – with the emphasis is on the “long”. You have to be both able and willing to make the time for the healing.
My break happened five months ago. I got onto a bone stimulator a month ago. The good news is that it is covered 100% by insurance, at least with Anthem. I also just got orthotic insets, that take the weight off the metatarsal, and got me off crutches and walking much more. You might ask your doc about that. If I’m on my feet all day, the broken one starts to get sore and I’m back on the crutches in the evening, but it was a HUGE relief to get off the crutches. I know all about those callouses. I was even gettting a lot of numbness in my hands and fingers.
I will be getting more xrays in early January. If there is no evidence of serious healing by then – 6 months in – then I’ll probably head to the operating room. But being able to walk more has made it all a lot more bearable – for me and my family!
Laurie
November 28, 2008 at 7:41 pm
Laurie – I’m sorry to hear your injury is not healing quickly, but intriqued by the orthotic inserts you were given – what are they called? Is this something you can only use after you go through the initial 6 weeks, then I would presuppose the 4-6 weeks with slight weight bearing with the cam walker boot?
Congrats Em on the improvements! Very exciting, happy news for all of us to hear! Truly, few people understand what this is like, so this is a great little community and nice that we can all cheer eachother on and share information like this.
That being said, how did you get your doctor to give you the referral for PT? Because I did ask after he didn’t, and the nurse or assistant said “He didn’t think it’s necessary.” Like, ok…Hmm…Swimming ok, staionary bike ok (they told me there’s no RX shoe for that, btw). Could this be a form of PT? Should I demand PT? And what generally is the duration of PT time, and the exercises completed. Is this there something I could do right now myself?
I have been putting more weight on my foot this weekend, and even massaging the foot to get the blood flowing. After a month of bad info – it was getting atrophied (sp), which I credit with causing some of the pain when I put weight on it. After massaging it (separate from the broken area, that is), it seems to be helping.
Planning to go back to work soon…would still like to know how long everyone was off work for comparisons sake…
Cheers,
Isabel : )
November 29, 2008 at 1:37 am
Hey Isabel,
I got the referral from the doctor for the ortho, not for the Physical Therapist (physiotherapist).
Here in Australia you don’t need a referral for a physio from a doctor. There are loads of sports injury clinics around where you can just make an appointment and see a Physio. I don’t understand why you would need a doctor’s referral unless you are wanting to see one on a government health system and need one?
My ortho also said there was no need for a PT and recommended loads of walking but I know from prior experience of rolling my other ankle which resulted in a Grade Two ligament tear, that I’ve likely done some tendon/ligament damage with this injury as well and it takes specific exercises to recover and strengthen the area. That is why I’m just going to see my physio privately when the boot comes off.
I don’t swim so I can’t comment on that but my physio did have me doing some light stationary bike riding when we were healing the other ankle.
I think the value of having PT is having them examine your ankle/foot properly to assess any damage and healing, check the stuts of your ligaments after being in a cast/boot for weeks, and show you the most effective exercises to get things in good shape.
Incidently, I had some pain after walking without crutches on Thursday but good rest on Friday has meant no pain today and again I’ve done some walking in the boot without crutches – YAY YAY YAY!.
The area around the break is still slightly swollen so I’m going to start icing it after walking and before I put it back in the boot to rest it. I’ve also massaged my calf and ankle plus lightly around the rest of the foot. I don’t like that numb feeling after I’ve had the foot up a long time – I don’t trust it as being a good thing at all. I also lay my hands on the foot to give it some Reiki healing.
Cheers,
Em
November 29, 2008 at 1:52 am
Isabel – when did you break your foot?
I have just completed my PT and this is what the PT had me doing. I had a lot of muscle wastage with quite a bit of ankle soreness and weakness resulting from six weeks of hard cast. I had to wear the cam walker for another 2.5 weeks.
Week 1/ Moving my ankle back/forth and in circles. Also gave me two rubber bands, one placed on the sole of my foot just under my toes while moving foot back and forth. 2nd band was tied to something that would not move and placed on the top of my foot again moving back and forth.
He also recommended walking in a hydrotherapy pool in shoulder height water. Most Hydro pools will have a ramp or some contraption to get you in/out of the water.
Week 2/ – all of the above plus knee to wall excercises, to begin with I could only have my foot less than 1cm from wall and bending my knee forward touch the wall. When I went back last week I can now do 8.5cm. I had surgery so my initial problem was the pulling on the site of the break, the muscles on the inner ankle also gave me some pain. Back to gym on bike.
Week 3 /All of the above plus calf raises and balancing on my bad leg. Can use the cross trainer at gym.
Week 5 / Pretty much okay but now doing calf raises on steps, I am doing this on two legs but with aim to strengthen my bad foot and then only use this foot.
Each week the PT would give the muscles in my calfs and ankle a full on massage, last week was quite painful. He also worked on freeing up my ankle and strapped my foot to help take the load off the outside of that foot which was very helpful.
With regard to work I only took two days off and then walking around with a cam walker. I should have got the hard cast and had six weeks off. When I eventually the Sx I quit my job to ensure I could fully focus on recovery. My ortho told me that his immediate action for this type of injury is a hard cast for six week completely NWB.
Part of the reason this break is so difficult to heal is that the tendon connected to the bone pulls the bone back each time you walk. This coupled with the bad circulation is the reason for slow healing. So if you have consistent pain after walking for a couple of weeks then I would be heading back to the doctor.
With regard to footwear my podiatrist recommended that I continue to wear running shoes because of the ankle support and with neutral cushioning. I ended up buying Asic Nimbus. They also gave me the okay to wear a pair of fairly flat boots which have a slight heal lift built in.
This fracture is so annoying but I think patience is the way to go – something I learnt the hard way.
Meg
November 29, 2008 at 4:47 am
Laurie:
Thank you so much for sharing… your words are very encouraging! :) It gets so easy sometimes for me to feel isolated as each set of x-rays shows ‘no progress’ and time slowly just slips by. It gives me such peace just to know I’m not walking alone in this lesson in humility and patience — and that there is still hope for healing this late in the game. I’m pulling for you that there is progress at your next appointment!
Also, thank you for the suggestion about the inserts — I will be sure to ask my doctor about them in 4 weeks when he orders the stimulator. I’m so glad you’re walking! It must be wonderful to have that freedom back again! :)
I’ve been back at work in the mornings for about 2 weeks now — I’m allowed to sit on a stool and case mail for around 4 hours each morning. I think I’ll be able to stretch out what leave I have left through the end of the year, and then I’ll have a fresh 4 weeks to draw from. Because my injury didn’t happen at work, they aren’t required to let me work at all. So I’ve been trying to remain grateful for the few hours I’m able to get.
Ginger :)
November 30, 2008 at 6:40 pm
Isabel, what I have is called custom orthotic insoles. They are basically pieces of hard foam molded to the contours of my foot, with a soft plastic layer on top. You put them into your shoes, like Dr. Scholls. My doctor recommended/prescribed them, and the physical therapist examined and measured my foot and made them. The section under the arch is padded 1/4″ higher than normal, with the effect of taking some of the pressure off the side of the foot when you walk. It feels weird at first, very lumpy, but you get used to it. You wear them on both sides so you don’t get “lopsided.” I do seem to be able walk longer in them, before the soreness sets in.
Might be worth asking about!
Laurie
December 1, 2008 at 2:52 am
Thanks Laurie, I will ask at my follow-up appointment.
I’ve been trying to do a bit of walking with the boot and my foot is aching. How can I be sure I am not damaging the injury? I’ll be doing this several times a day along with a bit of the exercises explained by Meg…just a little upset that it’s starting to hurt. PLUS, I can only really walk with this boot-cast if I’m holding onto this wheely-thing. If I maintain what I’m doing but never fully begin walking with the boot-cast, will this negatively affect healing or will I continue to heal until I can walk on my own two feet again, with any pair of normal shoes?
Confused about this…
Thanks,
Isabel
December 1, 2008 at 5:47 pm
Isabel, my foot is aching after walking too and while I’m a little worried I am assuming that the ache and throbbing is GOOD rather than bad. That is, that some healing is resulting. It makes sense to me that there would be ache while healing takes place, somehow…..
I’m alternating walking without the crutches with walking with them. I have no choice because my left hand is now in a brace due to the pressure of the crutch (I suffer from RSI and am disabled in both wrists! Lucky, eh?!).
I’m getting a second x-ray on Thursday because my own doctor (who only saw the original x-rays last week) told me I had actually broke the bone in THREE places – I wasn’t told that!! I was told I had one clear fracture and two hairline cracks but my doctor is convinced there are three breaks which is a shock.
He was very surprised I had already started walking with 3/4 weight on the foot which is why he has ordered the new x-rays. In the meantime I am alternating walking and resting and will have to see on Thursday what is going on.
I have a big gig on Dec 18 with my girl vocal trio (http://www.thesingingbelles.com)
so I need to be out of the boot and able to do some small dance steps by then!!! HA!
Cheers,
Em
December 1, 2008 at 8:26 pm
Em and Bella,
I have been walking/rolling thru with crutches and air cast for the last two weeks. I was not having really any pain until I started this. I shouldn’t say pain it is an ache. But the whole foot and ankle is achey. I saw the doc today and he now wants me to walk in the air cast for the next two weeks without the crutches.
I got home and tried this, man do I ache now. I will be elevating my foot with ice a little later on tonight. He said he will take another xray in two weeks and if I am doing okay without the crutches he would like to see my in some sort of shoe, he said whatever kind I can get on my foot with comfort. We will talk more about pt once I can get a shoe on, so about another 2-3 weeks before pt. Looks like it will be ‘09 before I get back to work. Well gotta go ice it now, talk soon
December 1, 2008 at 10:43 pm
I twisted my ankle and broke my 5th metatarsal on Nov. 6th. I’ve been told I have a Jones fracture and that no surgery in necessary. I’ve had stress fractures in the same spot in the previous two years. I’m a professional runner so the length of recovery and chance of re-fracture are very important to me.
Here are X-rays of my fracture
http://coldneck.wordpress.com/2008/12/01/574/
Would this be the type of fracture where surgery is a better option?
December 1, 2008 at 11:29 pm
Okay, I have a silly question. Has anyone heard of the IWalkFree hands-free crutch? I’ve been on crutches for 12 weeks this Friday, and won’t even start treatment with the bone stimulator until Jan. 2009. I’ve read that with the bone stimulator, I should expect another 2 more months on crutches at the very minimum if the stimulator works, and even longer if I end up having surgery anyway.
It seems like kind of a radical idea, but after reading blogs of people who’ve used it, I’m just crazy enough to toy with the idea…
Happy Holidays!
Ginger :)
December 2, 2008 at 8:28 am
Ginger,
I have not heard of such a device. I did look it up after reading your entry and it appears to be a great device if you have the ability to put pressure on your knee.
I too have been on crutches for 12 weeks with about 4-6 more to go. However, this is not good for me since in addition to foot surgery I cannot put weight on my foot without getting a sharp pain in my knee, nor can I kneel with that leg.
Considering the amount of time you have with recovery, if you can use your knee without pain, I would try it. Anything that helps with daily acitivities is huge. You will still have the crutches for back up.
Let us now if you try it and how you respond to it.
December 2, 2008 at 8:38 am
Em,
Good luck with the gig. I visited the web site and between the three of you there is quite a list of accomplishments. Don’t push those dance moves to hard, you don’t need a set back and your wrists don’t sound like they need anymore aggrivation. It must feel good to get out and perform. I don’t know which one is you but you all look like you enjoy what you are doing.
December 2, 2008 at 11:32 am
Margie, does your boot’s heel touch the ground? Because mine doesn’t, which is the true impediment to walking with the boot without crutches/assistance. It kinda rocks, it’s very big…wondering if any of you are having this problem and how you work with it? What happens is you remain non-weight bearing the duration of the healing period….do you still heal?
And wondering what usually happens after the 1st six weeks of non-weight bearing, then the 4-6 weeks of still wearing the boot being able to apply a bit of weight (judging how much by pain)…then the next follow up appointment? What should I expect?
I want to start running when I get this off…is that realistic? Not before the end of the year, I imagine.
And, getting depressed about the weight gain. How is everyone dealing with this? If you aren’t gaining, what are you doing?
thanks
Isabel
December 2, 2008 at 11:46 am
Bella,
My boot’s heel does not hit the ground and it is a bit like a rocking chair bottom.
This is meant for you to walk with or without crutches while not moving the entire foot as you would in a normal stride.
You will continue to heal by doing this, but pt will probably be required as you are not moving your ankle. Only your doctor can tell when and how much weight you should use. Running will depend on your recovery and the doc.
I have been walking only since yesturday without crutches and with cast, I had to finally take some anti-inflamatory, I could not take the discomfort any longer.
December 2, 2008 at 12:13 pm
Thanks, Margie. Are you wearing a shoe that balances the cast/boot a bit? I have tried walking without assistance and am having a hard time. A cane helps a bit, but I move as slow as a turtle. The doctor didn’t prescribe PT…wondering if I should just make an appointment myself? Would now be a good time??
December 2, 2008 at 3:42 pm
Bella,
I would check with doc on the pt. Ask him if you will need it and have him give you a prescription for it so your insurance will cover most of it.
I am wearing a sneaker. It does not match the height of the boot. It is a bit difficult to walk but I am getting by.
Having crutches for 12 weeks I welcome the change even though it is hard.
I did consider a cane, but I will keep trying and see what happens.
As far as the weight, I have lost 7 pounds since Labor Day. I just lowered my carbs. And I don’t buy any snacks as it is to easy to sit and eat. If you don’t have it in the house you can’t eat it.
December 3, 2008 at 11:25 am
I’ve found that the bootwalker is extremely uncomfortable to walk in. After three days of walking in it, after I had been given clearance, I began to experience severe throbbing and burning at the fracture. When I went to my new ortho (I wanted a second opinion) he said that means it’s much to early to begin weight-bearing. He also suggested it would be more comfortable to begin weight-bearing in running shoes because of the angle and support they offer. I’m off it for 2 more weeks and will be re-assessed at my next appt.
December 3, 2008 at 3:10 pm
Chris,
I am not having any throbbing or burning, which is good.
I agree the boot walker is very uncomfortable even when there is air in the chambers. I am able to get around okay without the crutches but by the middle of the day I need to rest with the ice packs.
My first thought when my ortho suggested trying sneakers in two weeks was to get a new pair since mine are old. But a second thought was to use the old ones since they are all broken in and comfy.
It will be interesting to see how I do with both legs at the same height since the boot is much higher than my sneaker.
December 3, 2008 at 4:05 pm
Margie and Chris – how far along are you two in the healing process? I’m at 7 weeks this week and though I can walk very slowly with crutches, meaning using my boot, it is hard. Wondering if the doctor told you any pros and cons of using a tennis shoe instead?
Also thinking of getting some running shoes to wear – here are the details…do they sound appropriate? I want to wear them for running as well when I’m healed up.
Thanks,
Isabel
“The ASICS® GEL-Nimbus™ X is a top-of-the-line cushioned running shoe featuring enhanced platform comfort and an upper construction that provides exceptional fit. The broad supportive platform is suitable for a range of runners from underpronators to moderate overpronators. Impact Guidance System (IGS®) linked componentry enhances the foot’s natural gait from heel strike to toe off. Solyte™ midsole offers improved cushioning and durability. Space Trusstic System® creates a pocket between the Trusstic System® device and the midsole, allowing for greater midsole deformation and more efficient foot function. Biomorphic Fit™ upper provides superior fit and function. Dynamic Cradle supports and guides the foot.”
December 3, 2008 at 4:17 pm
Hi Margie,
I’m the dark one – Meera! We do have heaps of fun on our gigs and I miss it but we have one on Dec 18 (hopefully!).
I see my doctor today and get new x-rays so after a week of some throbbing and aching I’m anxious to see what might be happening.
I’m interested to hear about walking in the boot not being recommended – I was told to start walking asap by my ortho who actually told me I could get out of the boot when I felt confident. I haven’t because it just seemed too soon but I’ll review that today if my doctor is happy about it (he seemed astonished I wasn’t in a full cast!).
Isabel – I have gained 3 kilos in the first three weeks (I lost the first week – weird) and started Atkins Induction on Monday because I just cannot afford a weight gain.
It hasn’t been easy but not at all awful. I’m sticking to fresh foods and going totally grain and sugar-free.
Cheers,
Em
December 3, 2008 at 7:13 pm
Bella,
My injury was Sept 6th. Not looking at a calander I would say I am in week 12 with several more to go. Keep in mind everyone heals different and I had three fractures, all displaced and one inverted. My ortho is taking is slow with me do to the fact the he does not want the hardware he put in my foot to move. As for as the sneakers I don’t run, and I buy what feels comfortable.
Em,
Now I did go back to the website and now I have a face with a name. All three of you are beautiful. I am walking still in the boot, which is difficult only do to the uneven heights between the boot and my sneaker. I am finding my gait is giving my hip a little trouble. I guess it is all part of the process of healing. What type of cast are you in? I was in a splint type thing for two weeks, once the stitches came out I was in a plaster cast for 7 weeks, then the air cast/boot. Hopefully I will be in a sneaker after the next visit on the 12th.
December 3, 2008 at 7:56 pm
In retrospect: I have had three opinions. First Dr. x-rayed, said it was a Jones Fx and recommended a Bone Stimulator. Second Dr. (same group of orthopedists)x-rayed a second time; says “it’s not a Jones Fx, You’ll be walking your dogs in three weeks”. Third Dr. reviews x-rays I brought in, took more of his own. Diagnoses it as a Butterfly Jones Fx with a torn ligament. He advised that the Bone Stimulator would not have worked. He recommended a cast or surgery; but the decision was mine; no pressure. The cast would not guarantee a solid healing. I opted for the surgery and today was my 7 day post-op exam. The Dr. said this Fx would have never healed on it’s own. I.e. the “conservative approach” would not have benefited me in the least. Stitches were removed today and I’m told to walk with the shoe boot to get the circulation moving in this area to promote further healing. There is minor swelling, mostly in the toes. My ankle is still very stiff too. I will have x-rays at my next appointment on 12/15/08. I feel so blessed as I had my church pray for me as well and I know this made a huge difference in my prognosis. In the end, each patient must be his/her own advocate. This site really helped me by providing useful information and influenced my decision to have surgery.
December 3, 2008 at 8:10 pm
Bella,
I’m 7 weeks post fracture, non-surgical treatment. My first ortho suggested I begin weight bearing at 5 weeks which turned out to be too early. My second ortho said he may possibly have said 6-7 weeks before weight bearing. But since I walked on it and caused significant pain he wants me to stay off it until my next appt which will put me at 9 weeks post fracture. Fortunately the pain in my fracture has almost entirely dissapeared and it isn’t tender when pressure is applied to the fracture site anymore which he said is a really good sign that it’s healing. He also said that because healing can’t be seen on an xray before 6-8 weeks, when it isn’t sensitive to pressure anymore it’s usually a good indicator that you may begin light weight bearing and PT. Hopefully I’ll be cleared to begin both on my next visit.
December 3, 2008 at 8:33 pm
Just to throw mine in the mix… 31 y/o female. Fracture was Sep. 12th, but I was not referred to an ortho by my GP until 7 weeks later after no healing. (No cam boot, no cast, nothing but a wooden shoe.)
I’m 5 weeks under the care of the specialist who put me in a cam boot, completely non weight bearing. Still broken with no healing as of a week ago. Next set of x-rays is Dec. 23rd at almost 15 weeks, after which I’m supposed to start with the bone stimulator.
I was going to ask… I know Laurie is using a bone stimulator. Is anyone else??
December 3, 2008 at 11:02 pm
I’ve gotten strong recommendations from others about getting a new doctor – third doctor if I do. The first was ridiculous – 5 minute appointment with PA’s scoffing at questions. The second, the doctor didn’t seem to know what a Jones fracture is and won’t give me a PT referral, plus he’s rude too. Should I try another and schedule it when my follow up is already scheduled for?
If so, what is the best way of going about finding a good doctor? Do I relay all the issues that I’ve had with the other doctors? My fear is they’ll think I’M the problem patient. Any suggestions?
Thanks,
Isabel
December 4, 2008 at 3:05 am
Isabel – my podiatrist recommended the Asic Nimbus as they have heaps of cushioning. They considered a neutral fit which allows a better distribution of weight across the foot. I have traditionally walked on the outside of my feet so this shoe has helped take the load off the fracture site. I got these last week, 12 weeks post Sx and have made a big difference when walking and at the gym.
With a tennis shoe I don’t think you will get the cushioning your foot requires. I took two pairs of shoes, in addition to my runners, to the Podiatrist, a pair of flat boots with a fair amount of cushioning and a pair of converse shoes. He basically told me I should not be wearing the converse because there was not enought cushioning. During the winter and before my surgery I was using a pair of hiking boots, scarpa’s which my ortho gave the okay to.
With regard to your doctor I would wait as you are only in week 7, and it can many more weaks to heal conservatively. I would, however, question our ortho why you cannot start physio. When I got out of my hard cast post sx it was my ankle that gave me the most pain. If able to do PT it might not have been as bad.
December 4, 2008 at 4:39 am
Hi all,
Well I got my new x-rays today at Week 4 and it shows the fractures are 50% healed! I am so thrilled and the doctor is surprised too. I can see the healing on the x-ray – the fractures are noticeably bonding!
He still wants me to be conservative ie stay in the boot for 2 more weeks while weightbearing/walking but I can take it off while resting and sleeping which will be HEAVEN!
Margie (thanks for the compliments!) and I’m in a boot with a lining which wraps around and fastens with velcro which slips into a hard sole and has two rigid sides around which I wrap three velcro strips to secure around my ankle and calf.
I’m also now massaging Comfrey cream into the foot. It is a naturopathic cream especially for bruises, fractures and sprains – also known as Knit Bone!!!
Bella, I have to ask why care whether a doctor thinks you are a problem patient? The future health of your foot is incredibly important and you’ve had lousy care so far. If you don’t actively seek better care, no-one else is going to do it for you. You have everything to lose by not being completely thorough and I would tell your next doctor exactly what you have been through. Just my 2 cents….:)
Em
December 4, 2008 at 4:30 pm
That’s absolutely true, Em. So I called my current doctor’s office asking if I could get a referral. They call me back with a message from the doc who said the only thing I could do now is stationary bike riding and swimming. That PT right now “would compromise my healing.” If needed, after our next appointment, PT may be an option. My follow up falls almost to the day – 2 months since my injury. Does this sound right?
And glad to hear the Asics seem good, Meg. I’m wondering if they should be custom fitted? I don’t know if I should get them now or after my next appointment? At this point, thinking of sticking with the doctor, but not 100% sure…
December 5, 2008 at 1:02 pm
Bella,
It sounds like you’re right on schedule. From everything I’ve read this fracture can take up to 25 weeks to heal conservatively. There really is nothing you can do but sit there and keep it immobile. Some people have said at 12 weeks without signs of union their ortho gave them the option of surgery. If you want it to heal without surgery it’s important not to move the foot too much because the Peroneus brevis tendon and the Plantar facia will continue to pull the fracture apart. Any type of PT will actuate those tissues and compromise healing. If you have access to a stationary bike it would be greatly beneficial as long as there is no resistence because it will increase movement in your lower leg and stimulate blood circulation.
And as far as the doctors go some of them are real jerks. My first ortho didn’t want to discuss anything with me so I found a second and he’s very open about my prognosis. My first even refused to show me my xrays because he said theres nothing to see. Shop around, I’m glad I did.
December 5, 2008 at 1:06 pm
Em,
What does the Fracture look like when there is signs of healing? My Fracture is still pretty translucent and from looking at it I would say its not healing at all (although my ortho says it’s looking goot). I’ve seen an xray online of what a completely healed jones looks like and let me tell you I’d give anything to see mine like that right now.
December 5, 2008 at 4:13 pm
Chris,
My doctor pointed out that on the new x-rays it is clear the fracture lines have ‘come together’ and there is some white fuzziness which indicates the onset of healing.
Whereas on the old (first) x-rays, the fracture lines are quite visible (although not displaced), they are almost impossible to see on the new x-rays – YAAAAY! There is some translucency on the worst fracture but it has still moved closer.
My doctor said it showed 50% healing which was very good indeed at just 4 weeks.
I am now allowed to take the boot off when at home resting and in bed although he still wants me on the boot if I am going out. Actually, I am walking around at home without the boot and with/without the crutches but I have a compression bandage on the foot.
The foot is sore but I am persisting as there is no strange pain, just aching or obvious discomfort at the fracture point and every day I feel the ankle loosen up and have a little more mobility.
I’ve got to say I am a firm believer in all the ‘little’ things I’ve done to help the healing:
diet
supplements
herbal cream
initial total rest
acceptance and positive thinking – you’ve got to laugh along the way and not lose your ability to find joy in your life!
YOur first orthopod sounds like a pig…
Cheers,
Em
December 5, 2008 at 5:04 pm
Hi All -
I am new to this website but not new to the Jones fracture. Amazing how you think you are in this alone but then you find dozens of people who know exactly what you are going through.
I sustained my Jones on June 30. It was an acute injury (running up stairs) and not displaced but with a decent gap between the bone pieces). Although my OS strongly reccommended surgery, I opted to go the conservative route. I am pleased with the progress but not sure I would chose the long road to recovery again (although I was only truly miserable for the first 10 (NWB) weeks. I am pretty sure I will be formally discharged at my next follow-up in 2 weeks. I’ve summarized a time-table of my treatment so far:
10 Weeks – Hard cast and 100% NWB
4 Weeks – Hard cast and WBAT using 2 crutches
2 Weeks – Aircast SP to FWB; wean off crutches
4 Weeks – Transition to running sneakers
3 Weeks – Stationary bike and cross-trainer – no real restrictions except running.
In the beginning, I was careful not to move around too much but did not pass up opportunities to go out. Was really good about the NWB even though it was hard for family memebers to understand exactly what this meant. I have a desk job and this is my left foot – so driving was never an issue. My husband was incredible and did everything around the house (2 teens were slightly less motivated to help). I changed my diet to the typical high calcium/vit D, protein, vegs/fruits – no sugar, caffeine, alcohol, red meat, carbonated beverages, etc. Lost about 30 pounds and I feel great.
I guess I am fortunate that I never experienced some of the pain/discomfort issues some of you are having once being cleared to ‘walk’. I did feel the pins and needles, pulling and tugging at first, but never could I classify this as pain or even discomfort. I just kept going and things seemed to progress nicely for me. I should add that until week 10, there was very little happening healing-wise per the xrays. Things really took off from weeks 11-14 when I began putting weight on it. My last visit 3 weeks ago, showed the bone darkening well and the fracture lines were barely visible. Dr. is very cautious and said he’d like to see me 1 more time. I can honestly say that sometimes I ‘forget’ my foot isn’t totally healed – it feels that good.
I sympathize with those of you who have had less than stellar experiences with your doctors. That’s really a tragedy. Lack of support from a professional is the last thing one needs in a situation like this.
Happy healing to everyone and I encourage any questions from anyone out there. I am sure you will all agree that walking is something never to be taken for granted again!
Joan
December 5, 2008 at 6:08 pm
Back again…..
Probably should mention that I am 50 and until the ‘big break’, was not paying all that much attention to my health. Could be this ordeal has been a blessing in disguise? Would have been hard to have thought that a few months ago, however.
As for physio – despite being immobilized for that long, my doctor said I would be fine without formal PT but would prescribe it if I wanted it. They gave me some links to a couple web sites for foot/ankle rehab telling me there was nothing different a PT would have me do. I would say that it took 6 weeks to gain back full mobility, balance and strength. The mobility part came back pretty quickly – I was really surprised. The balance and strength part took a bit longer. Initially, I could not even balance on my foot for more than 2 seconds. What helped with the flexibility is that I would do the stretching exercises in a bath of almost hot water. Did little things at my desk during the day as well. Never had stiffness or discomfort and I did not go crazy with repetitions.
I guess that’s all I have to say for now. Sorry to be so long-winded – just hoping to help someone get back to normalcy.
December 5, 2008 at 7:29 pm
Wow, it is great to find all of you people. I no longer feel so alone & frustrated with my Jones fracture. I fell 1 1/2 weeks ago, rolling my ankle in what I thought was just a horrific sprain. ER doctor didn’t catch the fracture – just told me my ankle wasn’t broken. Luckily, I had some pain in my foot & went to see my regular doctor, who xrayed my foot & found the Jones. I went to an ortho doc today, who said that surgery was up to me – he could be as aggressive as I want. We ended up going with a boot-cast & crutches & bone-growth stimulator, so I have a re-check in 6 weeks. I am frustrated in that I CAN’T keep all of my weight off my ankle. I live in a tri-level house, which I was stupid-enough to buy several years ago & now can’t get rid of due to the economy. I don’t even have a bathroom on the first floor, & live by myself to compound matters. I’m scared that this thing is never going to heal & considered surgery initially, but didn’t want to jump into something so drastic without some major thought. I thought I could rent a wheelchair for work, but that does me nearly no good in the house. Ugh. I just don’t know what to do. I thought about going to live in one of those efficiency apartments for a while, but that would be at least $800 a month plus the cost of boarding my dogs, on top of my mortgage. Am just very frustrated right now. I was ready to do my 8 week fracture time, & now realize this thing is going to last for months & months. Am now realizing this is going to be as much a mind-game in frustration as well as a physical challenge. Thanks for “listening”.
December 5, 2008 at 9:24 pm
Lee,
If your ortho recommends surgery I’d say do it. The average return time for an athlete is 7.5 weeks to full activity when treating this fracture operatively. You can imagine all the stress the feet get in athletes. From most studies that I’ve read you’d be walking on it in 4 weeks and running in 8. Surgery has so many benefits compared to the non-operative approach. I pressed for it early on but was assured that my fracture didn’t warrant it and it would heal quicker than a jones normally does because of the position it was in (I’m beginning to second guess this explanation and have since sought a second opinion). I’m now approaching 8 weeks and probably wont be walking on it for another 2-3. If I could go back to the day I was told I had a jones Fx and was given the option of surgery I can honestly say I would have had it, 100 percent. Your best bet is to discuss it with your ortho. Find out what classification it is and how much displacement, if any at all. Each classification can have a different prognosis that you should take into consideration when weighing your treatment options.
December 5, 2008 at 9:44 pm
Lee,
There’s nothing wrong with going up and down your stairs on your behind if that’s your best option. I have 2 sets of 12 stairs in my house and that’s how I coped.
Using crutches is not bad when you’re dealing with 4-5 stairs, but using them on a full flight can be downright dangerous. A good idea is to have someone spot you while you practice. All you need is some confidence and a little arm strength!
And Chris is right – unless you are willing to stretch this out 4-6 months, opt for the surgery.
Good luck.
December 6, 2008 at 12:26 am
Thanks for the comments, Chris & Joan. Are there any internet sites/studies that show what the long term effects of having a screw in your foot are? I’m just wondering if 20 years down the road, it may present some type of complication or “wear out” so to speak? I’d also like to know EXACTLY what the surgery is like – there are some people here who have mentioned it but I don’t have a great picture. Are you under anesthesia? How long post-surgery before back to even the slightest bit of weight-bearing? I would like every last gruesome detail, & have been searching the net but haven’t found a lot of great specific stuff. I’ve got down the part about the screw being inserted, but I want to know the rest – outpatient or inpatient? Those who have had surgery, would you do it again?
December 6, 2008 at 6:53 am
Lee:
I agree with everyone here that deciding between surgery or conservative treatment is a personal decision that is different for everyone based on lifestyle and availability. I chose conservative because of my activity level, but I’m already 3 months in will be on crutches until at least March… and if the bone stimulator is unsuccessful, will end up having surgery anyway. (I’ve already missed 2 whitewater kayaking trips and a ski trip to Utah.) At the same time, there are just as many stories like Em’s of people who are only 4 weeks in and already 50% healed!! :)
On this same site, there is another blog called ‘Jones Fracture: A case report with special emphasis on fixation placement’ that explains the surgery with pictures. (thefootblog.org/2006/11/07/jones-fracture-a-case-report-with-special-emphasis-on-fixation-placement/) I’m not sure if this is the typical surgery, but it explained a lot for me. It mentions it is an outpatient surgery and only requires NWB for another 4-6 weeks post op.
Welcome to the site! Everyone here has been a tremendous encouragement to me over the last 3 months. :) You’re not alone in that several of us also live alone or alone with kids, but the stairs thing sounds very frustrating. You’ve asked some great questions, and I look forward to hearing everyone’s responses.
Best Wishes,
Ginger
December 6, 2008 at 6:56 am
(thefootblog.org/2006/11/07/
jones-fracture-a-case-report-with-
special-emphasis-on-fixation-placement/)
I’d forgotten this site is a little touchy with web addresses. :)
December 6, 2008 at 4:27 pm
My doctor told me I could put weight on my foot until it hurts…yesterday I walked a bit with the crutches used just as a balance, actually walking a bit with my cast-boot, which was awesome…I didn’t walk too much – from the door to the car to the door type…then it hurt after, but not crazy pain. Should I proceed? How much can/should I try to walk like this? I don’t want to nix any healing by being over zealous. My appointment is around Christmas…hoping for some good news. Is there a way to predict what it might be? I’m assuming they’ll be another x-ray…this will be at about two months since the injury. Any guess of the news? I’m dying to know!!!
Isabel (excited a little bit) : )
December 7, 2008 at 9:24 am
Lee,
There is a tremendous amount of resources regarding this type of fracture on the internet. Most of my research has been on google books because it allows you preview medical texts. I’ve found most texts that specifically refer to jones fractures are sports medicine texts.
Regarding the surgery, from most case studies that I’ve found, some orthos recommend the screw be removed after union is acheived. The surgery is typically refered to as ORIF (open reduction and internal fixation) in which they insert a screw into the intramedullary canal of your bone that holds the fracture together while periosteal reaction takes place (the healing of the bone on its outer side). After full periosteal reaction occurs you can leave the screw in the bone or have it removed. For example, an athlete suffers a jones in pre season and wants to return to play asap so he has the ORIF and is back within 7 weeks. After the season is over the ortho may recommend removing the srew to allow endoseal reaction, which is healing of the inside of the bone. Not all doctors recommend this but I have read cases where docs have. One case study I read recommending screw removal stated that the bone would heal more thoroughly and it would reduce discomfort and complications caused by anatomical irregularities that accompany a small percentage of interal fixation procedures. Removal is usually followed by 1-2 weeks non-weightbearing (the equvilent of a sprained ankle treatment). In one study among NFL linemen who suffered this fracture and underwent ORIF, refracture had occured in a small percentage but was mostly attributed to the players size and activity level, and involved removing the first screw and replacing it with a larger one better suited for that size athlete. All had 100% successful union with no recurring fractures after the proper size screw was used. If 300lbs men can run around under that kind of stress with a screw in their foot, I would definitely trust I’d have no problem.
Bella,
When my first doc suggested I begin walking it was 4 weeks post Fx and in the first day I only experienced minor discomfort which I attributed to the weakened mucles in my foot, but within a few days of light walking the pain increased and I realized it was much too soon to bear weight. My second ortho said that pain is a good indicator of how much weight it can handle but if the fracture is still sensitive to pressure with your fingers that’s a better sign of whether or not to begin or continue walking. After being off it for a few days I noticed that I could place pressure on the fracture and the pain was beginning to subside. If you’re worried about being overzelous I’d err on the side of caution and take things gradually. But I know it’s easier said than done!!
December 7, 2008 at 12:10 pm
Bella,
You need to follow your instincts regarding the walking. I know all of us want to progress but understand the ramifications of pushing too hard. No one wants to regress in the healing process.
I was not cleared for any pressure on the foot until after the 10 week mark. The fact that you are able to bear weight in a little better than half of that time is great. I found that putting more weight on my heel made it easier at first as the pressure was not on the side of the foot. After getting used to that, I tried a more normal gait after a couple of days. I was instructed to continue with the 2 crutches during that period (weeks 11 thru 14). Maybe my healing was a little ahead of where yours is at this time as I did not experience pain or swelling – only the normal pulling/stretching discomforts.
Also, when I did more than my fair share of ‘walking’ in any one given day, I instinctively cut back the next day just to be cautious. If I had to guess, during this initial weight-bearing period (while still in a hard cast – which made it feel weird anyway), I was probably 40/60 non-wieght to weight bearing. Found that I ‘walked’ the most in the house, but when getting around at work or in a public place, it was quicker and more efficient to just ambulate on crutches.
Chris’ suggestion regarding the fracture site being sensitive to gentle pressure is probably a good indicator as well. I never had that luxury being in a cast but it does make sense.
Listen to your body and follow your own common sense would be my reccommendation. It’s a wonderful feeling to finally know you are on your way to getting your life back, isn’t it?
December 7, 2008 at 2:11 pm
Thanks for the info, Chris and Joan. Since no doctor actually told me the severity (except phase 2, something or other, need to check my notes), I’m wondering if 6 weeks is too soon to begin weight bearing? I had to take my pain medication for the first time in weeks yesterday after walking on it, so a bit worried now.
And just wondering if any of you take time off work during the healing? How long is normal?
December 7, 2008 at 4:02 pm
Not sure what’s normal, but I took 7 weeks off. That’s when the doctor finally agreed to sign the forms to let me go back as long as I stayed seated. (I’m a city letter carrier with a 9 mile walking route.)
I have a question to throw in the mix. I’m in week 12 (still non-union as of 2 weeks ago) and for the first time over the last couple days, I can actually feel exactly where the fracture is with the cam boot on. It’s not painful, I just feel it all the time now. I guess you could call it ‘discomfort’, but only from the perspective that mentally, I know what I’m feeling is a broken bone.
The hopeful part of me wants to think it’s finally starting to calcify, or that maybe because the swelling in my foot has finally started to subside, I’m able to feel it with the lack of fluid buildup. But the frustrated part of me wonders if I’ve accidentally displaced it or done more damage. (It was already 2 mm apart last visit) Has anyone else experienced this feeling or can anyone relate to it? Just curious. :)
I also wanted to thank everyone here for investing time in sharing. It’s so awesome to have such a wonderful resource with such friendly and open people!
December 7, 2008 at 4:19 pm
Ginger,
I just read all of your entries and have to commend you for your patience. To be at the 3 month mark and talking about 3 more NWB months you have a great disposition. Mentally, I told myself to give it 3 months – if there was no significant progress at that point, then I was all set to tell the OS to bring out the power tools. Fortunately, it turned out well for me.
I would not think you’ve further displaced it if you’ve been off of it this whole time. You mentioned the 2mm separation – was this the same as what it was initially? I kept thinking the same thing as I had a few crutching ‘mishaps’ during my initial 10 weeks. That was always the first thing I would ask the doctor. Answer was always a ‘no’ – which was good! I was able to feel the fracture in the bone at week 14 when my final cast was removed. I just figured this was normal and didn’t stress too much about it. Over the next few weeks, this too seemed to disappear. You may want to mention this to your doctor just to ease your mind on your next follow-up.
To answer Bella’s question regarding time off from work. My injury is to my left foot, so I never stopped driving/working. I have a desk job and would put a stool with a pillow on it to prop up my leg. My coworkers were supportive and would run any needed errands. The only challenge was the trip from the parking lot to the office. I work in a large facility and this was a workout but I just viewed it as needed exercise!
December 7, 2008 at 5:08 pm
Well I am itching to go back to work, but still need doctor’s approval. I think they just want me to be able to walk a bit better so not to damage it any further by falling at work since crutches and me don’t mix. I also can’t drive (it’s my right foot) and so was never given a handicap permit.
My doctors never told me anything about 2mm (etc) size of separation (this forum is great for noticing differences in care!). I was only told that it was getting darker, which indicated healing — my x-rays are posted, if anyone minds looking:
http://www.flickr.com/photos/67997958@N00/
To me the fracture doesn’t look huge, but I’m not sure what to compare it to. Does my foot look normal overall? This last x-ray was taken Oct 19th or so.
And Ginger, how can you feel fluid build-up and tell if it’s calcifying?
December 7, 2008 at 5:48 pm
Hi all,
I’m ‘walking’ with and without crutches now and my foot is definately uncomfortable but not wildly painful.
I was told by the ortho to get walking as soon as possible and work through the pain so I am trusting this.
My 4 week x-ray shows 50% healing on he bone so I’m very lucky.
Mr doctor wants me to stay in the boot while walking for the next 2 weeks (taking me to week 6) but around the house (resting) I can take it off.
In fact, I’ve been walking around the house with a compression bandage and a pair of Ecco slip-ons and going for crutches when I get tired. The foot still swells if I’ve been on it for a while. Should I be ice-ing it then?
It is very hard to rest, I did just that for the first 2 1/2 weeks but have had to do quite a bit in the past 2 weeks. Now my teachig year is over, I am hoping to rest some more but then I have gigs coming up too!
Best of luck to everyone and keep sharing!
Em
December 9, 2008 at 11:18 pm
Anyone get tested for osteoporosis after their fracture? My insurance won’t cover a bone density test because my age is too young for it, but I know that you can be younger than 60 and have it. Anyway, just wondering because I’m paranoid that this happened because of my diet cola consumption, which was way too much for too long before this happened.
And I realize I can’t walk much with my boot, hurts my foot too much. Kind of scared to damage it, especially since my doctor was so brief in explaining (as it were, relatively nothing)…I know some of you have mentioned that you were asked to walk too soon and damaged your foot. I want to avoid this, so any suggestions appreciated.
thanks all!
December 10, 2008 at 7:36 pm
Hi Bella,
I am walking in the boot with crutches to keep me steady whenever I have to go out now but I am out of the boot when at home and either walking in bare feet with a compression bandage or in a sturdy slipper.
My foot is aching a lot of the time now when it didn’t before but my second x-ray proved I was healing very fast so I am trying not to be concerned.
Walking on it will produce some kind of pain – period. It simply will not heal completely for months yet so you have to expect some reaction.
If you are worried about bone density, are you taking a good calcium supplement and eating plenty of leafy greens? That is your best bet. Also take colloidal Silica – did you see my earlier posts about this?
Also, if you are a diabetic woman please review your medication as they are now being implicated in lowering bone density!!! More women on this medication suffer fractures, which is just infuriating.
I had to go to town on the train and a bus yesterday and noticed the foot was quite swollen so had to rest for the rest of the day and ice it, which I normally don’t have to do. It was achey all night but I honestly think you have to expect that – any others think so too??
I would only be worried if you were having sharp pain at all. I am managing without pain medication but would take it if I needed!
I can’t comment on others who have harmed themselves by walking too soon, unfortunately. My fracture was never displaced and that might have something to do with it. But in all honesty, I think the rest you get in the early weeks and the diet you eat plays a HUGE part in ensuring your healing.
Having said that, I cannot comment on diet sodas!
Em
December 11, 2008 at 11:34 am
Good day to everyone,
I have been walking now for a week and a half with just the boot. At first it was difficult and uncomfortable, however, as the day press on I am finding it to just another step in the healing process and it is not as uncomfortable as it was last week.
I am still having trouble with putting the weight on my knee. I am hoping this is a result of the non weight bearing days and will get better as I move along.
I did get my doc to give me a script for ibuprofen 800mg to help with the aches, it does the job. Of course I still need to ice it due to the swelling.
Em, the discomfort you are feeling at night is your body telling you that you have done to much and to slow down. Those where my docs exact words. This will disappear over time. We all know it is hard to keep active people still.
December 11, 2008 at 4:44 pm
Thanks Margie,
You are right, I am an active person by nature and even with fast healing am probably tryng to push things.
It is hard this far on (5 weeks) because all the things you tried to put off come creeping back, don’t they? Like Christmas shopping! ARRRRGGGH!
I am trying to balance it so with every day that I have to go out and do something, I have a day’s rest. But then again, My ortho did say to weightbear as much as possible as long as I could handle the pain….
My foot hasn’t been aching as much at night these past few days but I am aware of it. It certainly doesn’t hurt to touch it at all but I am mortified to have developed Pompholyx on both my feet now (dishydrotic eczema) which my husband gets now and then but I have NEVER had!
I don’t know if it is because my feet are not being exposed to the sun for so long. Here in Sydney I am used to being in sunshine a good part of the year…it is sooo itchy and nothing seems to help. Also my doctor was remarkably dense about it, dismissing it as warts at first but my husband identified it instantly!
Then when it got worse, and I pointed out to my doctor it couldn’t be warts, he identified the same and said it would clear up off the one toe by itself! Two days later I have it all over my other heel, starting on my other big toe and showing up on a finger. I am furious!
Em
December 11, 2008 at 5:45 pm
Oh Em,
I would try to soak in epsom salt or an oatmeal soak. What type of doc did you show this to? I would seek a primary care or podiatrist, they might have a cream you can apply.
Christmas shopping was easy as usual for me, I do everything on the internet. No stores for me. If I don’t go to the store I can’t overspend. My pet peeve is wrapping. So I buy gift bags and holiday tissue. Done deal.
December 11, 2008 at 5:47 pm
Wow, Em, do you think it’s from the cast? I’ve had a icky problem with dry skin and specifically noticed last night on my injured foot’s pinky and toe next to it. It’s like my pinky is kind of “getting stuck” next to the other one. Is it bad to try to move them? I move most of the toes in my foot, but weary about those last two.
As far as calcium, I’m taking calcium+minerals high potency tablets. I’ll have some milk when I can and a small amount of soda for alertness (I’m weaning myself)…
By the way, anyone with the fracture on the driving foot – how soon did the doctor let you drive?
thanks,
Isabel
December 12, 2008 at 4:30 am
Isabel:
My fracture is driving foot. My Ortho said word-for-word at my first appointment… “You have two choices: Either go find an empty parking lot and learn to drive left footed, or get comfortable with the passenger seat.” Since I’m a single mom and live alone, I didn’t really have a choice — I’ve been driving left footed for 3 months today. I guess it’s not possible with a manual, but as awkward as it feels in the beginning, it gets much, much easier over time. I honestly don’t notice anymore.
I know this doesn’t exactly address your question about the time until a doctor will allow you to drive, but since I’m on an extended time-table, I won’t know for a few more months yet.
Best Wishes!!
Ginger :)
December 12, 2008 at 4:12 pm
Ooooh oatmeal soak? Actually, I found out a salt soak is good for it so have started that, went back to the doctor today and he was HORRIFIED. He says I have pressure sores from the boot (????) which he is very concerned about so no more boot for me from now on! Straight into a trainer.
He’s given me an anti-biotic cream for the sores and a stronger steroid cream for the eczema but if it doesn’t clear in 10 days, he’s taking a punch biopsy in case it is something else.
He also took a full blood and urine work-up to rule out any underlying blood infection or internal problem….you know, I am wondering if my entire system is sluggish because of lying around so much and there is a build-up of general waste in my body which isn’t shifting properly.
You are meant to move, movement stimulates all your sift tissue organs and promotes waste disposal and my colon has been really sluggish. The first thing to suffer is usually the skin as it is your largest breathing area and the body will try and discharge through the skin if other avenues are not working well….I can feel a series of colonics coming on! Wheelchair patients get them all the time.
Bella, move your toes! Don;t let anything atrophy. If it doesn’t hurt to move them, move them.
Cheers,
Em
December 13, 2008 at 3:16 pm
Has anyone’s doctor recommended a specific type of shoe to wear during recovery? (More than likely I’m staying with my second doctor, and I just know he won’t give me a great answer). Wanting a running and or walking shoe for exercise that I assume will need lots of stability and specific cushioning, but not sure about pronation – what it is, and how to tell…where to get fitted, etc.? What kind (and which – running or walking) are recommended for recovery?
I also want to get some work shoes with a bit of a wedge heel if possible (Dansko)- is this out of the question? Maybe some boots too. Being off my foot for almost two months I’m addicted to shoe shopping sites (Zappos is awesome!), but want to get something that I will be able to walk, run, and live in.
Btw, how soon do you think I can begin a actual exercise program? Walking+running?
thanks
Isabel
December 13, 2008 at 5:26 pm
Bella,
I have an appointment with my doc on Monday. He stated two weeks ago that he was going to take an x-ray and have me try to put my sneaker this week. I am not sure how that is going to go since my foot is still swollen I know it will not fit into any type of shoe. I am still walking with my air cast, no crutches. You doc will let you know when and how much exercise for you to do. I agree with Em, if you can move your toes than do so.
Em,
I how is the new issue with your foot coming along? Are the creams and soaks helping? Ew, colonics sounds horrible. Try a home laxative to see if that helps and increase fiber.
Ginger,
Way to go driving with your left foot. I am fortunate to have injured the left foot so driving is no issue. Like I said a few entries before, it is hard to keep active people quiet, especially when you have to take care of your family.
Later,
Margie
December 14, 2008 at 4:55 pm
Hello, I incurred a Jones Fracture on my left foot on 11/2. I was in plaster for four weeks and then had an Xray. Doc states that there was no healing which was normal??. He gave me a walking boot, but told me not to bear weight on it for two more weeks. After that wait a week and see if I can put on a gym shoe. My next appt is not until Jan!. Anyway tomorrow is the six weeks, and I am suppose to bear weight on it. I am nervous about doing it. I have onyl been to work about 6 days since the incident. Plus four weeks ago, I decided to jump up to a step on the crutches..very stupid. and I tore my good calf muscle. So I have been crawling around, now I can use the crutches with minimal pain. I don’t know how to go from no weight bearing to walking with the boot. I guess I will use the crutches. I can’t stand being locked in the house like this, I need to drive and get out! I just want to walk again. I find that I have a whole new perspective on what a disabled person goes through on a daily basis. I think it has humbled me.
December 14, 2008 at 8:39 pm
Colleen,
Nice hearing from you, sorry it is in this manner. When I was told to start weight bearing with my air cast, it is like a boot, I was instructed to use the crutches and roll thru the step placing most weight on the crutches. Little by little you can add more weight as you become comfortable with it. I would suggest not overdoing it, elevate and ice several times a day.
Being stuck in the house was hard at first, injured Labor Day Weekend, but you know it does humble you and I have truly taken a look at my life. It made me realize we are all doing to much and need to slow down and enjoy our families, read a book, and smell the coffee. That being said, life is good.
Making entries and knowing that you are not alone really helps, so keep posing.
Margie
December 14, 2008 at 11:57 pm
Colleen, I just started doing a bit of walking with my boot, I use my crutches most of the time though. I was told to walk until there is pain, and just a bit of walking gives me pain. Anyway, yes, I found that “rolling” or using the crutches but not really lifting your injured foot off the ground, more or less, putting most of the weight on the good leg, and dragging the injured foot. This has helped me learn, because without the crutches, I would have felt no balance. Doing it this way has enabled me to walk a bit without the crutches for the first time.
Everyone: Today though, I have noticed the pain is seemingly around the ankles — does this make sense???
I’m 8 weeks since injury, non displaced zone 2 fracture to the fifth. FYI.
And yes, this website was a god-send to me! So good that you found it! Good luck!
Isabel
December 15, 2008 at 1:38 am
Isabel,
The pain around your ankles does make sense, the muscles would have wasted during your nwb time. I had the same issue, the combination of the excercise and massage by the physio helped free up my ankle. Has you doctor given you a referal yet.
Meg
December 15, 2008 at 2:26 am
Hi Meg — Nope, no referral yet. I see him next week. The pain makes more sense in the way you explained it, but still worried about it. Should I massage around the ankle? I want to avoid surgery and long term damage, so this pain worries me. If I’m this far along, chances are I won’t need surgery, right? thanks Isabel
December 15, 2008 at 5:02 am
Welcome, Colleen! Thanks for sharing with us… I agree with Margie — this is such a great resource, and a wonderful place to connect with others who understand what you’re going through :)
–
I received some very tough news at work last week. As a city letter carrier, our station manager got ‘in trouble’ with district for the hours they’ve been giving me in the office. As of today, I’m only allowed to work 2 hours a day instead of the 6-8 I’ve been getting. Not because of doctor’s restrictions, but because of postal policy.
After 3 months completely NWB and still non-union, and possibly facing up to 3 more, this changes everything. I have enough leave to cover my paychecks until mid-February, but after that, I’m in the dark. My next appt. is Dec. 23rd, and I’m going to talk to my Ortho about surgery sooner if the bone stimulator isn’t showing promise.
This is one of those moments where conservative vs. surgical treatment clashes with necessity instead of future physical well-being. Up until this point, we’ve avoided surgery because of possible complications with screw placement — as a career carrier, I walk an average of 9 miles a day not including running, hiking, and martial arts.
We’re sorting through our options for the time being — possibly my daughter and I temporarily ‘abandoning’ our house and staying with a friend for awhile to combine resources. I’m confident we can make it through this just fine with careful planning, smart budgeting and generous friends and family. I see this as just one more lesson in this whole process of learning to be humble and appreciating those who struggle with these things as a norm. It’s funny, if given the chance to do all of this over again, the way my heart has been changed by losing the ability to walk for 6 months of my life has been priceless. This experience has strengthened every area of my life — from relationships and family to faith and financial responsibility.
I share this only in hopes that maybe my struggles may encourage someone. :) I know in the future, I’ll be dealing with the aspect of learning to walk again and rehabilitating my foot and ankle after so many months NWB — I really appreciate everyone’s input and stories. When I am able to start putting weight on my foot again (hopefully March), I’ve got a great idea of what to look for and expect.
I hope everyone is well, and I wish you all a blessed Holiday season as Christmas is fast approaching. I know each one of us has the opportunity to walk away from this experience as changed people, and I’m grateful to be able to share this with all of you.
Ginger :)
December 15, 2008 at 10:19 am
Bella,
I’m 8 weeks now as well and have been walking on it in a running shoe for a week now with only minor discomfort. I had a lot of pain and weakness in my ankle too but it will go away as you continue to strengthen your muscles and joints. Sounds like you’re well on your way to recovery.
December 15, 2008 at 11:58 am
Ginger,
Your last entry put a tear in my eye. I feel sad for you. Do you have any temporary disablility insurance? That is what has saved me financially.
I too have ankle pain after walking with boot for 4 weeks now. I did ask the doc and said it is due to muscle weakness and Chris stated. My ankle also swells to the point that it looks like I have no anlke. Elevating and ice along with a little massaging on my part seems to help.
I am now having trouble with the area under my toes. That is swelling as well. Along with becoming very sensitive when I take a step. I go for an x-ray today so I will address this with my doc.
Later,
Margie
December 15, 2008 at 6:47 pm
Margie- have you had physio, if not I recommend highly. My physio not only gave me exercises but massaged the areas I had trouble with immediate result. The massage itself killed but was definitely worth the pain, with the pt explaining that it encourages blood flow to the muscles.
To help with the swelling which my pt recommended voltaren gel which i rubbed on swollen areas and wrapped in plastic wrap when going to bed.
Bella – yes I would definitely start massaging and give the knee to wall exercises a go. Is your break healing?
Meg
December 15, 2008 at 7:00 pm
Hi all,
Just back from the doc. I am now allowed to walk in a hard bottom shoe while at home. If I go out I am to wear the boot.
I have strength exercises to do as well. I go back in three weeks and we will take it from there.
He said to walk in my shoes a little at a time and to ice and elevate at night since there is still swelling going on. He said the swelling will be happening for a while.
He does not have me released for work, that might be the end of Jan. At least I am beginning to see the light at the end of a long dark tunnel. I will just keep working on my foot exercises and enjoy the holidays with my family. For once I will not be rushing around like a nut. That is a great feeling.
Later,
Margie
December 15, 2008 at 7:03 pm
Meg,
Doc has not ordered pt as of today’s visit. He said I am doing fine with the exercises he gave me and to keep it up. I thought I would be going by now but he thinks otherwise. I am just working it out on my own.
Margie
December 15, 2008 at 7:07 pm
Hi Meg,
Hi Meg, thanks for the rec. I won’t know until next week about my break healing…I’m assuming they’ll do an x-ray – it’ll be at 8 weeks or so.
Chris , thanks for the info. Feels better to know the ankle pain is part of the equation and not a problem. Did you get an x-ray at 8 weeks? What did the doctor say?
December 16, 2008 at 12:19 pm
Margie — I wish I had been smart enough for temporary disability insurance. :) Life lessons. Everything will be fine. Just hoping my doctor is willing to abandon conservative treatment so I can go ahead with surgery and get back to work.
–
I wanted to share with everybody… I was having problems with numbness in my hands and shooting pains up my wrists and forearms after 13 weeks on crutches. My ortho’s nurse said the only thing they could do was refer me to a hand specialist, or I could rent one of those trike things.
So instead, I ordered new ergonomic grips for my crutches (robbinsgrips.com) and have been using them for a few days now. While they are definitely taking some getting used to, my hand numbness and pain seems to almost completely stopped. I want to spend a few weeks on them before I give them a ‘full review’, but in case anyone else was having hand problems, I wanted to share this alternative. :)
Ginger
December 16, 2008 at 1:45 pm
Ginger,
In my state it is mandatory for all employees to pay into temporary dis. insurance (tdi). We pay a very small amount from our pay for 12 weeks. It is wonderful to have. I work for a payroll company and most clients that are not in my state offer their employees to purchase short term dis ins on their own thru payroll deduction.
What a life saver. If it weren’t for that I would be foreclosing on my house. I get as much staying home as I would working.
I did not have any issues with my hands, arms, except in the beginning while getting used to using them.
Margie
December 16, 2008 at 9:56 pm
Is it normal for your ankle to kind of pop when moving it in little circles? It was aching after walking a bit and I took my cast-boot off and moved my ankle a bit and noticed, not necessarily “popping” but just the sensation. Of course I haven’t experienced this in almost two months, so it felt great, just want to make sure it’s not bad.
Any idea if it is?
thanks,
Isabel
December 17, 2008 at 7:34 am
Bella,
I’m getting my 8 week xray today. My ankle and my metatarsal-phalangial joints were really weak and painful and would sometimes pop like knuckles cracking when I walked or turned in certain ways, but when it happened it actually felt better. I’m still having a lot of soreness around the site of the fracture but I suspect its only the weak tendons because by mid morning it’s loosened up and virtually pain free. It only returns if I walk on it for extended periods of time. I’ll let you know how it goes.
December 17, 2008 at 3:31 pm
Thanks Chris for your response. Made me feel better about walking and not freaking out until next week’s appointment! :) Good luck with your appointment, I know we’re all collectively crossing our fingers for some good news!
Isabel
December 18, 2008 at 2:56 pm
Hi all,
I’ve been away dealing with weight issues on the Atkins site since I freaked out about the weight gain but I’m glad to say I’m losing like a wild thing now and really thrilled as I am Insulin Resistant so this is for my health too!
Wow, lots of posts and I should reply and update. I am now at the 6 week mark and walking completely without crutches and in an Adidas trainer which is actually a proper ‘walking/hiking’ shoe. Nicely constructed for this!
I do have discomfort and swelling, also at the ankle/base of the ankle and side of underfoot although the injury site isn’t painful at all to touch. I have to remind myself everyday not to push it and that I’ve been lucky….well, I am also a firm believer in the diet/supplement stuff too.
Margie, good to hear from you! The pompholx or dishydrotic eczema has been an absolute nightmare and the doctor only took it seriously when the lesions popped and threatened to become infected (ick) THEN he got quite frightened, prescribed both an anti-biotic cream and a steroid since it has spread all over both heels and my fingers and sent me for blood tests to rule out an underlying infection!
However, I noticed the steroid cream wasn’t heaving much effect and learned that these creams often just nuke the area and then it all comes back more ferociously so I did my own research and found a site recommending an oatmeal-based emollient cream, bathing the areas in an oil and using cotton gloves under rubber gloves to avoid detergents.
I’ve switched to Cetaphil soap bars and this is all helping now!
Ginger, I am so sorry for your circumstances. I didn’t have any insurances
either and lost a great deal of money from lost contracts – thank goodness my husband has good work but we are now, as a result, getting income protection insurance! I wish you well.
Colleen, welcome! We have all had to learn to be very patient but also to question, question, question so you will get great feedback on this site.
Bella, as I said I am now in a dedicated walking/light hiking shoe which seems to be perfect. I still have to remind myself not to walk too much which is very frustrating as beingou of the boot makes me ‘think’ I’m healed but then the swelling and aching tell me otherwise!
Meg, just a note of caution about using Voltaren. It is an anti-inflammatory and these are heavily implicated in interfering with bone healing. I was told by my doctor not to take any anti-inflammatories (or Aspirin) at all but that basic painkillers were fine. I guess that means the codeine type ones?
I am using comfrey cream on my ankle which is known also as Bone Knit! This has really helped with swelling and pain.
Cheers,
Em
December 18, 2008 at 3:58 pm
Hi Em,
Are you just doing Atkins? Nice for the weight loss. Good for you. How was your gig with the girls? Where you able to make it? Sorry to hear you are still struggling with the rashy thingy.
Margie
December 19, 2008 at 6:46 am
Hi Em,
My break has healed and the voltaren was for the swelling in my ankles. Had the bone not healed I would not have used an anti-inflammatory. This was recommended by my Physio and helped greatly to reduce the swelling.
Meg
December 19, 2008 at 9:02 am
Hi all,
Major winter storm hitting us today over til tomorrow. Snow falling at about 2 inches per hour at the height of the storm. We are expected to receive about a foot. I know this storm is right across the country, everyone be careful. I am going to run a couple of errands before it starts in a couple of hours, then I will be house bound for the weekend. Nice and warm, hot choco and hottub with my hubby. Actually looking forward to it. I start pt this morning and will report on that when I get back, it’s my first pt session. Yikes.
Later,
Margie
December 19, 2008 at 10:06 am
Margie -
You must live in my neck of the woods – Massachusetts. We are getting ready to spend time indoors as well. I’ve already set up my 2 teens’ boots by the door. No shoveling for me this winter (probably the only perk of this injury).
Stay warm!
December 19, 2008 at 2:16 pm
Joan,
I am in RI. Expecting a foot of snow, which I love. Everything is covered already. My step-son has landscaping business in summer and plows in winter. He will come and plow my driveway and clean the two stairs. He is so good that way. I have a car port so my car won’t need cleaning, not like I am going anywhere.
I went to my first pt session today. Oh la, la. I am icing now. All in all it was not that bad. I expected worse. I will go again on Monday. He put some kind of stimulation on to promote further bone fusion.
Later,
Margie
December 20, 2008 at 2:54 am
I walked more today and the ankle was pretty painful, not enough to stop completely, but enough to worry. How can I be sure that I will not damage the progress I made with NWB time off my feet? Does the pain of the ankle indicate any wearing or pulling/complicating of my heailng metatarsal?
Seeing the doc on Monday, but otherwise not sure how to proceed with my weekend. Are all of you who are walking around 8 weeks+ into the healing period walking ALL the time now? Or is it sometimes with mostly crutches, etc. etc.?
Thanks all!
Isabel
December 20, 2008 at 12:28 pm
hello all…
I’m definitely 8+ weeks – going on 5 months since the break! Almost 2 months since starting on the bone stimulator. Things are basically going well, with this conservative course I’ve followed. And yes, Bella, I’m walking all the time now, have been for the last month, though if I don’t get off my feet some during the day, my foot gets achy and tired by the evening.
I’d say it’s been just in the past couple weeks that my foot is really starting to feel normal again, to the point where I can put weight on it with real confidence, sometimes even forget that the problem is there! But I’m being very careful of avoiding situations where I could slip – like walking on ice, on uneven ground covered with snow, etc…I’m swimming several times a week, and am using an early Xmas present of a (used) exercise bike, since I won’t be doing any xc skiing or hiking this winter.
Will have new xrays done in mid January – even if healing is still partial, this state of affairs is not so bad. In terms of work, I’m a designer and spend much of my worktime on the computer, so restrictions on walking aren’t such an problem. I’m lucky in that – I keep thinking of Ginger, and her work that requires so much walking. Wonder if the p.o consider a temporary job share or swap?
I am, finally, seeing the light at the end of this tunnel…hang in there, everyone. Hope you all have a good, restful holiday!
Laurie
December 20, 2008 at 7:55 pm
Thanks for all of your comments. I do think this ihjury has made me more aware of certain things in my life that I have taked for granted! I started to bear weight on the foot on Monday and took it slow. I am still using the crutches, and I have minimal pain. Sometimes I feel that I can just get up and walk slowly without the crutches, and I have to short distances. Do those of you that have non union, were you weight bearing and in pain? I am nervous about this. I keep thinking that maybe its healing, but I don’t want to get my hopes up. There are many posts I read that just make me nervous. I wish you all well..Happy Holidays.
December 21, 2008 at 4:45 am
Thanks for the info Meg!
Bella, I eased into walking by starting with a light roll through the foot while on two crutches and then experimenting with just one crutch.
I am coming up to 7 weeks and I have to say I have a reasonable amount of discomfort, especially if I do too much which I get tempted to do. I get pain to the side of my ankle as well as at the end of the injury site.
I am taking a walk every day without a crutch or walking stick which might be a bit much but life is very full-on
right now.
I won my heat of the Sydney Cabaret Showcase and am singing in the finals tomorrow night. My hubby has the car all day and I have to use trains and buses to get to rehearsals and lessons which taxes me – cabs are too expensive in this economic climate :(
If the discomfort doesn;t ease, I’ll get another x-ray to check I haven’t done any damage but it seems very unlikely given that my 4 weeks x-ray showed 50% healing!
Has anyone else had this continuous discomfort despite healing – or maybe because of it??
Em- who looked hilarious on stage with the boot!
December 21, 2008 at 4:53 am
Check this out y’all!
http://www.foodandlife.com/healingbonesresearch.htm
Thought it sounded good!
BTW, it is hot here in Sydney so we’ll be having a barbeque for Xmas but I envy you the hot choc – only just! I LOVE the Atkins Diet. Dropped 3.5cm off my waist already!
Em
December 21, 2008 at 9:54 am
Em, Bella, Colleen, Laurie & Chris -
Great to hear that all of you are progressing and are able to walk to some degree. I know after being on crutches so long myself, that words cannot describe the initial joy which this brings. It’s amazing how one’s outlook brightens at this stage in recovery.
My advice to all of you is to keep pushing yourselves by doing a bit more each day but at the same time listening to your foot if you experience significant pain. I can’t say that I really babied it too much at first but I did know my limits. In fact, yesterday I shoveled snow, although I probably should have waited to get the clearance to resume all activities first before trying this. However, we were in day 2 of a major snowstorm, I was the only one home and had a family holiday event to attend. Pretty much did not have a choice. I wore by sturdy LL Bean boots, was careful not to pivot quickly on that foot and all went well. Very minor ankle swelling last night which I found odd as I had not experienced any kind of swelling prior to this. Good thing is that everything is back to normal this morning.
I am thinking that I will be discharged from my OS on Tuesday which will be 25 weeks and 1 day since my injury. I will let you all know how it goes.
December 22, 2008 at 3:21 am
Laurie:
Your message is encouraging… Thanks so much for checking in and updating us on your progress. I’m so excited for you and inspired by your patience!!! After 5 months, it must feel so rewarding to finally be returning to normal activity! Swimming and the exercise bike sound great — I really look forward to starting some kind of exercise.
It’s so sweet of you to remember me. :) The post office is very stingy about crossing crafts — and the work I was doing was given to two carriers in my section who slipped on the ice and broke misc. body parts on the job over the last 2 weeks. They recently offered me a few more hours on a temporary basis starting in January, but possibly only lasting a week or two.
I go back to the Dr. Tuesday, and I’m stuck in that place where I have two more days to decide whether or not to abandon conservative treatment after 3 1/2 months. Financially, I think it’s my best option to push for surgery, but to be honest, the idea of running whitewater, trail running and training capoeira with a screw in my foot absolutely terrifies me. (It’s a mental thing I think…) :) I’ll be sure and write some concerns down and talk to my doctor after the x-rays and see what he feels is best.
I look around me and can only be thankful, though — my family and friends have been so generous in making sure my needs are met. For some reason, Christmas parties this year have felt a little bit warmer and fuzzier than usual. :) This last week, I was able to road-trip 4 hours for a concert with my boyfriend and we were actually escorted to front row center because of my silly crutches and super-fashionable black boot. I’ve had complete strangers carry things for me while holiday shopping and it’s amazing how people who have been on crutches before will feel comfortable sharing stories and walking alongside me. Friends and I have joked about wrapping my cam-boot in a battery-powered string of Christmas lights or attacking it with a be-dazzler and silver paint. :)
I hope everyone has a wonderful week!!!.. I’ll check in again Tuesday after we make a decision about surgery. My mom put a card in my Subaru this weekend that says “The stuff that wears on your nerves polishes the soul” :)
Cheers!
Ginger
December 22, 2008 at 3:27 am
Just for fun and to make things more personal, here is the picture from our Christmas card this year. :)
(www.facebook.com/photo.php?pid=1710889&l=80dbb&id=507881928)
December 22, 2008 at 3:56 pm
I’m so glad to have found this blog–too bad I didn’t find it right after my injury. Fell off my horse, Jones fracture on the right foot. I was in a hard cast for 12 weeks, and have just moved to a walking boot and am trying to start bearing weight. I’ve been using a bone stimulator for 8 weeks now, and that seemed to have made a huge difference for me. It has been a little painful to try and walk without crutches, but one crutch is do-able. I’m wondering how do I know if I’m pushing too hard? Obviously it isn’t going to feel good to start bearing weight, but how do I know what level of pain is acceptable? This has been the most depressing injury I’ve ever had, and certainly not my first broken bone, but with it came the depression from not being active, not being able to drive, and honestly, you lose your foot, and you lose your two arms from having to be on crutches. Thanks everyone for sharing!
December 22, 2008 at 5:22 pm
Ginger,
The pic on facebook is so sweet. That has to be your daughter, looks just like you.
I agree with you that people are so nice when you have an injury. To bad people can’t be like this all the time.
Heather,
I am at about week 14, now walking with an air cast while out of the house and either bare footed or in sneaker while home. I did find it easier to walk with one crutch, it also allowed me to put a bit more weight on the foot. I have been with a bone stimulator only two times and that started this week. You can base if you are doing to much by the amount of pain at the end of the day and any swelling that might happen. I just elevate and ice at the end of the day, I find this helps. I was depressed about the injury back in
September, but finding this blog helps a lot.
As for getting out of the house, at least my injury is the left foot leaving me able to drive. I do remember reading from one person, can’t remember who it was, but her injury was to the right foot and she learned how to drive with her left foot. I give her a lot of credit.
We have to remember there are people out there worse than us. My dearest friend was in an accident in August and lost his leg above the knee. He is now learning to walk with a prostetic leg. When he first emailed me pictures of his therapy, I just said I will not complain any more, at least I will have both legs when I am done.
I will write again tomorrow, off to my daughters for dinner.
Later,
Margie
December 22, 2008 at 5:30 pm
Thanks Margie!
I did also learn how to drive with my left foot–I was really good with the hard cast, as I was told if I got in a car accident I wouldn’t be covered by insurance in a car accident, but I finally had to bite the bullet and start driving. I think it was one of those “I have to get out of the house now” moments that prompted learning.
Good points on evaluating what it feels like at the end of the day. I have a hard time knowing what is “normal” vs. not “normal,” and posing that question to the doctor left me with very obscure answers, if you could even call them answers. I’m hoping this blog will help lift my spirits :)
Sorry to hear about your friend–you are right, there are definitely people that have much harder things happen to them, and it is important to try and keep perspective vs. wallowing in self pity!
December 22, 2008 at 5:30 pm
:Breaking News:
The doctor told me my foot is totally healed. I don’t know whether to believe him or not. I did just recently (a week and a half ago or so) start walking a bit with the cast-boot. It is painful if I walk too much. Even my good foot gets tired, which I guess is the not being used to walking a lot overall and bad running shoes.
I broke my foot late Oct 24th-ish. Does this sound right? They gave me a copy of the x-ray, but didn’t show it to me at all in the office (it does show a darker, filled-in area where *I* believe to be the fracture (none of my world class doctors bothered to explain it to me!!!). All he did was move my foot in four directions to see how I responded. Everything was fine, he said, noting that physical therapy was my choice, but not necessary. He said I could walk as therapy but no running until another month.
I told him my ankle hurt if I walk too much, and distracted as always, murmured something about how it doesn’t seem like I sprain my ankle. Oh well. I tried pulling on the matching running shoe and it hurt to even try. What sort of shoes should I wear? When can I wear wedge heels again?
I am somewhat skeptical, but will resume my life as normal as possible. Does this sound right??? I’ll post a link in a while to my x-ray pics.
Thanks all…looking forward to the Foot Blog’s prognosis!!! You guys have been awesome!!!!!
: )
Isabel
December 22, 2008 at 6:02 pm
http://www.flickr.com/photos/67997958@N00/
photos
December 22, 2008 at 6:22 pm
Isabel:
My ankle hurts quite a bit too–feels like it is sprained almost. This is the first week I’ve been trying to walk, and my injury was on 9/20/08. The good foot though has been hurting for a long time–doesn’t matter what kind of shoes I wear, and I’ve even worried about getting stress fracture on that foot! Also, on the broken foot, I notice it feels like I’m walking on pins and needles in my heel–I guess the nerves are waking up again? Who knows, but hopefully you are healed and can just ease back into walking and the pain will start subsiding!
Heather
December 22, 2008 at 6:31 pm
Thanks Heather. Did the doctor say you are also healed up too?
Thanks,
Isabel
December 22, 2008 at 6:52 pm
No, my last appointment was December 5th, and after 6 weeks of the bone stimulator (11 weeks post-injury), I was at 60% for healing. He said I could start weight-bearing, so I’ve been trying to take it slowly. I was amazed at how my foot just flopped down after the cast was removed! I never imagined how weak it would be! I’m hoping that since I’m still using the bone stimulator (which now I use for 80 minutes a day instead of the prescribed 40 minutes), that my next visit on Jan. 16th will be more improvement, if not complete healing. All I can think about is how quickly I can get back on my horse, and whether or not it would be bad to ride around on my horse with a walking boot…that’s a joke…and if I did get on my horse I probably wouldn’t admit it to anyone!
December 22, 2008 at 7:25 pm
The pins and needles thing is something I’m very familiar with. Hearing that you guys have experienced it too makes me feel so much better. Since I’m at the point where my fracture has already calcified broken, I’ve started putting weight on my heel in the boot with crutches just to help with balance on the ice. (I’m sort of a lame duck passed the point of healing waiting on either the bone stimulator or surgery.) Since I’ve been putting weight on it, the pins and needles have GREATLY subsided over the last 2 weeks, and I can even feel my toes. Just thought I would share. :)
Margie, thank you!! :) Yes, that is my daughter — she’s 10.
Bella, thanks so much for posting your flickr gallery! I’d never thought to ask my doctor for copies of my x-rays — what a great idea! Are you a photographer or just a hobby? You are very, very talented, WOW!!! :)
December 22, 2008 at 11:47 pm
Thank you so much, Ginger! :) |It is a hobby, but would be a GREAT career to have (a dream actually, I take my camera everwhere I go)!!!
Spent some time walking tonight, the most ever, my foot aches. I’m not sure whether this is normal and if it will go away. Ginger you said two weeks later and the pain is gone…how much did you walk before this? (The shoe on my injured foot is tight, too). Not sure whether the doctor is right. Do I absolutely need physical therapy? I am massaging my foot and rolling my ankle, putting my feet up, and moving my toes in the meantime, in addition to the new and painful walking…With this in mind, does it seem as if I am walking too soon too much?
December 23, 2008 at 4:28 am
You’re very welcome!! I don’t have an eye for things like that, so I think it’s really amazing when people have a gift for it. :) I just love the vibrant colors and interesting textures and perspectives in your pictures.
I’m probably not the best resource in the “walking department”. Since my fracture was still 100% broken last appointment, I didn’t walk any before this, and I would guess I only put about 20% of my weight on my heel. After 3 months of NWB with no changes, I think I just got fed up with doing nothing and the “rigor mortis” feeling in my foot and ankle really scared me. :)
I know several of the other bloggers have reached (doctor approved) weight bearing stages of healing and have much more helpful input, and I’m hoping they will jump in….
December 23, 2008 at 8:16 pm
Hi Everyone, wanting to wish all of you a Merry Christmas! I had the pins and needles feeling too, I think its just from non use, I noticed it is getting better, now that I am bearing more weight on the foot, but still using the crutches. I use more of my heal when I am walking. I have an appointment on the 29th, this will be my 8 week check up. I have minor aches at the fracture site, but I am still not bearing all of my weight. The doctor told me at my last visit that if I wanted to try to wear my sneaker I could. I can’t imagine, my toes still look swollen, not as bad as when I broke. I hope its healing a bit, guess I will find out. Have a great holiday, your all in my thoughts. This injury SuckS!!!!
December 23, 2008 at 8:23 pm
Okay… I just got back from the Ortho. My injury date was Sep 12. As of 14 weeks, my foot is healed of all bruising and swelling but the fracture is still completely broken.
I was told the surgery my fracture requires involves bone grafts, plates and screws, and bone filing instead of just the normal screw-fixation and cannot be performed until March. It also requires 3 months NWB instead of the normal 6-8 weeks. Has anyone had this type of surgery?
I will start with the bone stimulator in January and just pray it shows promise before my March surgery date arrives.
December 24, 2008 at 9:40 am
Ginger,
First let me tell you what a great picture that is of you and your daughter – she is just beautiful.
I just read your last entry and if this were me, unless you really loved your OS, I would make an appt with another one. I cannot believe that he/she would be backlogged 3 months for surgery. By the time you are finished with NWB, 9 months will have passed. Really thinking this doesn’t make sense.
My Ortho office sees over 1300 patients a week (10 doctors) and there is never more than a 2 week wait for anything. You need to start some serious recovery and waiting 3 months doesn’t seem like it will help you.
If your foot is still completely broken, that should constitute some urgency with your OS. I did read that you had started to put some pressure on the foot – are you still doing this? At this point, I don’t see how it can hurt you if you can tolerate it.
I do wish you the best – I know you have concerns about the whole work issue as well. Enjoy the next few days with your daughter and family and I will keep my fingers crossed for you.
Joan
p.s. Was officially discharged from the OS yesterday after 25 weeks and 1 day – conservative treatment. It’s great to finally be healed and free of crutches, casts and boots. I wish this for all of you in 2009.
December 24, 2008 at 10:33 am
Joan:
Congratulations! I’m so hoping we can all get to the same place!
Ginger:
Wow, I have to agree with Joan–is there any way to find another opinion? I can’t imagine having to wait that long. I hope you can put it out of your mind though for the next few days and enjoy the holidays!
Heather
December 24, 2008 at 2:23 pm
Thanks so much!!! :) I’ve been considering getting a second opinion after the holidays — I will definitely now. I’ve heard great things from people who have had him perform their surgeries, and since he’s a foot and ankle specialist, I’ve been nervous about switching to a general orthopedic dr. He’s been pretty insistent about giving the bone stimulator a couple months before trying surgery, but I figured he knew best because he is also into the same extreme sports I am and knows my lifestyle.
Thanks so much for giving me a place to vent and share and for advice and encouragement! Merry Christmas everyone!!
Ginger
December 24, 2008 at 3:17 pm
Ginger -
I’ve been scurrying around all day getting ready for a house full of people tonite but still keep thinking about you. I hear you that your surgeon is supposed to be the best but still – way too long to wait. I also think that if people like David Beckham and Yao Ming can be successful professional athletss with a 3 inch screw in their foot, then people like us shouldn’t have to worry. Even if we are very active, there is no way we could ever put the constant stress on it in the way that these people do. This is not too uncommon a procedure – any competent orthopedic surgeon should be able to handle it without any major issues.
Someone made a comment about their good foot starting to hurt from overuse and was concerned about stress fractures. After about 12 weeks with the crutches, I experienced the same thing. In fact, one day it was so bad I really couldn’t even move. It did get a little better after a couple days of limited use and when I finally was able to walk with the crutches, I found that it did get somewhat better. Over time, the occasional aches have almost disappeared. Not sure if it’s my imagination, but the primary area of concern seems to be the jones area. I never mentioned this to my OS, as I think I deserve a break from all of this right now. I will definitely keep watch on it and if it does get significantly worse, I will suck it up and go back to the OS.
Joan
December 24, 2008 at 3:19 pm
Hi everyone! The doctor said I could begin walking (I had only been walking small distances around the house with the boot on), wearing regular shoes (far too painful), etc…which is very painful. At first, the ankle hurt. Now, it’s the top of the foot, which is like a weight almost it feels. If I’m barefoot, I can barely move my foot — it’s like I’m “scooting” or “stomping” my foot to walk. Is this normal?
The doctor said I didn’t need PT, but after a few days of this (3 days today), I think I will need to. Thing is, four weeks before this appointment, the doctor said I could begin bearing weight, which I really didn’t until maybe last week. Maybe I just prolonged this and now I’m fully walking on it as best I can, through pain, and it’s too much too soon. Thoughts?
And at what stage does one go to PT? Four weeks ago, he said it could compromise my healing. This week, he says it’s not necessary (walking would be it). Has anyone else had the doctor tell them this? (Is Chris still here?) But I can’t help but wonder if this pain would be a lot less if I had started PT already. Friday I’ll call to get an appointment, but in the meantime, want to make sure I’m not doing any damage???
Happy Christmas!!!
Isabel
December 26, 2008 at 4:57 pm
Happy Holidays -
Glad I came across this site.
I teach ballet part time and on 11/3 I landed a leap and my 5th and 4th metatarsals broke. The fracture in the 5th is a “true Jones fracture”. I was in a short leg fiberglass cast (nwb) from 11/4 until my last visit with my orth on 12/22. Per the ortho, the fracture isn’t healing and the gap in the fracture of the 5th metatarsal is actually wider than is was on the date of injury. I’m in a cam walker at the moment and was told to ease into weight bearing. I have a follow up appointment in four weeks to check for progress.
I scheduled an appointment with a different ortho for a second opinion.
Am I being impatient and unrealistic? It just seems that after 7 weeks if it’s not healing it should at least be staying the same, not getting worse.
Hope everyone is having a happy holiday season filled with healing.
December 29, 2008 at 9:14 am
Bella,
Glad to hear that you are ‘healed’ and are actively getting back into walking. My OS also told me that physio would not be necessary even abter being in a hard cast for 14 weeks and in a boot for a couple more. Can’t even tell you what a foot and leg look like after being encased for that long.
Basically, the all the muscles were pretty wasted and my leg was half the size of the other one (really). I was given a couple sheets of exercises which were pretty much what’s included on the links below. These got me back to form in about 6 weeks. Full mobility came back much quicker – about half of that time and the strength and balance part took the remainder. Funny but my true test of being back to normal was when I could go down stairs with the left foot feeling as good as the right one.
I did my own ‘icing’ and massage. Do I wish I had asked for physio in retrospect? Yes – I probably would have liked to experience a few sessions. OS said he’d have set me up if I had wanted this, but I felt I was making good progress and I did end up OK. Don’t even want to say – maybe next time!
Good luck with your progress and please keep us posted.
Joan
http://www.fairview.org/healthlibrary/content/sma_anklefrc_rex.htm
http://www.med.umich.edu/1libr/sma/sma_anklefrc_rex.htm
December 29, 2008 at 10:27 am
Joan:
Thanks for sharing on your good foot–I definitely am having problems with that one too, and I agree–it does seem to be over the jones area, so I’ve had nightmares about having no functional feet :). Good to hear that yours has subsided though–when someone else experiences similar issues, and those resolve, it makes me feel much less worried!
Hi Joanne:
These are tough injuries to heal from–I think if you read back through what Ginger has experienced, you’ll see that she has had a very similar experience with non-healing and increased width on the fracture site. A second opinion is probably warranted for sure. This has been the longest healing time I’ve ever had, and it is extremely frustrating. I went 12 weeks in a hard cast, 4 weeks non-healing, then I got a bone stimulator, and 6 weeks later it was 60% healed, and now I am in a walking boot, and only just now starting to put weight on it and walk without crutches. My ortho was very adamant that I should be completely NWB for the entire 12 weeks in the hard cast, so I find it interesting that some orthos want patients weight bearing so quickly.
Good luck to you!
Heather
December 29, 2008 at 3:20 pm
Wondering if anyone checks and adds to these posts who’s recovering? I am able to walk a bit now, but it hurts pretty bad if I walk too much and my foot swells up to where my ankles are barely visible. Elevating my legs helps, but this can’t be a mainstay. I can’t fit into my regular shoes on the recovering foot either – hurts like hell. Any thoughts?
December 29, 2008 at 5:24 pm
Hi all,
Sorry I haven’t been posting but been a bit busy with the Atkins/low carb sites!
To everyone who is new here:
1. Be patient. It takes 3-6 months for a fracture to heal anywhere near completely because of the process of calcification. This is also assuming your fracture is non-displaced, which can bring it’s own set of complicating issues.
2. See an orthopaedic surgeon if you have a true Jones Fracture. A doctor will not be able to advise you properly.
3. If your ortho isn’t up front with your x-rays, doesn’t explain things fully, is disrespectfully dismissive – fire them immediately and tell them why. See someone else immediately.
4. Sort out your own healing: lay off the red meat and caffeine, start taking colloidal silica for your connective tissue which WILL be damaged, take a specific calcium supplement (it should have boron, Vit K, Vit D – an osteoporosis one will have the right stuff), Vit C (1000mg for healing), MSM/Glucosamine/Chondroitin powder (for joint health). I am also rubbing Comfrey cream (a herbal preparation known as Knitbone) into the area three to four times a day to relieve swelling and pain. Bromelain is also a natural pain reliever and anti-inflammatory.
5. Know your injury – know whether you are displaced or not (the nature of the fracure, pieces etc) and what that might mean for you. Take notice of what hurts, where and when and make sure you ask the appropriate people if this seems right or not.
6. Be patient. I am repeating this because the worst thing you can do is stress and fret about getting better sooner – you cannot hurry a fracture and you should not either. This is your foot, your future ability to walk properly so limit the time feeling sorry for yourself to about a week and then accept your life has totally changed and go with it.
You have a chance to actually rest and that is much more than most people get so use the time wisely to realise what is fundamental in your life and reprioritise things.
7. Ask for help. You will absolutely need it – don’t even think about struggling. The people who love you will leap in, those who don’t will drift away.
8. Follow your doctor’s orders to the letter. If you trust the information you get, do it. If your ortho says try weightbearing, ask why and if you trust the answer, give it a go. Alternatively, if they say no way, ditto. Always know WHY.
9. Monitor your own recovery. Listen to your body and don;t push things just because YOU want to go faster. You will get all kinds of aches and pains and most will be due to the process of healing, a few may be because you’ve pushed things too far. Anything sharp, sudden, acute is not a good sign. Aching, pins and needles etc are usually healing and tiredness.
10. Incorporate rest. It sounds obvious but as you heal, you will be tempted to push your limits and this will drag out yourhealing process. You may feel better but for every period of activity, partake in a period of rest.
I will be at 8 weeks post injury tomorrow and I am walking pretty freely now, no walking stick! My fracture looked 50% healed at the 4-week xray but that was considered an exceptional result, and I started 50% weightbearing at 3 weeks in the boot.
I was 75% weightbearing in the boot by 5 weeks and out of the boot by 6 weeks and into a sturdy walking/hiking shoe.
At that stage I felt good enough to walk around the house in a stiff-sided slipper.
I noticed my foot had some achey pains at the injury site, some prickling sensations at times and some swelling after walking.
Now, at 8 weeks, I am back at the gym doing an upper body workout and then 10 minutes of stationary bike riding – I managed 20 minutes at a higher resistance just today!
Bella, you are doing too much and I am a bit alarmed at your doctor’s pronouncement that you are 100% healed. That is most misleading indeed! While you are just in the timeframe for the bone to be healed (3-6 months for a fracture), you have most certainly done some damage to the tendons/ligaments/ankle muscles in the accident and all this rest and lack of natural activity will have stiffened and weakened things considerably.
I would guess your ankle is swelling because of this and elevating MUST be a mainstay along with rest, compression and ice!
No way should you be trying to get into your regular shoes, let alone wedge heels!
You need to be working your ankle in a supported shoe – a trainer or specific walking shoe.
If I were you, I would get to a good physiotherapist and see what they say. Do not throw out your recovery routine just because your doctor says the fracture is healed, you still have to recover the total function of your foot and ankle joint which means paying attention to damage done other than to the bone. Just my 2 cents :)
Em
December 29, 2008 at 9:10 pm
Thanks, Em. Well, the doctor who said I was healed and could wear regular shoes and just walk for physical therapy seems like
an incompetent, gives better treatment to some but not all arrogant jerk (sorry to be so blatant!). In fact I met someone at work who knows the practice he is in and was shocked at his rec and the way I described my treatment. Now I wonder if I should even see another doctor before PT (with x-ray xerox in hand)? I’m waiting for my PT referral right now…thinking, if my doctor had shown me x-rays with details, I’d feel much better. I mean, I see a little crack still. I have the link below if anyone can tell me if it looks 100%.
http://www.flickr.com/photos/67997958@N00/
Does it look like it’s healed?
thanks,
Isabel
December 29, 2008 at 10:16 pm
Hi Everyone,
I just got back from my 8 week check. Having been in cast for four weeks and NWB in the boot for additional 2 weeks. The doctor does show the fracture line diminshing and fusing. I am in the walking boot, no crutches. He told me to wait one more week and then try wearing gym shoes. I have no real pain and the fracture site, more of aches. I am pretty excited with the results. I hope everything continues well.
December 30, 2008 at 5:57 am
Bella,
Looking at your photos it looks healed to me, that little dent is what I had at my last x-ray and my ortho says that will go in time. Looking at this in comparrison to early shots the fracture is almost 100% gone. My injury occured in Jan 08 but had surgery on 01/09, when I was advised that it really takes a good 3-4 months to completely heal. I played my first game of golf in 12 months yesterday and today the foot is not even sore.
Also at week 12 post SX I was still having pain so much so I thought it was still broken and was pretty depressed about it. When I mentioned this to my physio he taped my foot so I was not putting my whole load through the injury site when walking. This made a huge and immediate difference, after a few days of strapping I was fine.
For the swelling I would also get a compression stockingand ice the foot for 20 minutes at regular intervals. Like Em suggested I would give the wedges a miss for a while and get around in those asic nimbus’s.
Meg
December 31, 2008 at 2:33 pm
Heather,
I also am amazed at how many can put weight on their foot after only a few weeks. My case seemed very similar to yours – I was in hard cast 14 weeks – 10 of those completely NWB. I then progressed to PWB but still using 2 crutches for 4 weeks. Walking boot for 2 weeks came after that. My ortho was also very adamant about the NWB. In fact, he would flip my cast shoe over to see if it was dirty – I guess this is how they catch the cheaters – kind of funny really! I truly believe that this longer period of NWB was beneficial in that once I started bearing weight, I never experienced any pain or true discomfort.
Bella,
You were truly one of the lucky ones healing wise. Amazing how fast you healed. I also had that small dent on my last x-ray as well so this seems to be pretty typical. The only thing I was told was to take it slow with running or anything else that involves intense weight bearing. Could be that this dent needs to fill in more before one is considered totally back to pre-injury form. All I know is that I will take it easy on the treadmill and not do more than a couple of miles at a brisk walking pace – NO running for at least another month just to be sure!
Happy New Year to all of you and hopefully 2009 will be a better year for all of us feet health-wise!
Joan
December 31, 2008 at 2:53 pm
Okay… the doctor I was trying to schedule a second opinion with couldn’t even see me until a week before my surgery. So here is where I stand:
I am at 4 months since my injury. The med-rep is delivering the bone stimulator next week. My surgery (bone graft, plates and screws)is scheduled for Feb. 25th.
Here are pictures of my xrays last week:
http://www.facebook.com/photo.php?pid=1843252&l=cf92f&id=507881928
http://www.facebook.com/photo.php?pid=1843251&l=a6333&id=507881928
I started walking on my foot a little bit at a time with the boot and no crutches about a week ago after the news I couldn’t do any more damage. I don’t have any more swelling at this point and my foot has actually felt tons better after using it — I’ve gotten feeling back and lots of flexibility.
I am going on an 8 hour road trip tomorrow with my whitewater kayaking team just to get outside for awhile and be with some of my friends… I was originally going to try and paddle, but decided whitewater with a broken foot isn’t the brightest idea. :)
I hope everyone has a safe New Year!!!!
Ginger
(Also wondering… I know a few of us have had screw-placement surgery. Has anyone had this more involved one with the plates and bone graft?)
December 31, 2008 at 4:59 pm
Ginger:
Have fun on your road trip: and if you happen to slip and fall into a kayak and accidentally do a little paddling, have a great time :). I slipped and landed on top of a horse and accidentally rode around for 10 minutes or so last weekend…I just couldn’t help myself!
Heather
January 1, 2009 at 4:59 pm
Hi Everyone –
First, Happy New Year!!!
So I got my PT referral…and found out it is INSANELY EXPENSIVE (and I have insurance! Go figure). Pretty much about $150 for each visit at 3 visits a week for 4 weeks…I would meet my deductable near the end of sessions. So I am debating whether to go or just get the one visit with the at-home program. Has anyone done this? Are there any cons to this? Does anyone have a run-down of the complete at-home program?
And I am finding I cannot walk very long before my foot is aching for hours after. When will this end? (I am at about 11 weeks since the initial fracture, and doctor said it was healed). When will I be able to fit into my shoes again?
Looking forward to any responses here. This fracture thing sure is a long-haul.
Best,
Isabel
January 1, 2009 at 5:47 pm
Hi Bella,
Wow that is expensive, my session only cost AUD65 and I’m not insured! My PT was only weekly for about 3 session and then fortnightly. I would still go to one or two just to get the massage and some advise about what you should be doing to help with help with the pain. Also get them to taped your foot as you may be putting the load through your injury site.
I still had pain in my foot when walking for more than 12 weeks after my surgery but am fine now. Not wearing heals but it does get better, played 9 holes of golf this week and had no ache afterwards. One tip I could give is swimming helped loosen up my ankle area and I found walking was much easier after a few laps.
You will just need to be patient One tip I could give is swimming helped loosen up my ankle area and I found walking was much easier after a few laps.
One tip I could give is swimming helped loosen up my ankle area and I found walking was much easier after a few laps.
With regard to normal shoes, I think you need to be patient, your ankle and surrounding muscles need to be strong to support flimsier shoes. It does get better but its a slow process.
Meg
January 1, 2009 at 6:08 pm
Hi all,
I’ve managed to get back the gym finally this week and started with just 10 minutes on the bike but made it to 30 minutes with minimal aching this morning.
There’s no doubt that patience is everything, regardless of how fast any of us are healing it is obvious that we are still talking months before things feel remotely normal and months before any of us are going to be doing things anywhere near the same pace we did before let alone without achey consequences.
Ginger, things are so tough for you and I am so sorry. Isn’t it awful that life and commerce have combined to mean we can’t allow our fellow humans the break they need when they need it and support them through? I sometimes wonder which is the real jungle!
Bella, I’ve opted for now to do my own PT therapy but then again I know a few things from healing the other ankle and if I feel things are not right I will go back to my physio – also AUD65 a session like Meg!
Happy New Year to everyone and good healing!
Em
January 3, 2009 at 12:00 am
All -
I’ve made frequent visits to this site during my Jones fracture healing, and wanted to leave some notes on my experience.
It has taken almost an entire year to heal. First 2.5 months were an attempt at “conservative” treatment in a boot with very limited effect – inner part of bone healed up, but outer portion still had a crack & gap. Next 1.5 months using a bone stimulator, with not much if any healing.
Then surgery. Details blur together slightly by now, but a couple months after surgery I was walking in shoes. I will vouch that the first few steps in the boot & then shoes were painful, more because the entire ankle & foot area had been immobilized. But that subsided within a week.
The agonizing part of the recovery process was actually between 2-6 months after surgery. The x-rays looked good enough, with bone filling in the fracture though it was still apparent where the fracture used to be. I was ready to get back into sports, but especially 3-4 months after surgery my foot would still get sore from moderate walking, swimming & eventually biking. Had to back off a couple of times. I wasn’t completely sure if pain was from the fracture site, or from atrophy or irritation from the screw head.
Then at about the 6 month mark after surgery things finally improved quite a bit. Swimming & biking didn’t present any pain. And at the 7 month mark, I was able to walk continuously, then after that start jogging.
For those of you who have read the entire length of posts, good luck during recovery or trying to choose among treatment options.
January 3, 2009 at 1:33 pm
Hi everyone! I posted on this site quite some time ago….I’m now into 7 months with my right foot Jones Fracture. Finally had my ORIF surgery with screw placement yesterday. I am feeling pretty good especially since I had imagined the pain to be much worse. The tough part to me is not to able to walk around and do the things I normally to to take care of my family. I have a splint with a ton of gauze padding and bulky wrap…I return to the doctor on Jan. 15th. Seems to vary per person as to when the doc will let me weight bear on my right leg again, but I can’t wait for that day to come. I am so blessed to have the BEST husband in the world! He takes really good care of me…(and the fact that he’s an Emergency Room RN helps too)
This site has been a God send to me…Just reading all of your stories helps. Some of you have been through the ringer as myself. One thing I hope to learn from all this is to be a more patient person. This experience has forced me to become that way.
I will keep you posted as to my own recovery process…I have heard a lot of you talk about a bone stimulator to heal with..For those of you who have used one, do you feel like its helped a lot? My doctor didn’t give me one and I was wondering why..
January 4, 2009 at 12:53 pm
Does anyone in physical therapy stage feel like they need their pain meds more now than while during recovery? I’m waking up in pain now, with pain on the top of my foot and on the side of my ankles. Is this normal?
January 4, 2009 at 1:53 pm
Bella
I’m having the same pain. I’ve been sent back to work last week for 4 hours a day but it’s all on my feet so it’s beginning to really throb in the same spots you described. My doctor says the pain is normal and can linger for months.
January 4, 2009 at 3:04 pm
Christine, I’ve done two months now on the bone stimulator, 5+ months since the fracture. I am doing conservative treatment; so far no surgery. I’m using the CMF treatment – combined magnetic field; there are a few different models out there.
Seems to be going well. Hard to say, of course, how much effect the bone stimulator is having. But I’m am walking about in normal shoes, and only have soreness when I’m on my feet all day. I feel some of the same pains Bella mentions on the top of the foot and sides of the ankle, sometimes the odd worrisome clicks – I’m assuming that has to do with tendons slowly healing. Tendons are part of the challenge of healing from this injury, as they connect to the bone right at the end of the metatarsal.
Doctors seem to vary on how open they are to trying the bone stimulator; some are waiting for “conclusive” studies, which could be a long time coming. Be proactive and ask your doc his/her thoughts. My own feeling: if it doesn’t hurt, and could help, why not try it? It’s only a half hour treatment a day.
Like Bill, I’ve been swimming and riding the (stationary) bike, slowly increasing my walking. Looks like no xc skiing for me this year…unfortunate because I live in Maine!
I have an appointment with my ortho in about 2 weeks, will have xrays then. Hoping that healing will show up by then.
Happy new year…hang in there, all.
January 5, 2009 at 2:50 pm
Link to foot fracture rehab exercises, fyi:
http://sportsmedicine.upmc.com/InjuriesFootFractureRehab.htm#Rehab
Does this cover all bases? My foot is aching constantly now and it’s been about two weeks since the doctor cleared me — said I didn’t need PT, but going Wed. I honestly don’t know when I will be able to walk and jog for exercise with this pain. And because I can’t fit in most of my shoes, figure I should order Wide shoes from now on? Does this ever go away?
January 7, 2009 at 6:50 am
Christine -
Welcome back but sorry you have to be back on this site after so long. I backtracked and noticed your original post was on August 27 – what was going on with you between then and your surgery? I am hoping that you haven’t been totally off of your feet for that whole time. At least now you are probably about 6 weeks away from putting some kind of pressure on the foot again – which will be wonderful for you. Good luck with your recovery over the next few weeks and keep us updated.
Ginger -
You’ve been quiet – hope all is well. Please let us know how you are doing.
Joan
January 7, 2009 at 7:18 pm
Update: 11 weeks post fracture. Cleared 2 weeks ago to go back to work which consists of walking on cement floors all day and the pain is excruciating. Two weeks ago the pain was dissapating but since I’ve been walking on it as much as I do it is increasingly getting worse. Now the pain stays around all night usually into the next day. Maybe I shouldnt have gone back to work so soon. But I guess Dr’s know best.
January 7, 2009 at 10:44 pm
Hey again, all — and many thanks for the friendly inquiry, Joan!! :) I’m at 17 weeks post fracture and still 100% non-union. The long awaited bone stimulator is FINALLY being delivered tomorrow!!!! The stimulator has 7 weeks to show some progress before my next appointment just 2 days before I’m scheduled for surgery Feb 25th. (It would be an amazing miracle to be able to cancel my surgery.) :)
January 8, 2009 at 11:13 am
Chris,
Did you let your doctor know about this pain? I too am at about 11 weeks, cleared the same time as you to go back to work and find normal shoes are pretty unbearable. I’m still feeling pain with the walking boot, which I wear most of the time. I called the doctor and the nurse told me she had the same fracture and went through this pain period that lasted about 3-4 months, which I’m getting close to. She recommended a better pain med but also suggested a re-exam. Doctor said he’d give pain meds only after a CAT scan…which frankly, scares me. First, not sure if it’s needed or if this pain is still normal. The doctor never gave me what I would deem proper care to determine this. Second, it’s very expensive, and they and insurance won’t give me a dollar amount. So what to do? Is it normal or not?
I am unsure of going to PT until I know more because don’t want to damage anything further. I can stand without pain (and walk short amoounts), so I figure it’s not re-broken. Thoughts???
January 8, 2009 at 11:30 am
I should also add that when I walk with regular shoes, I’m more or less still limping and dragging the foot.
January 8, 2009 at 5:29 pm
Hi Bella,
Go to the phsyio and you may find the way you are walking is putting extra stress on the injured site. At around 10 weeks post surgery I was still have alot of pain and the PT taped my foot so I did not put all my weight through the injured site, it made all the difference. My PT took into account the pain I was having when giving me exercises, so I would not worry about that.
With regard to dragging your foot I to did this and againt he phsysio help to improve this.
Before I had the surgery I would wear leather Hiking boots, which I found gave me more support and did not hurt my foot. Bottom line is, however, is that your foot will hurt for some time as the bone is still repairing and this can take several months.
Meg
January 9, 2009 at 10:47 am
Thanks Meg for the information. So do any of you think the pain is normal enough to not warrant a CAT scan? I have been hearing the weather can make joints ache too. But I’d think after a Oct 21 injury date, being cleared as healed on Dec 23 that I would be feeling/doing better by now. Since deciding against the CT scan, I’ve scheduled my first PT next week…Do you think I’ve waited too long for physical therapy? Aside from minimal walking, (car to desk type), and moving my ankles in circles, elevating the foot…I’m not doing anything else. Is this my mistake???
January 9, 2009 at 6:13 pm
Hi Bella,
If you are still having pain I don’t think its too late to see a physio. They will assess the pain and probably give you specific exercises to strengthen the muscles. I would also discuss the taping of the foot as previously mentioned this helped alleviate the pain I had immediately.
January 10, 2009 at 8:38 pm
Hi all
This is the most informative site I have come across and I have a query which I believe you could help me with. My partner cockled over as he was going down the stairs a week ago, since then he has had a large lump at the base of his 5th met and a very sharp pain in the same area, he is also unable to walk on his foot at all. We paid a visit to the hospital and the Dr said there was no fracture but a large build up of blood and fluid with bruising. Do you think I am right to beleive he needs a second opinion as I would have thought that after a week, swelling and pain would be easing by now and he would be able to weightbear to some degree.
January 11, 2009 at 12:53 am
ABSOLUTELY!!!!!!!!!
You don’t say if there was an x-ray done?
Obviously, that is the definitive way of diagnosing but even small fractures/cracks can get missed.
No-one goes over their ankle without doing SOME damage to tendons and or ligaments so I would find it hard to believe he just has heavy bruising. Did he just stumble or completely roll over?
Being unable to walk is a pretty severe indication something is wrong – get to an orthopaedic surgeon asap.
To everyone else, just reporting that I am walking pretty normally now but not in my usual shoes – juts sandals and trainers. I have no worries rolling through the foot but there is still a residual ache at times and I certainly know if I overdo it and tire the foot. Also cannot handle any suddent turns or sharp movement yet.
Em
January 11, 2009 at 5:35 am
Bella,
I just made an appointment for Thursday. I’ve been walking 4 hours a day at work and doing my regular routines around the house (shoveling, snowblowing, loading the truck) and don’t find it to be weak at all, just really painful. And what concerns me is that the pain doesn’t go away after I stop the activity that’s causing it to increase. It will stick around and ache and, sometimes, burn. In the mornings it’s also almost unbearable trying to walk on it right out of bed. It takes a good 15 min to a half hour to get it worked in enough to walk around on it. I’m a little scared that I might have gone back to work too soon and put too much stress on the fracture because I wasn’t experiencing this type of pain when I was cleared.
January 11, 2009 at 7:42 am
Hi all
My partner did roll onto that part of his foot and yes he did have an x ray although the doctor said all he could see was a lot of blood and fluid over the 5th met where the lump is. The Dr told him to rest it and walk normally today but he is still unable to walk on it.He is not normally a drama queen lol so I do believe him, I’m just not sure the a&e Dr made the correct diagnosis and especially after reading your stories they are so similar to what he is experiencing now.
January 12, 2009 at 2:52 pm
Hi Sammy:
Two words: Second Opinion. Hopefully it is just bruising/fluid build up and will resolve quickly, but if a fracture is missed, your partner will lose ground by not moving forward on a good treatment plan (conservative or surgical), and this can certainly add to healing time. Four months after I got the Jones fracture, I’m all about “reducing healing time.”
Good luck!
Heather
January 12, 2009 at 4:32 pm
Chris, have you gone to physical therapy yet? I experience the same sensations – though not sure how to quantify a burning feeling. It definitely hurts and is alleviated with elevating my legs. I wonder when this will go away??? I see the PT tomorrow. Anything I should ask specifically? I plan on asking about orthotics and taping of the feet (as well as the “will I ever walk normally again and how soon” question).
January 12, 2009 at 5:38 pm
Oooh, Chris and Bella I am not having any of the same symptoms as you at all – I sympathise but I’d be tempted to get it checked.
I’m having slight ache only after walking on the treadmill for 30 mins, alternating incline now and no real pains at all. I’m still not doing any PT, although my Physio said to start, just because I don’t feel ready and the few times the foot has twisted, I’ve had sharper pain.
I’m barefoot at home and in sturdy sandals or Nike walking/hiking trainers otherwise – running shoe at gym.
Sammy – RUN, don’t walk, to an othropaedic surgeon. Don’t waste healing time, you’ve got the right advice here.
Em
January 12, 2009 at 6:18 pm
This is my first time here as I just discovered this site about 10 days ago. It’s a nice little support group for those of us unfortunate enough to be dealing with the Jones fracture.
Here’s my story:
About 10:30PM, Nov. 4 (Election night), I walked into my garage (like I have for the past 27 years) to put something into the other refrigerator. My left foot took a slight roll, I heard a pop, and I knew right away it was broken. I went in and iced for about a half hour. My husband was in the basement and I thought I would text him – but after that half hour I walked downstairs and said to him “I broke my foot” and he said “Yea, right.”
I decided to see how it felt in the morning. Well, it certainly did not feel great. So we drove over to the urgent care facility associated with our family practice group. They did an xray and the doctor told me it was a Jones fracture, explained what it was, put on a temporary splint, gave me crutches and made an appt. for me a few hours later at the Orthopedic Center. One of the foot doctors there looked at the xray and gave me the same diagnosis. But the doctor on call that day was the one to see me – he’s the hip and knee guy – so when he finally came in, he told me exactly the same thing. So I felt like I had 3 opinions in that one day. And they all gave me the same options – conservative treatment with a cast for 4 weeks followed by boot – or have a pin put in which they said would in the long run cut down on recovery time, and although it is a relatively simple surgery, it is still a surgery which could have it’s risks. They did explain that it’s in an area that gets little blood supply and that it is very hard to heal – they said 50/50. I decided to go conservative. I spent the next month in bed with my lovely purple cast – non weight bearing – crutches.
2 things I strongly urge anyone in this situation – invest in a shower chair – it made showering so much easier – and always wear sweats with pockets and a hoodie with front pouch pocket. I learned very quickly that you can’t carry anything when you use crutches.
I am fortunate that my husband is home during the day, so he basically waited on me hand and foot (haha). We even had to spend 3 days in a hotel as we were in the middle of having wood floors installed.
At 4 weeks time, I had another xray and it showed no healing. I figured the doctor would then be referring me to the foot doctor for the pin, but he said “It’s still early so you have 2 options – another cast or a boot.” I had gotten use to the cast, but he said if it was him, he’d do the boot. So that’s what I went with and scheduled my next visit for 5 weeks later – that was Jan 7. The next day I was scheduled to get on a plane and travel cross country to my daughter’s graduation – it was this past weekend – she earned her Doctorate in Physical Therapy and will spend the next year doing a specialized residency in Orthopedics (I had to brag a bit). I told the doctor no matter what the xray showed, I had to make this trip and he was fine with that – so now, after 9 weeks from the date of injury, the xray showed some new bone growth and healing. He told me to throw away the crutches, which I told him I would do right after our 4 days out of town. He told me to start walking in the boot which I have started to do – and it feels fine. Truthfully, other than when the bone broke, I have had no pain at all.
I have found the public, in general, to be very accommodating to those with handicaps – esp. at the airports.
I am fortunate in that the few hours a week I work in retail have been put on hold – I doubt I will go back as I don’t think standing for 5 hours/day will be in my best interests. I also have scoliosis so my back hurts all the time – this brings me to my question. I can definitely tell that walking in the boot throws me off balance even more than usual. Any suggestions for what kind of shoe to wear on my right foot that might match up with the level of the boot? I have spent the last 2 months in sweats since I can get the pant leg over the boot – so I have only worn an aerobic type shoe with a normal heel height. I thought I could do jeans inside of the boot and then wear my normal shoe with little chunky heel – but someone told me not to put pants inside the boot as it can cause pressure sores. So, any advice?
It was good to read all of your stories and I wish the best to everyone as you follow the road to good health!
Kathy
January 13, 2009 at 5:35 am
Bella,
No PT for me. Just moderate weight bearing at 8 weeks and progress to full. Before I went to work I could walk on it with only the feeling of slight weakness that I figured would go away as I continued to walk on it. But I think its the floors at my job. After two hours I have to sit down and massage it and the rest of the day is really difficult. I’m hoping that the pain is just my tendons being stressed too much because my Doc said the bone was healing really well and compared to the first xrays I could see that it looked much better. I’ll see on thursday but I guess I’m just going to have to bear with it till then. The ibuprofen isn’t cutting it so I’m not sure how much longer I can take.
January 13, 2009 at 12:07 pm
Hi Kathy:
I don’t have any problems with my jeans being inside my boot–I do that all the time–and then my work pants (I have to wear a suit a lot) goes on the outside of the boot. Also–I have found that if I wear at least an inch heel, sometimes up to 2 inches, then I walk better with the boot, and my “swagger” is a little less noticeable (which is good when I’m having to be in front of clients). I too had to travel–right after I broke my foot I had to start a new job that included lots of traveling–a couple of days every week–and had to deal with airports and crutches. Most people were accommodating, but I found that Southwest Airlines was BY FAR the best about helping me on/off and making sure I had a wheelchair when I had a connecting flight at a big airport. I could not crutch my way around larger airports very quickly. Anyhow, congrats on your daughter, and it sounds like you are healing quite well. I have my next appointment on Friday, and I am looking forward to seeing the x-ray. I’m mostly in my walking boot, but am back in the gym with tennis shoes, and I do stationary bike and have just started back on the cybex arc trainer (Asics Gel Nimbus shoes make a big difference on keeping the weight off the outside of my feet). Also am doing circuit training with the balance ball (mostly upper body weights and stability exercises). I also am back on my horse, wearing both riding boots, but am having a hard time getting the weight down on my right heel (right foot is the broken foot). Somehow I can’t convince my body to put weight on that side while I’m on a horse–but this will come. The other thing is I’m really having to work on flexibility in that ankle so I can get my heels down. Overall I think I’m on the right path after 4 months and am hoping the doctor visit on Friday shows that!
Thanks,
Heather
January 13, 2009 at 3:06 pm
Hey all!!! :) The doctor I sought a second opinion from agrees completely with my doctor’s plan of treatment after 4 months along. (I feel like I’m talking about a pregnancy…) I’ve been using the stimulator for almost a week, and my surgery is Feb. 25th.
I just wanted to chime in on the “fashion aspect” of cam boot wearing. I’ve been wearing mostly jeans — I roll them like this:
http://www.facebook.com/photo.php?pid=1886013&l=bc326&id=507881928
I realize this might not work for everyone, but I thought I would share. I hope you all are having a wonderful week!
Ginger :)
January 13, 2009 at 4:46 pm
Lovin’ the roll–we should all start our own fashion trend :)
January 13, 2009 at 4:51 pm
Em, how long ago did you break your fifth? I went today and the PT was nice, gave me two pages of exercises with bands and w/o bands – totaling seven exercises. They however, would not sell a at-home program, saying that coming back they could measure progress and diagnose. I figure this will mean a variety of exercises. BUT I want the at-home program too. I kind of feel like I can follow instructions and save some money and time. So another place will do an eval and sell the program, but they say the program is about two pages. Does anyone know how many exercises a complete program has? I don’t want to go to another place to get the same thing.
January 13, 2009 at 5:23 pm
Hi Heather – Thanks for all the info – and it just so happens that it was Southwest we flew on this past weekend from Colorado to Delaware. Good luck with your doctor visit on Friday.
Ginger – Thanks for sharing the photo and I think I will definitely give that a try. My younger daughter works in the fashion industry in NYC – I wonder what she and her colleagues would say about that!
Does anyone know how much Vitamin D to take in one day? I just finished a big bottle of Calcium + D and discovered another bottle of Calcium in my pantry but it does not contain the D. My multi-vitamin has 400 mg of D – I also take Boniva once a month for osteoporosis. So I wonder if I need to supplement with more D since this bottle of calcium does not have it included?
Thanks.
January 13, 2009 at 6:47 pm
Oops – we flew into Philadelphia and then drove to Delaware. Lots of walking at both airports and the wheelchair was a necessity. And I was surprised to find I was not the only one going on board with a boot and another with a broken arm.
January 14, 2009 at 5:10 pm
Kathy, check out my esrlier posts, I’ve given a rundown on the vitamins to take and any calcium sipplement should be for osteoporosis as they contain specific bone growth stuff like Vit K, Vit D and Boron so it looks like you’re covered! The body can only utilise 500mg of calcium at any one time so time your doses through the day.
Also be very wary of pressure sores – I got these and was in danger at one stage of septicaemia because they can get infected very easily. I had to have an anti-biotic cream!
Regardless of the height of anything on your other foot, you will have a ’swagger’ as you can’t roll through the foot in the boot. I guess the only way around this is to rely more on the crutches?
Bella, my break was Nov 5 and I’m now doing 30 mins everyday on the treadmill (incline included). I am starting on an at-home programme today which I got from my PT but he also treated me for my other ankle injury and knows I am a fast healer and he can trust me to follow things to the letter.
A PT who doesn’t know you is going to want to check your progress and that is fair enough as this is also their handiwork and reputation at stake!
Having said that, the PT isn’t rocket science either. I do the ankle rolls, the calf raises, the band work and when I feel ready I’ll work on the stability board at the gym and then graduate to the leaping onto one foot and trying to stay stable for ten seconds. The other exercise is to spring from one foot to the other across the room and back. I’m not ready for that!
Ginger, nice to have an update and good photo! I never had to bother with jeans as it is summer here.
Cheers,
Em
January 15, 2009 at 2:47 pm
hello again all –
Got some very good news at my ortho appt yesterday, when xrays showed the fracture has healed! You can barely even make out the site of the fracture. I am stunned; relief doesn’t even begin to cover it…it’s been almost 6 months since the initial fracture.
As a summary (just to add to the stewpot), here is the outline of my treatment:
1. Rolled ankle, got jones fracture July 27
2. On crutches for 6 weeks, NWB, but NO CAST
3. No sign of union in xrays @ 6, 10 weeks
4. Surgery scheduled for week 11, but I cancelled to pursue alternatives
4. At 14 weeks got fitted for ortho inserts to take weight off side of foot, and started bone stimulator.
5. Used bone stimulator for 10 weeks, did moderate walking in regular shoes w/ inserts
6. Full healing (union) @ 6 months – 24 weeks
I was, I guess, “aggressively conservative” (can there be such a thing?) – opting to avoid surgery even when two docs were pushing it. I tried to eat well, lots of calcium rich foods and supplements. I never had a cast of any type, which seems very different from the majority of treatments i’ve read about here.
This approach took time, but I would do it this way again. 6 months is a long time. Should say that I was lucky, as an artist and graphic designer, was able to do most of my work from a sitting position…so could afford the time off my feet. Literally.
This site has been a godsend, both for the information and (especially) the welcome sense of not being alone in emotionally struggling with this injury.
I send best wishes and healing thoughts out to all of you…just BE PATIENT!!!
Laurie
January 15, 2009 at 9:02 pm
Thanks Em for the advice. I will go to PT once a week but need to get adjusted to doing my foot exercises every day. One question for all of you – do you still have trouble putting on a regular shoe on your healing/healed foot? I still have to wear my giant boot/cast for job interviews because the other dress shoe will NOT fit! My healed foot is not that much different in appearance than my good foot. Is it the swelling???
January 15, 2009 at 10:12 pm
Bella:
I definitely can’t put a dress shoe on. I have two pairs of shoes that fit me: my tennis shoes and my riding boots. There is no way I could put a dress shoe on right now. When I look at my foot, it is obviously bigger than my good foot, but it doesn’t have the swollen, puffy appearance. My ankle remains swollen too–and by the end of the day–very swollen!
January 15, 2009 at 10:44 pm
Update on Jones Fracture sustained 10/20/08.
Total of three Dr. opinions. Dr. #1, diagnosed it as Jones Fx, recommended Bone Stimulator, Dr. #2 (for 2nd opinion, but from same Group), said it wasn’t a Jones and I’d be walking my dogs in 3 weeks. Dr. #3, from a totally different Orthopedic Group diagnosed it as a Jones Fx, Butterfly Fx (multilple Fx) with a torn ligament. He operated on it Nov 26, 2008 placing a 2 1/2 screw to fixate. He gave me a special shoe like cast and instructed me to walk right away. I guess this stimulates blood circulation which promotes bone growth. It is now Jan 15, 2009 and the swelling is going down slowly. I’ve been doing ankle rotations and stretching the calf tendons with isometric exercises. I went to a podiatrist for another foot issue and he x-rayed my foot and told me when the bone grows in that I can have the screw removed. I am taking a Strontium mineral supplement (250 mg) which stimulates bone growth in addition to Vit C, Nucleotides and Collagen supplements. All of these in addition to a high quality multiple vitamin packet. Things are looking up!
January 17, 2009 at 12:19 pm
Joan….Thanks for your response. Yeah, its been a very long process. Who would believe that one little fracture could cause so much trouble!
Well, I went to the doctor a couple days ago. They took the post op dressing off. The suture line was larger than I would have expected, but he told me that the method he was going to use on me required a larger incision line…Anyhoo, My 14 staples were removed too. The Doctor informed me that I could not weight bear for 6 more weeks, and he wanted to put a cast on, but I talked him into an immobilizer with a promise I won’t weight bear (perhaps he trusts me because I am a nurse? Wow, bad move on his part! LOL. just kidding) So, thats were I am at….To think, I aquired this Jones Fracture on June 7th!
Good luck to everyone on here…We all understand what you are going through!
January 17, 2009 at 5:27 pm
Christine – glad to hear that you are progressing in the right direction. I can’t even imagine being on crutches since June 7 – I guess 6 weeks more is not a major issue for you. Nice work convincing the doctor you wanted a boot? instead of a cast. Hopefully he gave you permission to take it off for sleeping and bathing at least for the latter part of the 6 weeks (or…maybe you will anyway!! ha ha).
There have been a few of you mentioning that your healed feet still cannot fit into shoes. Have you tried a flat, ballet type shoe? These are less supportive, I know, but if you are interviewing or making a presentation at work, they might do the trick (just make sure your sneakers are close by just in csse!) I found that they also seem a little wider as the toes are generally more rounded than most other types of shoe.
Here’s a totally random, crazy (but interesting) comment – Did any of you notice that while your broken foot was healing that your toenails didn’t grow much at all? I know – weird – but this never ceased to amaze me. Even now that I am healed, they are growing a little faster, but still not at the rate of those on the other foot.
Chris – are you still around? Just wondering how you are doing – sounded like you were having a bit of a tough time after going back to work.
To all who are still waiting to hear those glorious words ‘you are healed – cleared with no restrictions’ – just be PATIENT – you will eventually get there. I truly never thought I’d be ‘normal’ again. It did take 25 weeks, but now at almost 29 weeks, I am definitely back to form.
January 18, 2009 at 8:42 am
Christine:
Did you have plates put in instead of just a screw?? (That’s the surgery I’m scheduled for Feb. 25 and haven’t heard from anyone else who has had it.)
Ginger
January 19, 2009 at 2:57 pm
Joan:
Great observation on the toenails–and totally true for me too. Crazy…
I went to ortho on Friday and I’m at 80%, so they moved me into the “oh so glamorous orthopedic shoe.” Then my bone stimulator died, so I have to send that off for repair–hopefully I can get it back quickly so that I can keep that up–I really think it has made a huge difference for me. I am wondering how often others use it? I use it about 80 min/day.
Heather
January 19, 2009 at 8:54 pm
For a long time, I thought i was the only one out there battling this, and now I feel a lot better. Here is my story and some of my thoughts that should be helpful to those who play a lot of sports or who are very aggresive.
Before fracturing myself playing basketball, I used to exercise at two hours a day(1 and half hour gym and half hour basketball/swimming) so when doctor told me i need to be on crutches for six weeks(with a non-walking boot), I almost went crazy. Still went to the gym everyday, working on my upper body, doing a lot of crunches to make up for the lack of cardio so i can still maintain my imcoming six pack. I even tried to go out on the weekends with friends, with the boot off and crutches only. About seven weeks later, the doctor told me it was about 75% healed and I could wear regular shoes half of the time. I did so, and since i did not feel a lot of pain, I started playing some basketball(just shoot around)and squading with weights.
For the two weeks i tried that, I did not feel right and went back to the doctor, who told me that my foot stopped healing and i need to get back to the boot and crutches. So I did as what he told me and a month later it still did not heal completely, so it has been four months total and Im still on crutches. Now I have two options, either go conservative(using the bone stimulater while continue on crutches) or have the surgery, I felt lost once again……
I just want to point out few important details.
1. SInce the firs six weeks are crucial, try to take care of it the best, which means don’t put on ANY weight there. (Do the best you can. I thought working on the upper body in the gym or walking on it in the house dont hurt, it turned out that im wrong.
2. Be PATIENT. You are NOT Alone. I felt that my whole life is ruined but i was wrong. If i have shown a more positive attitude, i might be recovered already
3. Dont feel sad if your old jeans don’t fit anymore( my size 32 waist went up to 36, i think) Once your foot is healed completely, you can go back to the perfect size again, although it will take some work.
4. The Second most important tip. Arrange your time accordingly so you can, for example, read more books, do more hw, watch more TV(some useful stuff) spend more time with family to improve yourself.
5. Doctors are not always right. Do some research urself and become an expert, and Always believe that you can do it.
I felt a lot better after reading other ppl’ stories. It takes a long time to heal but instead of feeling sad, be more Happy:)
I wish everyone good luck and hopefully this will help you in some way.
January 19, 2009 at 8:56 pm
Oh i forgot to ask, does surgery really heal it completely? can conservative treatment do the same? I want to play competitive basketball again. I really DO
January 20, 2009 at 7:58 am
Frank,
I had surgery and the ortho who did mine has plenty of professional footballers running around with screws in their foot so yes it does heal.
January 20, 2009 at 1:00 pm
I use the stimulator (Exogen Ultrasound Bone Healing System) for 20 minutes a day. I know the research out on these things is new and every person may be hearing different news about them, but I will share with you how the med rep answered my questions. I’m not by any means saying he is correct, only passing it along. :)
I was told that research seems to show that using the stimulator at approximately the same time every day yields the best results. He said this is a good idea because the effects of each treatment last for approximately 24 hours.
When I asked if I could do multiple treatments in a day, he told me that research also shows that simulators are no more effective if you sit for 6 hours than the 20 minute treatment prescribed… Otherwise, it would be in both patients’ and the medical fields’ best interest that they increase treatment time to whatever is most effective.
The thing I wondered personally, as well, is if the bone needs significant down time away from the stimulator for growth to take place. Kind of the way muscles need down time to heal after they are torn?? I have no idea. LOL
At 4 months when I started the stimulator, I was 0% healed. Feb. 23rd is my next appointment after 7 weeks of treatments. If little to no progress, surgery Feb. 25th.
I hope everyone is well!!! :)
January 20, 2009 at 6:21 pm
I’m not alone! What a wonderful feeling! It has been great reading everyone’s experiences instead of a million and one medical journals online.
So let me tell you my story…
I went to sleep like normal on December 30th sometime in the night I woke up and my foot was asleep for some reason I thought getting up and walking around would be a good idea, until falling over. I heard the snap on the way down and still being asleep I didn’t really know what happened so I went back to bed (thank go for my foot being asleep still and not feeling any pain). I woke up in the morning and looked at my foot in its new swollen and technicolor state and knew it was broken. Off to the hospital I went. It was an in and out sort of deal. All I was told is that my foot was broken but not bad at all as the break was so hard to find, to wear my new Robo-Foot (Air Cast) and I would be fine. I asked for a follow up at the hospital and they said no. Since my family doctor is a good 30 minutes away and downtown I went to a walk in clinic two weeks later. The walk in doctor got my X-Ray report and came in to talk to me. Apparently I had a Jones Fracture all along and didn’t understand why the hospital just sent me home with no information. I had been walking with the Air Cast for the full two weeks! I am now waiting for an appointment with the Ortho Surgeon. Hopefully when that happens it’ll be good news but with I am doubtful since I was walking on my own from the day it broke.
I’m starting to go a bit crazy staying in all the time and feeling! As well I am feeling like I am becoming a burden of my friends and family. I hate this feeling! I know it will pass I am just getting a bit down.
I’ll update you all when I get an update myself :)
January 21, 2009 at 4:03 pm
Joan- Thanks for your reply…You are right whats 6 more weeks at this point! Doc did say I could take the boot off while showering and sleeping, so that is really nice! I really had to do some serious convincing though to get him to go along with the boot. Actually, it was more like whining…ha, ha!
I am glad you are back to your normal self! I didn’t even realize that my toenails weren’t growing on my fractured foot until you had mentioned that, but you are right…I haven’t had to trim my toenail on the affected foot at all..Thats weird!
Ginger- I had a long screw placed, but they also clamped the sides of the bone for support..I think that is the same thing as a plate. The doc told me that there were 2 procedures that he could do and he decided to do the one that involved a larger screw, clamps, and therefore, a larger incision line. I had 14 staples that he took out after 12 days post-op. I thought it was going to be a lot more painful than it actually was..Don’t get me wrong, it is very sore, but I had the worse images in my mind and it ended up being so much better..I wish you good luck…Let me know how you make out! Christine
January 21, 2009 at 7:28 pm
Hi all,
Just updating FYI….I’m now managing 30-35 minutes on the treadmill five mornings a week as well as an upper body weights workout.
I wore wedge heels for the first time last night (was sitting mostly, concert) but had little trouble. I still ‘feel’ the fracture and my ankle is definately stiff and the whole area looks ‘bigger’.
After putting off PT until I felt comfortable (had an irrational fear working the tendon would pull the fracture apart again) I’ve decided to start this weekend doing dedicated work on it.
I’m hoping to be dancing with The Belles again by the end of February!
Cheers,
Em
January 23, 2009 at 10:37 am
Hi :)
My 5th metatarsal is driving me CRAZY!!
I rolled my foot on Sept. 27 and fractured it at the base, not a Jones though.
I was told I could walk and bare weight as much as I wanted.
Mid November, fracture was about 1/2 healed and Dr. told me to stop wearing boot :) and come back in 2 months.
2 months later, fracture is worse!!
I can walk fine, but it hurts a bit…can’t walk very fast. My ankle hurts still and now my knee is a little out of wack. Dr. said because I am over compensating because of foot.
Dr. told me come back in 6 weeks and x ray again and if no healing is present….I, have to see the foot/anckle doctor.
He also said if it stopped hurting, even if the foot is still fractured, there wasn’t a need for surgery!
He didn’t even put me back in the boot or mention a bone stimulator.
Husband thinks I should blow off the 6 weeks and go and get the surgery. I have 2 4 year olds and a 7 year old….and I don’t want to be unable to get around this summer.
What to do?????
What to do?????
Actually, I’m scared of the “screw” :(
Fredda
January 23, 2009 at 5:21 pm
Fredda I would listen to your husband or at least go and see a orth surgeon. I would ask question such as the likelyhood of refracture without the surgery and then make your decision.
When I had my Jones fracture at about the 4 month mark some fibreous tissue had started to form around the fracture. My ortho told me that this happens often if the bone does not regenerate and that many people can function normally. However like you my I was not walking correctly (walking on the inside of my foot) and still having pain after walking short distances so my ortho recommended up having surgery. I am glad I had the surgery, the recovery period is appox 6-8 weeks and I wished I had done it earlier.
I would ask you doctor for the referral and see what the surgeon has to say.
Meg
January 24, 2009 at 1:42 pm
Thanks Meg,
Funny thing is I am seeing an orthopedist. I guess he doesn’t specialize in “feet” because he was going to send me down the hall to the foot specialist.
How long were you non-weight bearing? How long in a cast…did you even have to wear a cast?
Thanks,
Fredda
January 24, 2009 at 6:53 pm
Fredda I was in a nwb cast for six weeks and then a boot for two weeks walking with the aid of crutches. Had physio as soon as foot out of the cast which was a big help in getting back to normal walking.
January 25, 2009 at 8:48 pm
After a little over 2 weeks with the bone stimulator, we’ve noticed a definite bump at the fracture site. 30 more days until my pre-op appointment — we’re hoping and praying the bump is a callous and first signs of healing. :)
January 26, 2009 at 5:17 pm
Good luck Ginger–hopefully you are on the right track.
January 26, 2009 at 6:10 pm
Question!?!?!? I wrote earlier in the year (around July 20th or something) about my son’s surgery (inserting the screw) for the CF. He used a bone stimulator and lazer therapy for muscle generation and was released for football on October 6th. Now, three months after, and lots of practices and football games later, he was practicing for LaCrosse, and guess what? It broke again. Same spot. Has anyone heard of that happening? Doe anyone have history of what happens in that case? He has an appt for WED Jan 28 for a 3-D MRI. I feel so bad for him; not only did he miss half of the football season but will most likely have surgery again. I would welcome suggestions from anyone. Thanks!
January 29, 2009 at 9:35 pm
Today, I finally put on a shoe, and so far it feels great.
Update, experienced a jones fracture on 11/2, wore cast NWB for 4 weeks, No healing at 4 weeks, wore Boot NWB for additonal 2 weeks. Told to start bearing weight at 6 weeks, I waited to the 7th week. At 8 week check up, it showed that it was beginning to heal. Told to wear boot for just one more week and then put on a gym shoe. I waited and wore the boot until today, which is about 12 weeks. I was just nervous to take it off without me feeling comfortable enough that it was healing. I have an appt tomorrow for another xray. I know people were asking about the boot, I have no discomfort with wearing it without tucking anything in. And I read that if you put a sponge in your other shoe it will take some of the pressure of walking uneven. So I tried it and it actually made a huge difference, before that my back would kill me, but after I walked with the sponge in my good shoe, it took the pain away. I hope tomorrow brings good news. Good luck everyone!
January 30, 2009 at 10:12 pm
Colleen – My story has been very similar to yours – just 2 days later. My x ray at 4 weeks showed no healing – then at 8 weeks there was some healing taking place. Since then I have been walking in the boot and I have an appt. coming up next Thursday. The doctor told me that if it hasn’t gotten worse, he is taking me out of the boot. Hopefully it has not gotten worse, but I am really nervous about putting a shoe on. I know I will be going to the store to buy some Asics – the store I called has you walk on the treadmill before they make a recommendation for what would work best. How did your appt. go today? Good news, I hope!
Hope everyone has a good weekend.
Kathy
January 31, 2009 at 10:32 am
Hi Kathy,
I was released from the ortho! It still reflects a break,but it is healing and closing up. He told me to put the boot away and continue to wear gym shoes for about a month so I can build strength in that leg. He told me that a break can actually take 6-12 months to fully heal. I am not in any pain, it just feels weak. I thought it was odd that he told me i didn’t need to come back, but I am just going to continue to take precautions and move a bit slow until I feel confident in walking normal. Hope all goes well for you too, let me know. I will check back on the site.
Colleen
January 31, 2009 at 7:14 pm
Hi Colleen – Congratulations on the good news and on starting to get your life back. Boy, your doctor sounds exactly like mine- what part of the country are you in? I agree, take it slow and be cautious – and of course make sure you have a comfortable and supportive gym shoe.
Kathy
January 31, 2009 at 10:44 pm
Has anyone’s back start to hurt as a result of favoring one foot? My Jones fracture was operated on, a 2 1/2 screw inserted to stabalize it. I’m walking now, but my lower back hurts all of the time. I’ve never had back problems until this and I’m wondering if this is a cause-and-effect.
February 1, 2009 at 8:50 pm
Regarding back problems~~ I had my screw inserted June 23, 2008. And to this day, my lower back hurts/aches quite often. It never used to, but after walking weeks with a boot and relaying heavily on the stonger foot- I believe my back got out of alignment so to speak. I’ve be stretching and applying heat packs to keep my back from tightening up. But it still likes to get “nag” and hurt.
February 2, 2009 at 10:04 am
Hi:
I’ve had consistent back problems since moving into a walking boot. I think favoring the foot and having different heal heights across the boot and my other shoe, it has me walking strangely. I used to be pretty involved with Yoga, and I’m sure that would help, but it is hard to hold a pose with one good foot. I’m hoping that once I move out of the boot, it will subside.
February 2, 2009 at 4:22 pm
I’ve only been in the boot – and I have had back pain as well. I’m sure it will subside as soon as we are back all on two feet again. I think it’s just being out of natural alignment.
Also I have a small update… I am FINALLY after a month found a doctor that will take me for a follow up!! I’m very excited about this to finally get some answers!!
February 3, 2009 at 3:43 am
For the first three months, my fracture was healing really slow because I was at school. Basically I had to do everything myself( driving, grocery shopping, laundry, going to classes, working) But during winter break(5 weeks of doing nothing and being on crutches) it got better but still not 100%. Now Im back to school again and doctor told me to walk on a boot without crutches, I wonder if this is gonna get worse. I just don’t trust my doctor anymore. Should I just take the semester off and let it heal completely? Is it worthy it to sacrifice school. I know this is kinda personal decision but I really wish someone can give me some advice cuz the frustration is driving me crazy.
Thanks and hope everyone gets better.
February 3, 2009 at 10:38 am
Hi Frank:
I personally don’t think it is worth sacrificing school, but then I’m of the mind that school is the foremost priority. I would have a tendency to perhaps walk without the boot, but be very careful on activity level–I know going around school there is a lot of walking involved, and I’ve been in the same boat walking around airports, but pay attention to parking as close as you can–maybe you can get a temporary handicap permit, etc. This is the most frustrating injury I’ve ever had–and riding horses my whole life, I have had LOTS of injuries, but never anything that took this long to heal and was so emotional because it forced me to be reliant on others. Have you checked into a bone stimulator? That made all the difference for my healing, and FYI there are people that have them for sale on ebay. I use the Exogen, and it has gotten me to 80% healed after 4.5 months.
Sorry I don’t have any great advice.
Heather
February 3, 2009 at 12:55 pm
I just wanted to give some people a little hope. Everything I’ve read about Jones fractures have been negative. So far mine has been positive. (knock on wood) I suffered a Jones fracture Dec 3. I got the okay to start full running and basketball in two more weeks. My doctor yesterday said my foot was HEALED. (Feb 2.) That is 8 weeks and 5 days since break. I was in NWB for 4 weeks, walking cast 2.5 weeks, and walking boot 2 weeks. Hopefully everything continues to go smooth.
February 3, 2009 at 4:49 pm
Hi Frank
I wouldn’t drop out the semester, but you are going to need to decide what is best for you. I was faced with the same problem, what I choose to do was to take as many online courses I could so that I don’t fall behind at all. That way I could still move forward in school, while not over doing myself.
Best of luck :)
February 4, 2009 at 7:51 am
Just checking in. :) Hope everyone is having a great February so far! I’m at 5 months since the initial break. 26 days on the bone stimulator and still 21 days until my surgery. Just kinda biding time….
Ginger
February 4, 2009 at 10:23 pm
I’m four months since the break. Doc said it was healed last month, that this month I could be running. But it still hurts to walk a lot. Running? Don’t think so. Is this normal? I still can’t wear all my shoes – my foot won’t fit, for lack of a better term. Is this normal? I wore a different shoe today, a clog instead of my booties, and my foot paid the price in pain today. Normal???
February 5, 2009 at 12:36 pm
Hi Frank,
I was wb from day 1 and placed in a walking boot. (not a Jones, but fractured at the base)
6 weeks later my Dr. told me to discontinue wearing the boot. I was VERY HAPPY with those words! He said I was 1/2 way healed and to come back in 2 months.
2 months later, fracture is worse. I WISH I would of stayed in the stupid boot longer and I wouldn’t be worried about surgery right now.
Get a second opinion, if you feel uncomfortable!
My orthopedist wouldn’t even be the one to do the surgery on my foot, but he still wants me to “wait and see” another 4 weeks and see him AGAIN….. before I see the Dr. that would do the surgery.
Sorry to ramble, but my foot is driving my crazy too :)
Good luck to you,
Fredda
He said I could exercise, etc.
February 5, 2009 at 3:27 pm
Heather and Leah,
Thanks for the advice regarding my school situation. Im trying to make a decision but since school has already started last week, Im running out of time…None of the doctor thought I needed to take the semester off but none of them thought me being on crutches for four months was right. If I decide to have surgery, its gonna take at least another three months to have it healed completely, and I just don’t feel any energy or mentality to deal with school right now. Actually its not the school I fear but living on campus, which makes things much harder. I can’t afford to repeat the same mistake again so…….Im gonna see the doctor of our basketball team tonight and if he thinks surgery is necessary, I will do whatever if takes to make sure the foot heals this time.
Thanks again, and wish you all luck
February 5, 2009 at 4:14 pm
Bella, I’m having the same thing and thinking of getting another x-ray.
I’m back at the gym and avoiding the treadmill, just doing bike because I was getting too much of an ache from the foot.
I feel like I might be going backwards – lots of aching and some swelling. My injury was Nov 5 and the 4 week xray showed 50% healing so I would have thought by 3 months things would be better…..maybe I got too cocky and did too much too soon??
I’m going to go back for another xray formy own peace of mind, after reading some of the other posts here.
Em
February 5, 2009 at 6:43 pm
Frank, for what it’s worth, I had pretty good luck with the combination of walking on it, without crutches (but as little as possible, and resting a LOT) and using the bone stimulator for 3 months. I also got fitted for orthotic insoles to take the pressure off the metatarsal. At 6 months, the xrays showed almost complete healing. It feels pretty good now, just some minor aching when i’m on my feet all day.
Key seems to be to be GRADUAL about stressing that foot again. I plan to go easy for another 3 months or so, just to be sure. My ortho said this injury can take a year or more to fully heal, so looks like no running til fall. I feel for the sporty young kids who have to deal with this injury. I’d be urging them to use the time to do other things they’re interested in – play some music, get involved with theater or art…even if that’s not what they want to hear!
February 6, 2009 at 1:41 am
Today is 3 months from my break and yes, it is possible to get some good healing without surgery. I posted several weeks ago – in a nutshell, first month in a cast NWB and crutches. I was fortunate to be able to spend most of the month in bed. x ray at one month showed no healing, but not any worse. Then I went into an aircast, still using crutches and minimal weight bearing. 5 weeks later, the x ray showed some healing. The doctor told me to toss the crutches and start walking in the boot. So I did that for the last 4 weeks. I had another appt. today and when the doctor saw the x-ray he said it looks like a union. It’s not totally healed, but does look pretty good. He checked my foot – no swelling, no pain. He told me to slowly start to wean myself out of the boot in the house, then move to outdoors – to definitely wear the boot if it’s bad weather – he wants to see me mid-March for another x -ray and hopefully to release me.
My daughter just got her Doctorate in PT and is now doing an orthopedic residency. Ironically, she has been spending some of her days with a foot surgeon. She asked him if Jones fractures can heal on their own and he said that they can if you are very aggressive with it, meaning NWB. I know that’s what helped me – and remembering to take all my vitamins with some added calcium.
I hope my story gives hope to some of you. I am a 57 year old female with osteoporosis and scoliosis – never did I think I’d be in the percentage of those that healed without surgery.
February 6, 2009 at 2:03 pm
I’m getting kinda worried hearing all of the ‘pain after healing’ stories…. I have a 9.5 mile walking route over uneven territory, so I will most definitely be on my feet all day when cleared. (city letter carrier)
February 7, 2009 at 2:11 pm
hi ! like everyone here i too am confused over the line of treatment being followed on me…had a fall last saturday but by the time got to show the doc..few hours had passed as a reselt leading to massive swelling on both the feet.\after gettin an xray done being late saturday nite..and being reviewed by the er drs…was told to show an orthopaed the next day and being sunday did so without doing any movment at night.\the ortho suggested that i b on rest for 3 weeks with vistis only to the loo as the cuboid showed a light fracture which he wasnt certain off…rather had overruled it after consulting tow more drs. thereafter when i trvld back t my hometown there showed an orthodox orthopaed…he said that once the swelling comes down we will see and so it happened that yesterday morning he cast both my feet into a hard scotch cast right from the toes till 3 inches under the knees.
\and this is making me really uncomfortable and am woindering that in todays treatment lines who puts these..it s clostrophobic and irritating to haev it on both feet as one he saysnhas cuboid fracture n the other has an ankle ligament tear..so please advice me as to what is the other line of treatment i can follow as im back home in dubai now and wish to get it changed tomorrow to something more comfortable.
\please all experienced-advice.
\thanks
geetika
February 9, 2009 at 1:28 pm
Em,
Let us know what the x-ray says. A few weeks after I was cleared, experiencing pain and not being able to wear normal shoes the doctor recommended a CAT scan, which I declined. Now, more than a month later, still feeling pain – especially after daring to use shoes other than my Ugg boots – clogs and running shoes. I wonder now if I should reconsider. OR is it normal for a healing (rather healed?) foot to feel this pain when reintegrating different foot wear? They are by no means “bad shoes” – no spiky heels or high wedges. All rubber soles and good quality. Has anyone here experienced this with shoes and has anyone been referred to get a CAT scan? What would you do?
I’m trying to avoid an expensive scan. I didn’t go to PT at the referral of my doctor. I went to one appointment only and decided to do it at home, albeit not perfect.
Any recommendations are very welcome.
Thanks,
Bella
February 11, 2009 at 6:08 am
Hi Bella,
I’m confused myself. The foot suddenly feels a lot better and yesterday I spent much of the day in (sturdy and structured) heels for the first time – feels much more normal today and even looks better – it fit the shoes fine but they are a little large!
I still think I’ll get another x-ray and I’m keeping the treadmill to 15 mins maximum, doing the other 15 on a stationary bike and ankle rolls plus some stability work.
I’ll let you know what happens :)
Em
I feel the most ache under my heel or across the top of my foot near the ankle.
February 12, 2009 at 1:25 pm
Em and Bella,
I’ve had slight pain also. It is mostly on the outside/bottom of my foot just behind the break point. It seems to come and go. I was cleared to walk with normal shoe and told to start slowly walking 10 days later. I got a little aggressive and started jogging LIGHTLY for spurts of 1 to 2 min. at 6 days. I hope I didn’t hurt anything. I really wouldn’t call it pain. Its more of a discomfort. It doesn’t hurt to touch or move. It feels fine when there is no shoe on. I go back in 2 weeks for final check.
Tony
February 18, 2009 at 12:31 am
Hi – I’ve been walking about 10 days now without the boot. I am being real cautious and I still feel like I am walking with the boot on. A friend of mine ended up with 3 foot surgeries and her PT told her to concentrate on heel-flat-toe. Driving myself to the grocery and walking thru the aisles was a treat!
I did alot of shoe research and had no luck finding the Asics Foundation Walker -
and I don’t like ordering shoes online. So I went over to Famous Footwear where they have a good variety of brands. I ended up buying the Ryka Muse Country Walk – good stability, cushioning, very comfortable – and I love the colors of gray with a touch of blue and grape.
It’ll be nice when I can go to my closet and just grab any pair of shoes to wear – but I don’t see that anytime in the near future.
Hope everyone is progressing in their recovery.
February 18, 2009 at 9:48 am
Hello,
It is really interesting reading up on everyones different experiences with their Jones fracture. :) I broke mine about three weeks ago when I was just slightly hopping off the floor with bare feet and landed funny on my right foot and heard a loud crack..:( The doctor put me in a cast and I’m due to be x rayed again next week to see if its healing. If it isnt healing I have to have an operation, which really worries me as Ive never been in hospital before…!! I have a little question and would be so grateful if anyone could help me…When I first broke my foot I got the expected swelling and pain around the area but it is still really hurting and the thought of wiggling my baby toe makes me shiver!! Is this normal?! Did anyone else get this? Im worried its not healing!!
Anyways…I hope you are all recovering well and not getting too bored!! :)
February 18, 2009 at 3:20 pm
Z–
Yes, there was no toe movement for me for about 11 weeks.
I’ve been going around in a shoe and notice that my foot feels like it is burning. This can’t be good. Anyone else have this? I’m wondering if the bone has started re-absorbing and if I”m going backwards.
Thanks–
Heather
February 20, 2009 at 5:34 am
Hi Heather,
Thanks for your response!! :) I cant say I’ve noticed any burning sensation just the feeling of bruising and aches around the fracture area and under my foot!!
Can anyone tell me…
How long after surgery were you back up on your feet and ‘normal’ again…
If there is anyone who hasnt had surgey how long did you take to be back up and running again?!
I find out in a week whether or not Ive healed and if I’ll need surgery. Its worrying me quite a lot cos Im a student nurse and I just cant take this much time off!! :( I hope I dont get put back a year!!
It happened a month ago and Im going completly crazy…so hopefully its not much longer….?!?!
Lots of Love xxx
February 20, 2009 at 9:41 am
Hi Zoe:
My break was Sept. 19, 2008, and I have not had surgery. At my last visit, I was just at 80% healed, and I go back in today for more x-rays. I don’t think I’ve been compliant enough this time around for much improvement–I can wear normal shoes, although I’m supposed to be wearing an orthopedic sandal, but it is really awkward wearing with one normal shoe, so I have been wearing normal shoes to the office. I wear my walking boot at my barn still since the ground is so uneven.
This is a long, hard road for healing, and extremely frustrating. I’ll keep you posted after today’s doctor appointment, but I can say that if I were to do this over again, I would get surgery no matter how hard I had to push for it.
Thanks,
Heather
February 20, 2009 at 2:01 pm
Zoe – My break was Nov. 4 – I did not have surgery and 2 weeks ago (3 months from the break), I was given the go ahead to wean myself out of the boot. I am now wearing an athletic shoe close to 100% of the time – so I am back up but definitely not running. It’s probably the worst when I first get out of bed in the morning, then the calf muscles loosen up as the day goes on. But I still am limping around.
Anyone else out there who has not had surgery?? How long till you felt totally back to normal?
Heather – How did your appt. go today?
Kathy
February 20, 2009 at 3:11 pm
Heather, I didn’t realize our breaks were so close together!!! :) Glad you’re still making progress! 80% is great! I hope the doctor had some good news for you yesterday.
My break was Sep. 12th, and I’m finally having bone graft and plating surgery in 5 days… I’ll check back in with everyone afterward.
Best Wishes!
Ginger
February 20, 2009 at 5:44 pm
Zoe -
My injury occurred on June 30 and I was cleared from my orthopedist on Dec 23 (25 weeks later). No surgery, but I spent 14 weeks in a hard cast, 100% NWB for about 10 weeks of that, then in a boot for about another 6 weeks gradually weaning off crutches. I am totally back to normal now – been running at 7.5 mph on treadmill for about 5 miles 5 times a week with no pain or discomfort whatsover.
However, if I ever find myself with this break again, I would definitely opt for immediate surgery as the recovery time seems to be significantly less. Spending all of July/Aug/Sept and half of Oct in a cast was not my idea of fun especially as the mother of 2 teenagers. You are young and active – you don’t want to be spending months waiting and wondering if you’ve made the right decision by not having surgery or worrying that one wrong step will result in a re-fracture.
My advise would be to see if there’s progress at your next x-ray. If there’s none to little, get the surgery. In the meantime, eat well, cut back on caffeine, alcohol and sugar, take calcium/vitamin D supplements, get enough sleep and try not to stress too much (I know – that is a hard one).
Hopefully you will be one of the fortunate ones to see early healing – but just know that even the early healers seem to take months before they are back to normal as well. If there is one thing that comes from this injury, it is to learn patience.
Good luck with everything and I hope you find this site to be a good source of support during your recovery.
Joan
February 20, 2009 at 6:22 pm
Good news at the doctor today–the fracture is no longer visible on x-ray at all! I am really excited, as I’ve been having some burning and discomfort at the fracture site, and had convinced myself that I was regressing since I wasn’t as compliant as I should be with the ortho sandal. I did get some orthotics to put in my shoes, and talked to the surgeon about the discomfort–he said that a lot of people want to just pop back to normal once it looks healed, but that I still have some work and discomfort ahead of me–he said, “No fancy shoes for quite some time–stick with your ‘mom shoes’ and just go day-by-day.” I celebrated by coming home and jumping on my bike and going for a good long ride. I know, maybe that isn’t the most crazy celebration, but it gave me time to think about how long this has taken and what a relief it is to make this milestone–I call it a milestone because I know it will be some time before I’m back to normal. Anyway, great news today, and I’m hoping for the best for everyone. This is the only place where people really understand how frustrating this is!
Thanks to all!
Heather
February 20, 2009 at 6:32 pm
Four months after my fracture failed to heal, I finally had surgery a week ago. Today I went back to have the x-ray and saw the big screw in there(very scary). The doctor told me it was healing well and i could walk with a boot on(thats a week after the surgery) Then I felt the pain and decided to go with crutches for another week. Does anyone know when it will be a good time to get off crutches? also anyone have any advice for me start working out again. Is that too soon, even for upper boday??
February 20, 2009 at 9:47 pm
Heather -
Congrats to you! I will never forget that ecstatic feeling – you are sure that you are the happiest person on the planet – when you hear the word ‘healed’ and see the x-ray with 100% union. Knowing that, mentally, I think you will find many of those aches and pains disappearing over the next couple of weeks – really. My OS told me that unless I did something traumatizing , I would not refracture it – which was incredibly reassuring. I no longer panicked with every twist and turn. Just the additional confidence to participate in daily activities was a huge morale booster.
Ginger,
Will be thining of you over the next week. Have you decided to go ahead with the surgery regardless or will you rethink it if the stimulator has produced satisfactory healing?
Enjoy your weekend everyone!
Joan
February 21, 2009 at 5:52 am
Hey Everyone!!
Thank you so much for all your responses!! Its really helpful to know everyone else’s experiences. I have Fracture Clinic on 26th Feb to be xrayed and see whats the best p.o.a so I will keep you all updated!! :)
and…Congratulations Heather!! :D
Lots of Love Zoe xxx
February 21, 2009 at 7:19 am
Joan:
They are doing another set of x-rays on Monday just 2 days before my surgery — been using the bone stimulator for 7 weeks. I had to go ahead and get all of the FMLA paperwork taken care of and make sure everything was ready to go with insurance because the dates were so close together. There is the small chance that my OS will cancel the surgery if there is significant progress in healing, but I after 5 1/2 months of 0%, I guess I’ve just assumed the surgery will happen. If there has been enough healing to cancel it, I will be out of my mind with joy and probably cry all the way home. :) Thanks so much for your concern and care. This site has been such a blessing to me, I’ve told my OS all about it. I’ll check back on Monday. Cheers!
Ginger
February 21, 2009 at 1:52 pm
hi . yesterday while playing soccer the inside of my foot collided with my friends heel but there is a alot of pain on the outside of y foot. Im hobbling around but I can’t put my foot down completely without the pressure on the outside hurting. Ive iced it but It can’t take much pressure. Is this a stress fracture?
February 21, 2009 at 11:08 pm
In Dec the doctor said I could be running in January…I knew this wasn’t possible, so didn’t. Yesterday I darted for a moment and during that moment felt “wow! I’m running.” Later that day I paid the price. Today, I was on my feel cleaning for two hours and my foot is aching. Is this normal almost five months after the initial fracture???
February 22, 2009 at 8:24 am
Bella -
Did you ever go back to your OS for another set of xrays? I remember you achieved your ‘healed’ status shortly before I did in Dec. The xray you posted at that time looked identical to mine with that little divot on the side of the bone. My OS said this was normal and could take up to a year to completely fill in but that this shouldn’t interfere with any activities. He also, suggested that I wait a few weeks before taking up any heavy duty running. I probably waited about 3 weeks and then I was off – with no issues at all. Also, if just being on your feet for a couple of hours while cleaning caused your foot to ache, I’d would definitely want to get it checked out. You’ve been mobile for long enough that this should not be attributed to weak muscles in your foot and ankle any longer. Bella, you don’t want to go thru the next few months wondering, worrying and being afraid to do the things you so enjoyed before your injury. Please do yourself a favor and go back to your OS – be honest with him/her and even a little arrogant if you need to be. You clearly feel you still have an issue – you need to be 100% sure of your status.
Joan
February 22, 2009 at 3:16 pm
Hi Spencer – If your foot is still bothering you, you do need to go see a doctor and have an x-ray taken – then you’ll know for sure if you have a break. If you do, it still might not be a Jones fracture. If it is, you’ll have a great support group here with others who have been thru it.
Good luck – hopefully you will not have a break. Let us know.
February 22, 2009 at 6:41 pm
Thanks Joan for the rec. It’s just that I was also told it can take 6 months to 1 year to completely heal. And aside from rolling my ankle, moving my foot up and down, side to side…no physical therapy. I guess I should go back, but the doctor himself is a arrogant jerk who never even explained my x-rays to me (didn’t bring them to the room, was nonchalant when I inquired further by phone, etc).
So you have no pain walking a good amount of time, running, or trouble fitting into old shoes? I will try to make an appointment, but they rec’d a CT scan, contradicting their own statement about how long it takes to heal, and pain being somewhat present for a good period of time…The scan will be expsensive too.
February 23, 2009 at 12:14 pm
Bella -
Now that you mention it, I remember you didn’t think to much of your doctor – so sorry. Must be terrible to not be getting the support you need. As much as I liked my OS, he didn’t think I needed PT either. Initially, I thought this was nuts as I was 14 weeks totally immobile. But, believe it or not, mobility came back very quickly. – strength and balance a little longer. I was given a couple sheets of mobility, strength and balance exercises to do. If you do a search on foot and ankle rehab exercises, these would pretty much be what I did. My doc did say if after a couple weeks if I felt I wanted PT, he’d arrange it for me – but I never felt the need.
I never had any trouble getting back into shoes -in fact, my foot is a little more narrow now than it was before – probably from months in a cast and boot. Swelling never was an issue either – even when I first came out of the cast. I have a desk job, so I don’t spend a whole lot of time on my feet during the day, but I honestly can say that from the time I get home to when I go to bed at night, I probably only sit down to eat dinner. On the weekends, it’s constant activity and I have not experienced any pain at all.
Have you thought about getting another doctor? Might be something to explore. At this point, enough is enough! Good luck with all of this.
February 23, 2009 at 7:35 pm
Okay… my final pre-op x-rays today still showed 0% healing. I looked at a calendar just for the fun of it, and I’m at 23 weeks of NWB. The OS went over the procedure with us this afternoon, and my surgery is Wednesday. Hopefully this is the beginning of the end??? :)
Ginger
February 24, 2009 at 5:46 am
Ginger -
Had my fingers crossed for better news….but….you are probably right in that this should be the beginning of the end.
Can’t believe the 23 weeks of NWB – I’d have ditched the crutches a long time ago and would have been walking in the boot. I truly admire your perseverance.
Good luck tomorrow – let us know how it all went when you are able.
Joan
February 25, 2009 at 10:05 am
Boy I had a terrifying moment–with the confidence that comes with being healed, I decided I was ready to jump my horse again. I did a couple of small ones, then went down a line where there were 2 in a row, and I jumped the first one, and had this strange moment where I couldn’t figure out how to put weight on my right leg–I had most of my weight on my left leg, took the next jump, and fell off my horse (falling off my horse is how I got the Jones fracture). This time I can say that I made sure to get my foot out of the stirrup to protect my foot–I’m glad to say that I am okay, but getting back on my horse was the hardest most terrifying thing I have done in a long time. All I could think about was “what if.” I wonder how long it will take before I’m not so terrified of falling off? Anyone else feel overly confident and do something stupid right after being declared “healed?” Needless to say, my family is very angry with me today!
February 25, 2009 at 10:18 am
Heather -
Yes…..
I sustained my Jones by running up the stairs. During healing I swore up and down that I would always take stairs slowly and cautiously. I am back to running up them probably 75% of the time – the other 25% is when it occurs to me that I should not be doing this. You’d think I’d be “smart” enough to know……..
February 26, 2009 at 5:32 am
Heather, oh my gosh, I’m so glad you weren’t hurt!! I’ll keep yours and Joan’s words of wisdom in mind in the future. :)
My surgery went fine yesterday — the staff at the orthopedic surgery center was amazing and my friends are taking wonderful care of me. I feel so very blessed.
Instead of screw placement surgery after such an extended period of time, Doc took a bone graft from my heel. Once the broken ends of my 5th meta were cleaned up and filed down, he put a plate across the gap like a bridge, and then placed the bone graft in the gap. Because the bone graft can’t be permanently secured, I’m supposed to stay as immobile as possible until the graft starts to calcify into place over the next 10-15 days.
I go back in 5 days to make sure the bone graft is still in place, and again in 2 more weeks. The doctor says expect that I won’t be able to carry my mail route for another three months. My friends and I were joking yesterday that in the time between breaking my foot and returning to full duty at work, I could have conceived and had another child. :)
Instead of automatically stuffing me into a splint up to my knee, they gave me the option of wrapping and dressing my foot and using my cam boot instead. Only catch is, I can’t take the cam boot off, not even to sleep. (Which is why I’m writing this at 4:20 am) I can’t tell you the ways I daydream of shredding the silly thing once I get healed enough to divorce it!! :)
I hope everyone is doing well!!! There are some folks from dialog over the last few months I’ve thought about and would love to hear from. I’ll check in again soon.
Ginger
February 26, 2009 at 10:33 am
Hi Ginger–
It sounds like the surgery went well–even if complicated by the length of time it has been since your break. I hope that it isn’t nearly as painful as it sounds–but, on the other hand, I’m sure that it is a step closer to finally getting this ordeal out of the way so you can move on with your life. I’m certainly going to keep checking in to see how you are doing, and will keep you in my thoughts! Best of healing to you!
Heather
February 26, 2009 at 11:08 am
Hi Ginger – I was thinking of you yesterday and glad to get on the computer this morning and see that your surgery went well. It’s great that you have such caring friends.
Rest up and heal well!
Kathy
February 26, 2009 at 12:31 pm
Ginger -
Glad to hear all went well – you must be relieved that the procedure is behind you and have peace of mind that this ordeal finally seems to have a light at the end of a long, dark tunnel.
Keep us updated on your progress. BTW, I know what you mean about not being able to sleep with the boot. I had one for the first week of my injury and ended up calling the OS and begging for a cast – which was like heaven even though it was during a heat wave!
Good time to get on the internet and plan a nice vacation for you and your daughter this summer. You certainly deserve one!
Joan
February 26, 2009 at 3:58 pm
Hi Everyone,
I went to fracture clinic today…the x ray showed absolutly no healing so I’m back in cast for another 4 weeks, before Im reviewed again.
Its been about 5 weeks since the initial fracture, I’m really confused…if its not started healing one bit by now will it actually ever start healing naturally without surgery.
Has anyone else experienced this?! Its very dis-heartening when you get put back to square one!! =(
Zoe xxx
February 26, 2009 at 5:35 pm
Hi Zoe –
Don’t give up. 4 weeks is way too early to see healing on the x-ray. Mine showed 0% healing at 4 weeks, by 9 weeks there was visible healing, and by 13 weeks enough healing for the doctor to take me out of the boot. I have to go back in 2 weeks for one more xray – I have been seeing an OS and he said there is usually a bit more healing going on than the xray actually reveals.
One of the techs came into the room and put up the xrays, so before the doctor came in I could see for myself, at 4 weeks, that there was no healing. But when the doctor came in, he did acknowledge what the xray showed, but he said we needed to give it more time to heal on it’s own before deciding to do the surgery.
Are you nonweight bearing? I think that’s pretty important in helping to heal. I also doubled up my calcium intake each day.
Good luck.
Kathy
February 27, 2009 at 4:29 am
Hi Kathy,
Aww thanks for sharing your experience with me! Makes me feel a lot better!
On my first week I was put in a boot and told to walk on it as much as possible(ouch!!!)
Then I went into hard cast for 4 weeks and told to weight bear as and when I felt comfortable.
Then I went to be x rayed (no healing!)
So back into a soft cast and told to not weight bear at all.
I wish they would make up their minds!! :P
Yeah, I’ve been trying to drink more milk and eat yoghurts for children with added calcuim, so hopefully that will help!!
I’m such a energetic person, this sitting around drives me mad!! Considering I’m a student nurse I make the worse patient ever!! haha!! :o/
Thank you once again,
Zoe xxx
February 28, 2009 at 8:41 am
Thanks for all the posts; it helped knowing there were others going through this…
My story:
Broke my 5th metatarsal 11 weeks ago playing soccer.
Was NWB for the entire duration, I opted for the conservative approach.
I was given an aircast which I left on all the time, it was tough sleeping with it but I didn’t want any movement (my doctor looked at me funny…sleeping with the boot?). The first 2 weeks was the most difficult time in my life, the world changed for me. Thankfully I had a great support system in my wife and family, they get affected with this life changer.
There were times I felt I should have had the surgery especially after my 4th week visit where my doctor said no healing at all. He got me on a bone stimulator after that.
At 6 weeks signs of healing, at 8 weeks he asked for 3 more weeks.
Yesterday I got the thumbs up to start Partial WB with crutches, and no more aircast or stimulator. In a month I can start running so looking forward to the summer.
I travel to Boston every week so the winter was tough with snow and ice. I definitely recommend ice tips, they were the best. For rain and snow a cap and athletic gloves (the ones football receivers use is critical, otherwise you won’t get a good grip). A good backpack and traveling as light as possible is key. At the airport I originally requested a wheel chair the first 2 weeks, but the service takes so long I almost missed my flights those times, so if you’re going to use them give yourself plenty of time. My airport has electric carts they are the best.
At the hotels make sure you get a roll-in shower otherwise hopping into a tub is tough.
I remained as active as I could, bus to work, stairs where required, so only suggestion I have is stayed focused while crutching, there is always stuff on the floor that you can slip on with the crutch, and prep your self at the top and bottom of stairs (your basically taking a dive).
My diet pretty much remained the same except for calcium pills 1000mg a day…pretty big pills.
Good luck to all, and when your depressed and watching the world go by, know that at some point you’ll get better and there more unfortunate people who have it worse then us.
Ps. Get a handicap placard ASAP, I still don’t understand how they hand out the handicap placards for parking. Majority of people I see park in those spots were pretty young and able. There should be some guidelines, if the HC person is not in the vehicle, you can’t park in the spot.
February 28, 2009 at 10:17 am
You all may find this article useful:
http://www.podiatrytoday.com/article/5382
March 1, 2009 at 11:32 am
My son just found out he has a Jones fracture. he is 12 years old and the foot doctor recommends waiting few weeks before he will recommend surgery. he feels since he is young his blood circulation is better and recovery will be quicker. He is going to xray it in 1 1/2 weeks. any thoughts or opinions?
March 2, 2009 at 11:00 am
Hi Greg:
My new thought process on Jones fractures is “get the surgery.” If the doctor arrives at a point where surgery is an option, I just think it is a much faster means to getting back on your feet. I really trusted my body to be able to heal–I am very athletic, very muscular and healthy, etc. and just knew I’d be back up and running quickly–it took 5 months before I was “healed.” I have broken lots of bones in my life (I’m an equestrian), and this is by far the hardest one to heal. Anyway, that is my two cents.
Jorge: I totally wish I knew about ice tips–I live in Texas, but travel a lot to Chicago and Minneapolis, and I really really struggled with getting around up north, especially since I’m just not used to that kind of weather. The other thing I noticed for the first time is that every floor in Chicago and Minneapolis seemed to be ceramic tile. I really learned how to skid when coming into a building!
March 3, 2009 at 10:02 am
Hi,
Finally after 23 weeks(fracture occured end of Sept)…..today is my appointment with the foot and ankle specialist!
My ortho finally refered me to him last week since their was no healing since November (funny thing is that is when he told me to stop wearing my Boot!)
I was really afraid of surgery, but over the last month my back is hurting all the time. I can take the dull ache in my foot….but my back is killing me. So if he suggests surgery, I guess I’m in :)
Wish me luck!!
Fredda
March 3, 2009 at 2:18 pm
Fredda:
Thanks so much for posting and sharing with us! I am right there with you… my fracture was the beginning of September and I finally just had surgery 6 days ago. I hope you got some encouraging news today — I know how frustrating x-rays showing no progress are, and I’m glad you are going to get some answers today!
I just wanted to jump and and say that after surgery, I actually have some peace of mind for the first time in knowing my foot is healing. Being able to estimate a date when I will walk again after 6 months is such an amazing feeling! :) I go back Thursday already to have the dressing taken off and stitches out.
We’re pulling for you, and hoping you won’t have to have surgery — but just in case you do, it’s not so bad. Keep us updated and let us know how you’re doing!! Best Wishes!
Ginger :)
March 4, 2009 at 8:30 am
Well…
The foot specialist said I have “Peek-a-boo Heels.” My foot isn’t healing because of pressure I place on the fracture site while walking.
He said even if he inserted a screw, it would end up snaping due to the pressure of walking on the outside of my feet.
I was casted with $400 insoles to reverse the pressure from the outside of my foot to the inside.
He said the bone should heal once the pressure is taken off the fracture.
Could this long ordeal be solved with inserts for my shoes??? I’m a little ticked off at myself and the other ortho because this has lasted 30 something weeks and really has nothing to do with “bone growth.”
Hope he’s right!!!!
Anybody heard of this???
Thanks for the support Ginger :)
Fredda
March 4, 2009 at 9:55 pm
Hello, fellow foot-fracturers! Well, it has been 14 weeks since I initially came here looking for info on my Jones’ fracture. I have been in a boot cast & used a bone-growth stimulator, but have only had partial healing. Am going under the knife next Wednesday for a screw & whatever else they decide to do. Am scared beyond belief about surgery, but am so ready for this nightmare in my life to be over. Am praying I’m not just moving from one nightmare to another. Doc said surgery would be more complicated if we continue to wait longer in my “non-union” state. Said he wanted me to start weight-bearing 2-3 days post-op.
You guys are the only ones out there who understand this stuff – am so glad I’m not alone. You guys understand how crucial handicapped parking is & having to use those scooters in Wal-Mart. God bless whoever decided to put them in the stores – it’s like the only freedom I have to truly “walk”, & being single I can’t lift a wheelchair into my car with a broken foot.
Hopefully one day I’ll meet you guys in Margaritaville & we’ll drink to this being over. Until then, wish me luck on surgery, & my thoughts & prayers go out to all of you as well.
March 5, 2009 at 7:07 am
Lee,
I had the surgery 9 months after my initial break and from the day of the break. By that stage I had my doubts if it was ever going to heal. Surgery was not bad at all and had bearable pain for a couple of days. I did not weight bear for six weeks when it showed that it had healed. Don’t worry you will be on the way to recovery soon.
Meg
March 6, 2009 at 12:07 pm
Yesterday, I went in for my 8 day post-op check up… Because of the duration of non-union (nearly 6 months) and lack of progress with the bone stimulator, the doctor decided to do an ORIF surgery instead of screw placement — he filed and removed the broken section of bone and replaced it with bone from my heel, plated it and secured it with 4 screws.
I wasn’t prepared for what my foot looked like under all of the dressing. I’d only seen pictures of screw placement surgeries that are much less invasive. They took over 30 staples out of my foot and reinforced the incision sites with suture tape. The hardware on the x-ray was difficult to see, as well.
The other part I wasn’t expecting — I am now in a fiberglass cast up to my knee. They secured a receiver for the bone stimulator into the side of the cast and I’m back to using it daily again.
My overall surgery experience was wonderful… I felt well cared for. After prep, I walked (hopped) into the operating room, met the surgery staff, crawled up on the table and was out until recovery. The pain wasn’t bad at all as long as I stayed on top of it.
I also found out that because of the extensive surgery, I won’t be able to even begin weight bearing or start therapy for another 3 months — that’s a total of 9 months on crutches. I’m frustrated, but I know everything will work out fine. :)
March 8, 2009 at 6:06 pm
Em, did you ever get another x-ray? I have a new job where I’m teaching, so have to be to be on my feet all day. Even just one hour and my foot is aching. Is this normal? It’s so bad it lasts through the night. Should I think about another job? I am seriously considering it, but this recession stuff has me scared.
I am trying to schedule a new foot appointment before I consider leaving, btw, with a new doctor. I did read this fracture can fully take 6 months to 1 year to heal. Right now, I’m at six months.
Any comments appreciated.
Thanks,
Isabel
March 12, 2009 at 6:25 pm
It’s been a while since I’ve checked in here – see lots of new folks struggling with this jones fracture. What amazes me, reading through the entries, is the range of treatments. Clearly the docs haven’t figured it all out yet!
My experience: broke the 5th metatarsal late July. Crutches + NWB for 6 weeks, then to shoes. My doctors – I saw three – ALL wanted to avoid casts, felt that walking as much as possible was important to stimulating bone growth, as long as there wasn’t too much pain. Got fitted for orthodic insoles. I went on bone stimulator. Finally at 6 months, the xrays showed union.
Now, I am at over 7 months since the break, and am basically pain free, but still feel twinges. Once, just last week, I pivoted on my “bad” foot, and there was a LOT of pain, and I was limping the rest of the day…but then it was fine. I plan to start running again, once the snow clears (I live in Maine.)
I’m glad I was able to avoid surgery. But this injury does take many many months to fully heal. You have to carefully gauge your return to “normal” life, and I imagine that’s true whether you have surgery or not?
Good luck to all. Fredda, try the insoles. And Ginger, I wish you the best healing from surgery…
March 13, 2009 at 4:14 pm
It’s been 4 months and 1 week from my JF – I have been officially released from the OS – today’s x ray looked like a pretty good union – one side is not all filled in yet, but on the other side he could not even tell there was a break. I asked him about different courses of treatment, and he said if it’s a true Jones fracture, then you need to be totally non weightbearing for the initial period.
He did write me an rx for PT which he doesn’t think I need – if I feel in a few weeks I have not progressed any, then I’ll set up an appointment.
And when I said to him “I guess I am one of the lucky ones”, his response was “Yes you are!”
I feel like I missed the entire winter so hope now to be able to enjoy springtime.
Good luck to everyone!
Kathy
March 15, 2009 at 11:38 am
I broke my foot in a basketball game at the beginning of January. That night i thought that i had just sprained my ankle, i walked on it the next day, well mainly dragging it because it hurt to bad to step on it. I went to the ER that afternoon and they gave me a walking boot and crutches, and they told me no pressure whatsoever and to come back in 6 weeks. I did exactly as they told me, and when i got there they said i have to go for another month. He also said that i might not ever get to play ball again because it would just break again. Then he said that i might still have to go into surgery on my next check up, and it will be 8 weeks no pressure, then 6-8 weeks of rehab. This break sucks! They need to find some way for us to walk while this heals.
March 15, 2009 at 11:50 am
Oh also i was wanting to know about the surgery. See, i am a very good athlete. i have played varsity ball since a freshman. i work very hard in the sport and i was planning on playing college ball. I know i was deffinitely good enough to. The Doc said that since it is just my junior year i still might have a chance to play again next year, but he also said that the bone would just snap-with a screw in or not-with the movements in basketball. I was wanting to know about how long after surgery can i start playing even golf cause i play that too. I just want to be active again. I hate being this way cause i feel like i am not as fit as i used to. It just sucks in my life as an athlete.
March 16, 2009 at 11:20 am
Dalton:
You need to go see a specialist if you aren’t already. A good portion of the people here are athletes, and many of us have been cleared to return to normal activity–but, it take a long time to heal. Jones fractures are miserable, take a lot of patience to heal, but require appropriate treatment. If you read through this board, you will see a lot of different kinds of treatments–from hard casts and non-weight bearing to people that only had to have walking boots to surgery, but you have to trust your doctor, and you have to go to someone that has knowledge and experience with this type of fracture, and I can say personally that when I went to the ER, they didn’t have a clue. Go to an orthopedic specialist, and maybe look for one that specializes in feet. This is not that uncommon of a fracture, particularly for soccer players, and many of them return to the playing field. Good luck!
March 16, 2009 at 12:24 pm
Well i am seeing a specialist, but he hasnt seen that many. He said that its better off to heal on its own. He also said that in basketball with all of the side to side movements it would just break again. For a point gaurd we make a lot of those movements cutting and changing direction. I hate that this is so long to heal. it sucks. What else can i like eat and drink and do to help the healing?
March 17, 2009 at 9:53 am
I think a lot of people have been taking calcium supplements–you might read back through this–I didn’t take anything in particular, but did use an Exogen Bone Stimulator–I think that made a huge difference for me in healing. I think the biggest factor in my healing (I did not have surgery) was the bone stimulator and the fact that I was in a hard cast for 14 weeks and non weight bearing for so long. It sucked, and it knocked me out of the major competitions for last year, but I had really good success in healing, and am not 100% just yet, but I’m certainly on my way. I very occasionally have some discomfort, and can tell if I roll my foot the wrong way, but my doctor told me I was not in danger of re-breaking it from normal activity. Just remember–second opinions aren’t always bad!
March 17, 2009 at 11:29 am
Dalton,
I might go for a second opinion here as well. It seems as if your doc has left you with the impression that you will never be the same with or without surgery regarding your return to basketball. Not sure if you know this, but Yao Ming sustained this injury last year around this time. He had screw insertion surgery and went was back playing basketball by the end of June, represented China in the Olympics and is having a good season with the Rockets. I think if Yao can return to form with the demands of professional basketball, you too should return to your level of play as well. You have youth on your side too – which is not a bad thing. Many soccer players have also successfully returned to play after surgery. Might be something to think about…..
March 17, 2009 at 12:17 pm
Good example Joan–If Yoa can do it, Dalton can do it ;)
March 17, 2009 at 12:23 pm
well its just that by the time i go through the surgery and the rehab that i wont be back in time to play next year. Because school is about over. If i go into surgery and then rehab it will be another 8-10 weeks. I am going for a second opinion. The reason for the time factor is because he wants to see if it will heal on its own. Then he might go ahead and do surgery. That could take a long time. i am eating healthy but i was wanting to know what else i can eat and drink to help it. Also what exercises can i do?
March 17, 2009 at 12:25 pm
also i wanted to add that i think my doc is kinda not doin the smart thing cause he said it was one of the worst he’s seen. He wouldnt get me the surgery off the bat.
March 17, 2009 at 12:45 pm
Dalton,
I believe your treatment time will be much longer if you don’t go the surgery route. I took 25 weeks before I was cleared to go back to all activities. I, like Heather, was in a hard cast for 14 weeks NWB and in a boot for some time after that. 8-10 weeks sounds like a bargain to me!!
March 17, 2009 at 7:21 pm
I second Joan, Dalton…
I didn’t have surgery until 24 weeks after my initial fracture.
8-10 weeks is a blessing.
March 18, 2009 at 12:18 pm
I am hoping that i heal soon cause i need to get back to the athletics this sucks. Thanks for everything so far.
March 18, 2009 at 6:31 pm
Hi Dalton – I’ve read your posts and I feel for you – and yes, it does suck! But this is an injury that needs time to heal – whether you take the conservative approach or go for the surgery, you are still going to have to give it the time it needs for successful healing.
It must be hard to be a junior in high school with a promising college career ahead of you. There’s a good chance you will be fine by senior year when basketball season begins.
Your injury happened 2 1/2 months ago – you can certainly go for a 2nd opinion if you are not feeling confident in the doctor you are seeing.
Please talk to your parents and express what you have been saying here. I’m sure they want the best for you and will give you guidance and encouragement.
Unfortunately, there is not a quick fix for this injury. You can make sure you are eating right – maybe add some vitamins and calcium.
As far as exercising, your foot needs to be stable – exercising your foot is what you don’t want to be doing. But there’s no reason why you can’t be doing some upper body strengthening – talk with your coach and let him know what’s going on.
Although it feels like the end of the world, you will recover – keep a positive attitude and know that others have been thru this and continued on successfully with their athletic careers.
Good luck and keep us posted.
Kathy
March 19, 2009 at 12:10 pm
I will and thanks for all the info. I just wonder what it would be like if i just started walking on it now with out it healing completely.I just want to play golf atleast.
March 19, 2009 at 9:30 pm
… then there’s a small chance you could end up like me — because that’s exactly what I did. I just had surgery at 6 months and am looking at another 3 more on crutches.
March 19, 2009 at 11:32 pm
Dalton – You can wonder what it would be like to walk on it now – but don’t do it! Go to your next appointment (or for that second opinion), get an updated xray, and take it from there. If it’s healing, then you might be able to start walking in the boot without the crutches – and that makes it so much easier to do lots of things – maybe even go and hit some golf balls. But you don’t want to do anything now to jeopardize any healing that is going on – the non weight bearing is crucial – it still won’t guarantee a healing without surgery – but if you walk on it too soon, you can set yourself back several months.
Kathy
March 20, 2009 at 5:08 pm
Dalton,
I read your story and totally undertand what ur going through. Im a colleg sophomore, I play a lot of basketball and also manage for USD Men’s bball team.(we beat Uconn last year in the first round:) The head physician of my basketball team performed my surgery a month ago and it went well. I finally decided to go with surgery after waited for almost five months. The best treatment is to let it heal itself, get a bone stimulator if u need, and also make sure you put NO pressure on it ALL TIME. Then after three to four months and if it does not heal, you might want to go with surgery if you want to play competitive basketball again. For D1 college athletes, surgery is actually their first option. I used to have six pack and was really fit but after half year without proper exercise I lost everything. Im starting fitness program that can hopefully get me back to the best shape and we can definitely exchange thoughts about that. For someone who is still in HS, you do have plenty time to recover. You will be able to practice again six weeks after surgery and play competitively perhaps two or three months post the surgery. If you happen to live in southern california I can recommend you some good doctors. good luck!
March 20, 2009 at 5:13 pm
Anyone already had surgery and is currenly doing some rehab??
I had surgery five weeks ago and im starting to work out with a boot on. I lift weight about five days a week, skipping some exercise with a lot of pressure on the foot(like squats) I also use the bench to get the pressure off as much as i could. anyone knows a good way to do some cardio?? Is it too soon to start practive some basic basketball moves like shooting and dribbling?
March 22, 2009 at 7:49 pm
Frank:
I had surgery 3 1/2 weeks ago, but our procedures were very different — I had to have ORIF instead of just screw placement (bone filing, a plate, 4 screws, and a bone graft). I’m in a hard cast for at least 5 weeks, possibly 10, and I can’t begin weight bearing or put my boot back on until mid-May…. or whenever the bone graft grows to meet both ends of the section of metatarsal they removed.
It’s fantastic you’re already in a boot and at the gym again…. I daydream of cardio and going back. I just figure I’d look ridiculous in a cast. Please share what you find out! (I tried swimming for cardio before my surgery.)
Also, wondering if you’ve noticed any sensitivity to the metal at all? I’m not sure if it’s because the plate is on the outside of my bone, but I’m having nerve issues.
March 22, 2009 at 10:28 pm
Ginger,
I don’t know if you play competitve sports, but it must be a tough decision to go with the surgery. Thinking about the screw thats gonna be with me for the rest of my life, I actually doubted about the surgery after had it. Now I have no choice but to live with it, thinking that for the next twenty years(hopefully) i should not have any problem with it.
Looks like your situation is a bit more complicatated and therefore I recommend you to be more careful with the rehab. Start out with stationary bike for at least three weeks before going to the treadmill. (I tried treadmill too soon and experienced pain and swelling on the foot, then I rested for three days and got back on the bike again)
I did swimming too before the surgery but the result was little, and it possibly slowed down the healing, Im guessing right now. And since I also have the nerve issued that you mentioned(Even if that part of the foot is touched just slightly, I do feel it very well), Im not looking forward to going back to swimming too soon.Im not too sure what the water will do to it. But I think the nerve issue is compeletely normal and we need to give it much more time.
Im actually going back to see my doctor tomorrow and hopefully for the last time. We will discuss in detail what kinda exercises I can do at this stage and how I can progressed to the next level. I will ask for you about swimming and get back to you, but swimming along wont help you to lose much fat if that is the purpose.
March 22, 2009 at 10:38 pm
For anyone who already had surgery or will have surgery and wants to play competitive sports again, I found an article tells how college athletes do their rehabs.
http://www.theacc.com/sports/m-baskbl/spec-rel/020105aal.html
Since I don’t have the resources they do, I obviously can’t have the x-ray every week and be monitored all time, but article mentions how to progress to the next level of exercise each week and that I found very helpful.
BE SURE to stop the specific exercise for at least three days if you experience pain doing it, allowing your foot enough time to recover from swelling or bruises.
Good luck getting back to your best shape:))
March 23, 2009 at 7:43 am
Frank:
I’m more into individual sports — whitewater kayaking, hiking, trail running. I went 5 1/2 months before having surgery as well, and the decision came down to necessity… I couldn’t sit at home off work and gamble any longer. (I’m a city letter carrier with a 9.5 mile walking route and also a single mom.)
I doubted my surgery afterward, too, especially after seeing the first post-surgical x-ray. I hope as things go back to normal, I’ll feel more confident. Thank you for the heads up about the bike vs. treadmill — I can’t afford to take steps backward after this much time has passed.
I hope your doctor’s appointment today goes very well and you are encouraged by your progress! :) And thanks for sharing with all of us and passing along resources!
March 23, 2009 at 8:08 am
Frank,
Yeah i am in high school. i was really fit to but i am starting to lose my muscle and everything is leaving. I think i am healing but i dont know. I go to the specialist April 3rd to find out. He said if its not healing he was going to operate. I just want to start working out again cause i dont know a routine to work out at the gym. If you have a proper routine please let me know. I need to know exactly what exercises i can do and how many reps. Please get back to me.
March 23, 2009 at 2:34 pm
So I finally visited the doctor – a new one, not the one I saw before who didn’t even show me my x-ray. I figure if I had gone to this one first, I might not be in this situation. Oct break, Dec healed, supposedly. Still have lots of pain when walking and standing. AND my tendon pops repeatedly. The doctor told me these things:
1. Wear New Balance shoes only for now
2. Go to physical therapy 3x a week for 4 weeks (and do the exercises on my days off). Work on restoring balance, stretching, muscle strength and endurance.
3. Have PT apply RX of hydrocortisone 10% aquasonic gel during PT.
4. Fill Micicalcin Nasal Spray alternating nostrils 2 a day, total 2 vials. This is supposed to promote bone growth.
He didn’t give me any pain meds, which is part of what I wanted. He thought everything else should help.
Does this sound good? He gave me a list of shoes that were good – Clarks, Born, Rockport, Merrill, Dankso, Timberland, QUarks, Reebok DMX Max, Ariat, Mephisto, Dunham, SAS, Soft Spot, Aravon, Ecco…but stressed New Balance and maybe Dansko clogs at home. He said I was not to walk barefoot.
He said I couldn’t begin a walking program until the PT clears me, and it will be incremental 1/4 mile at a time. Swimming and arm exercises are fine, but no lunges or squats.
Does this sound good? Do you think he’s ignoring the popping sound – tendon sublaxation?
Comments appreciated!
March 23, 2009 at 10:21 pm
Ginger,
That nerve issue you mentioned is gonna last even after you get the cast off, so put a thicker sock on instead of using the wrap the doc give you, this way you allow the blood to flow better on that foot. Swimming would be fine once you are allowed to put regular shoe on so no need to rush.
The doc appt went well and Im already back on regular shoes. I will be riding stationary bikes and walking on the treadmills to get ready before start running again. I will let you know if that works along the way.
Good luck and stay more patient:))
March 23, 2009 at 10:58 pm
Dalton,
I understand how frustrated you are about the loss of physical shape, but believe or not, this is a life time opportunity for you to become a better basketball player. Once you are 100% to play again, you will be much more motivated than other players. Here is my advice:
1) If you have not been working out since the injury happened, dont start anything new for now, except for stretching.
For your next appt with the doc, if the x-ray shows progress of healing and the fracture is at least 80% healed, don’t bear any weight for the next whole month and you might have a shot of healing completely without surgery, which is the best result.
If surgery becomes a must, then you don’t have to worry about working out untill three weeks after the surgery. we can then talk about the routine later on.
I know this might not be what you want to hear but DONT repeat the mistake I made. I had not missed a day of working out after the injury and it did nothing but slowing down the healing.
It seems that the you gain fat quicker than ever but as soon as you are able to exercise, you will lose it quickly as well. SO BE PATIENT for now.
Start reading some books and watching some bball videos and you will just do fine. Get a bone stimulator you can use it even if u decide to have surgery most ppl say its helpful.
Good luck and keep us updated
March 24, 2009 at 3:16 am
Broke my 5th MT on Dec. 13th, 6 weeks in a fiberglass cast, 6 weeks in the boot, went to the doctor and was xrayed. The xray looked like it was an overexposed photo with a huge white spot in the place where the fracture was located. Your all healed and put your shoes on and back to work. Well, here I am at work. Foot is swollen, hurting and I can barely walk.
I called and spoke to the doctor’s nurse. She told me that everyone called the first week or two after getting out of the boot about the swelling and that I could look for that to happen for the next year. Just elevate, ice and stay off of my foot as much as possible.
I am wondering if the fracture is indeed healed since the xray was such poor quality. I am a nurse and have been one for 35 years. I don’t usually tell the doctor and nurses so I will see how they treat regular folks meaning non-medical.
What should I do?
March 24, 2009 at 8:02 am
Frank,
Ok i wont start to work out until my next appt. I just want to get back to playing. It sucks being out. I really want to play. I hope i come back as strong as i was last year. I just really want to play. I love ball so much. I also really like to play golf. I hope that i can just get to were i can play that. Cause as long as i can walk i can play that.
March 24, 2009 at 7:32 pm
Rhonda,
I experienced what you had there and my advice is Put on your boot and walk on it at least for couple weeks. Also start some basic exercises such as stationary bike and walking on the treadmill with your boot on. This will help you to gain some strength you have lost during the injury and also help get used to the walking. If you still experience swelling and pain then you should stop walking that much and go back to the doc cuz its most likely not healed.
Good luck
March 24, 2009 at 7:50 pm
Dalton,
Every word you said expressed how much you want to get back to normal. I totally feel you yet have to warn you to be extremely patient. It took me six months to finally get back on my regular shoes and yet I still can’t play basketball or run. As far as I have figured out, the injury has cost me my job as the team manager, two semesters of college life, 18 units of college credits, my six pack, many more other things, and most important, my character. I have just realized how much my personality has changed fighting the frustration and disappointment. Im telling you this so you don’t have to be as worried. You will get back to where you were but it will take a lot time and effort. YOu need to start focusing on other things that will help you to prepare for college and life. If you are not too sure what you can do Im here to help I went through the Hs to college transition and it was not easy at all. But keep the head up and be hopeful
March 25, 2009 at 10:57 pm
Hi, I broke my foot Sunday night…went to see an orthopedic Dr. today and he told me it was Jone’s and gave me an aircast walking boot. This may be a stupid question, but am I supposed to wear it 24/7…even when I’m lying down? I didn’t think to ask him while I was there. He told me absolutely NO walking on it or driving on it for at least six weeks….then I have a follow up with him towards the end of six weeks for another xray. I just didn’t know if I use the walking boot only when I’m getting around on my crutches or even when I’m laid up in bed? Thanks!
March 26, 2009 at 12:31 am
Ashley,
Its ok to take the boot off when you are laid up in bed or couch. You want to let the blood flow in order to heal the bone, but like your doctor said, absolutely no walking on it. ( i know its hard but avoid it at any cost, because due to low blood supply, its already difficult to heal, and if u put even slight pressure on, it will do damage) The first six to eight weeks is critical if you do it right it will save you surgery and much more time. Good luck
March 26, 2009 at 10:19 am
Hi Ashley –
The beauty of the boot is you can take it off when you shower (get the shower chair – it makes showering feel like a day in the spa). I was in a cast for the first month and then got the boot. I slept in it a few nights, but I found it not too comfortable to sleep in since the rubber on the bottom made it difficult to turn over. There was about a 4 day period when I hardly took the boot off due to some home remodeling going on (including having to go to a different bedroom) and at the end of those days, I got in my own bed, took off the boot, and was pretty shocked to discover my foot very swollen and discolored. I spent the next few days in bed with my foot elevated and kept the boot off. Within a few days it was much better.
I also noticed when I would take the boot off, the broken foot was ice cold and never looked quite the same color as the other foot. All this due to the lack of blood supply to the area.
Whether you start with a cast or a boot, you have to be totally nonweight bearing. I was fortunate in that I could stay in bed and my husband waited on me. I know that first month in bed was most instrumental in me healing in 3 months without surgery.
Oh, if you sleep with the boot off, be careful of pets. My cat likes to sleep down by my feet and I became very protective of my foot if I felt him moving about.
I just returned my crutches yesterday to the urgent care clinic I had first gone to in November – boy did that feel good!!!!
There’s so many knowledgeable people here – so ask any questions you have. And of course call your doctor with any concerns-none of your questions are stupid.
You are at the beginning of this process – just be patient – you’ll get thru this and hopefully in a few months you’ll be returning those crutches also.
Kathy
March 26, 2009 at 12:57 pm
Just checking in…. I’m exactly a month out of surgery. The cast in a nuisance, but I’m so grateful it’s my first one during this (going on) 7 month process. I had such a hard time following doctor’s orders, I feel like the cast is reassurance I’m not interfering with healing this time.
Here is a link to a pic of my cast:
http://www.facebook.com/photo.php?pid=2252425&l=b6b732035b&id=507881928
I go back April 9th, and I’m hoping the cast will come off and I can go back into a boot. As I’ve been able to wiggle my foot more, I don’t seem to notice the plate and screws in my foot as much. (I think a percentage of it is completely mental.) The nerve sensitivity seems to be subsiding as well, ever so slightly.
I got brave last week and road tripped to the Missouri Whitewater Championships and had some friends help me hike (okay, hop) down into the canyon. My entire body was definitely shot from going so far on crutches, but well worth the peace of getting outside for awhile.
My foot still swells when it’s below my waist, but not near as much as in the beginning. I’ve learned how to sleep in a cast finally… but because of the plastic bone stimulator receiver sticking out of the side, I have to sleep on the couch to keep from rolling over on it. If it even so much as gets bumped, the nerve sensitivity shocks me wide awake.
I’m very hopeful this time. I’m ready for the bone graft to make union on both ends so I can start my return to normal life again. I’m not sure I’ll ever be able to do any intense trail running again, but just walking would be very satisfying for the time being. :)
I hope everyone is doing well. I agree with Frank, this has been a life changing event for me at 31. I love being able to rejoice with those of you who have fully recovered without surgery, and encouraging those of us for whom this has become a significant battle. Cheers!
Ginger
March 26, 2009 at 1:27 pm
Hello,
Thank you for your quick replies. :) I did call the doctor today to ask him about the boot and he did tell me to live in it :( I just don’t understand it because of the whole low blood supply and incomplete healing and whatnot. I do have mild Cerebral Palsy on my left side (the right foot is broken) so it is especially hard for me to use crutches as my left side does not have good strength. So I am confined to my bed but luckily my bathroom is literally 2 steps from my bed. My boyfriend and I live together and he works third shifts so he just carries me the two steps :) I am just nervous about losing any of the strength that I do have in my left side (CP affected side) So I am extremely hopeful that the fracture heals in the estimated 6 weeks the doctor gave me as I really need to be working and driving! I did find that when I wore the boot to sleep last night that I woke up to my knee rather stiff and painful…so I put a pillow under my knee and I suppose it helped a little…anyone else experience this? I feel I read more stories of a jone’s fracture not healing with out surgery than healing…anyone know the statistics on this….I read somewhere that its 50/50…is this really true? I don’t find that very promising!
March 26, 2009 at 1:51 pm
Ashley,
My doctor gave me the 50/50 ratio on the first day – so I decided to go the conservative route and for me, I was in the lucky half.
Just so you know, 6 weeks is a very short time for this fracture to heal. At 5 weeks, my x ray showed no healing – at 10 weeks, there were some signs of healing. Although I was out of the boot at 3 months and my 4 month xray looked good, it was still not 100% healed. It can take 6 months – 1 year.
And now that my foot is doing OK, I am catching up on some other appointments. Had my dental cleaning yesterday and looks like I’ll be having a root canal next week. If it’s not one thing, it’s another.
We are having a spring blizzard today – everything is closing in town – so I am definitely not going out in this weather.
Ginger – your toenails look so nice! You deserve a pedicure every week. Glad to read that you got out for a hike – good for you – you sound like an awesome person with a positive attitude when life throw’s you these curves.
Kathy
Kathy
March 26, 2009 at 2:06 pm
Hi Kathy,
I figure that the six weeks is probably a long shot seeing as to some people here are talking about months and months! I am just being hopeful…I am 23… I am a college graduate… and work several jobs that require ALOT of driving AND walking. I don’t care to be able to run every day or anything…I just want to walk and drive. I will settle for walking with one crutch…I just can not use two. Can I expect to be able to do that as long as some healing is noted in 6 weeks… Any ideas? I am thinking that maybe I should try to get an x-ray before the six weeks is up. I feel like I have asked many questions but I find this forum to be very insightful and supportive!
Ashley
March 26, 2009 at 6:15 pm
Hi Ashley,
Getting an xray earlier than 6 weeks would really not be wise – you need to give it time to heal, and as much as you want to be up driving and walking, you have to be patient. Maybe at 6 weeks if the bone shows some healing, then your doctor may allow you to start some weight bearing.
Are you not able to use 2 crutches because of your CP? If it’s because you are having trouble getting use to walking with 2 crutches, believe me, in just a few days
you’ll be pretty comfortable with them.
I would also ask your doctor for a temporary handicap parking permit. If you go out with your boyfriend and he is driving, it’s nice to park close to the store, restaurant, etc. Or as I did before I got the permit, my husband would leave me off right in front – this was after the first month when I was already in the boot. I really did spend the month of Nov. in bed with the cast and my cat.
Please – ask any questions you have.
Kathy
March 26, 2009 at 6:30 pm
Ashley,
I am with Kathy in thinking that 6 weeks might be a bit to optimistic for the kind of healing you are looking for – but maybe you will be lucky. The reason your ortho wants you to live in the boot is that immobility is also just as important as NWB in the early weeks. I had asked my OS the same thing when he applied a cast right up to my knee and exposing only 3 of 5 toes. How does that make sense, I wondered – I’d broken a foot not my lower leg. He explained that there must be absolute immobility of the ankle and foot to keep the ends of the bones from displacing or decreasing the chances of the gap widening in addition to keeping the tendon from pulling the bone apart. Once there is sufficient new bone growth, then mobility and limited weight bearing is beneficial as these will further stimulate bone growth. I know there are a lot of different treatment options and it can become confusing very quickly if you read all of these postings. The common thread for those, like myself, who healed without surgery, seems to be total NWB and immobility for 6-12 weeks with a gradual return to weight bearing in a boot for some weeks after that. I know it’s discouraging at first, but time passes and you do get there. I truly wish you the best for a speedy recovery.
March 26, 2009 at 10:02 pm
Hi Ashley,
If at all possible try to use 2 crutches, or just stay off your foot, I only used one crutch and nine months later ended up having surgery. If I had my time again I would have insisted on a hard cast instead of the boot, that way I would have been completely nwb.
Also taking into account your cp if you show no signs of healing by 6 weeks, even if other think its too early, I would ask you doctor for the surgery as you will be back on your feet quicker.
Ginger I think you will find that the reason you can’t feel the plate/screw etc is that your foot/calf is starting to waste away. After my surgery I hated wearing the cast as my foot was quite swollen but as the weeks the pressure against the incision was not so pronounced.
Frank – when I started exercising after my surgey I used the stationary bike and then moved onto the cross trainer (epilyptical machine), I did not use the treadmill for quite sometime.
Good luck to everyone.
March 31, 2009 at 11:44 pm
Hey Everybody,
If I had it to do over again, I would go ahead with the surgery as soon as possible for my break. I’m 4 months & 1 week out from my injury – 3 weeks out from surgery. Surgery was very easy for me, as I had a screw put in. I’m cleared to weight-bear in a boot-cast, & am in some considerate pain when walking. Have finally begun to really feel the depression & frustration that comes with this injury.
I would always get my hopes up with each visit to the doctor, only to have very little healing. And all of their limitless opinions . . . I went through 3 orthopedic docs before I finally found one that made sense. One orthopedic foot doctor told me it just might not ever heal & I didn’t have to come back & see him if I didn’t want to. Well, I’m no doctor but to just walk around on a broken bone the rest of your life?? That didn’t sound right. The second doc they sent me to was an orthopedist but not a “foot” guy, so I didn’t trust him, either. Finally I found the guy who told me that the option of surgery was up to me, but the longer it went unhealed, the more complicated surgery would end up if it turned into a “non-union” fracture.
For me, the surgery went fine but for some reason have begun to mourn the loss of 4 months of my life (& I will be adding to that). Am also getting tired of that damn black boot. Have taken disability for work (a 2nd time) & praying they won’t lay me off when I finally come back. I think I’m just frustrated with not being able to do the things I would love to do.
I had thought this was the end, but when asked the doc what would happen if the bone still didn’t heal after having the screw put in, he said I would have to have a bone graft. have any of you had this done?? Is it any worse than just having a screw put in? Oh well, I’ve gone through a period of crutches twice now, so what’s one more time . . .
Dalton – I’m no athlete but if that foot is going to take more pounding with a future career in basketball, I’d get the surgery. A lot of these fractures end up re-breaking, at least according to what I’ve been told. In fact, my sprain that led to my fracture was so bad that I asked if I needed ligaments repaired. Doc said they only usually repair ligaments in serious athletes, so you might have them look into your ankle as well.
April 1, 2009 at 12:21 am
Dalton,
I found this abstract on Jones’ fractures & basketball players at Springerlink.com It’s from a 1999 study, so a little old, but thought I’d share. This is just a research study, so I wouldn’t take it as your medical advice, but there may be more stuff out there on the web related to this injury & basketball.
Abstract: A prospective nonrandomized study was made of 17 basketball players with fractures of the proximal third of the shaft of the fifth metatarsal. Eight had acute fractures, which were treated with a cast without weight-bearing, and the other nine had stress fractures for which percutaneous compression screwing was initially used. In the first group, union was obtained in four cases in an average of 9 weeks, with resumption of sport by12 weeks. Three had a good outcome and the fourth was fair. The other four cases, which had not healed after 12 weeks of immobilization, were subsequently treated using compression screws. Resumption of sport was achieved 20–24 weeks after the fracture. Two of these had a good result; in the other two the results were fair. Of the nine patients with stress fractures in which a screw was inserted, all healed between 8 and 14 weeks and returned to sport within 7–12 weeks. Seven had a good result and the other two only fair. There was one intraoperative complication, but no postoperative complications, such as nonunion or refracture, were observed. Even if the non-operative treatment is able to provide a good result, immobilization without weight-bearing does not guarantee healing. In this series, percutaneous screw fixation was able to achieve successful healing in a short period of time. Thus, this procedure seems to be preferable for primary treatment of this lesion in athletes.
April 1, 2009 at 8:01 am
Lee:
I had the ORIF bone graft surgery almost 5 weeks ago — I’d gone nearly 6 months non-union, so I was no longer a candidate for screw placement. At first, I didn’t understand why I had to have a more complicated surgery, and couldn’t seem to find anyone here who’d had it, but it all makes more sense to me now.
The surgery itself was a very pleasant experience for me, considering. The hard part for me to accept was the extended healing time. In surgery, they filed down both broken ends of bone (essentially removed a section of my 5th meta to expose fresh and flat-surfaced bone tissue), plated them apart with 4 screws, and then placed a section of bone from my heel in the gap.
Instead of 6-8 weeks recovery, I can’t even begin to bear weight or start rehab until 3 months post-op — the bone graft has to make a solid union on both ends first. I was put in a hard cast and might get it off next Thursday and go back into the dreaded boot.
I wanted to share… I hit a pretty awful despair about 2 weeks after surgery, but found out it was a side effect of the pain meds I was on. I quit taking them that day. I know exactly what you mean about losing so much time — it’s like being strapped on an amusement park ride with no awareness of when you can finally get off.
At first, I was mortified when I saw how big the incisions were. But 5 weeks later, I’m impressed with how perfectly straight and flat the cuts are healing. As much as I want to wail and rant at my doctor for losing the last 7 months of my life, he’s really done a stellar job and I hope and pray it’s reflected in how everything heals this time.
I hope you’re doing well, Lee… it must feel so wonderful to be walking! :) Keep in touch with all of us here!
Ginger
April 2, 2009 at 1:02 am
Hi,
For those of you who are still walking in the boot or supportive shoe were you also cleared to drive at that time? I really need to get back to work as soon as possible (one of my jobs is mostly desk work) but need to be able to drive myself as there is some driving required throughout my shift.
Ginger- I wish you the best of luck healing…you deserve to be able to put this behind you…7 months is long enough!
Thanks :) I hope everyone is doing well!
April 2, 2009 at 1:17 am
Oh and my fracture is in my right foot (of course) and I drive an automatic. I know the boot probably safe to drive in…but maybe another supportive shoe to drive in once cleared to walk again? I’m just getting so anxious already even though I don’t go for more xrays till may 5th. I’m just hoping for the best I guess :)
April 2, 2009 at 4:22 am
Ashley I don’t think you could legally (in Oz) or safely drive in the boot. I know its a pain as I also broke my right foot and only had two days off from work – in hindsight I should have taken weeks. I ended up relying on friends, family and work mates to drive me to work – A 45 min drive took up to 90 min trip, did this for 8 weeks. When I did start to drive even though fracture had not healed I used a pair of stiff leather hiking boots.
April 2, 2009 at 9:30 am
My fracture is right foot… It took a while to get the hang of it, but I’ve been driving left footed the whole time. I’m a single mom and live in a rural area, so I had no choice. My doctor was actually the one who suggested it.
April 2, 2009 at 10:54 am
Hi Ashley:
I also learned to drive with my left foot–I could only rely on friends/family for so long. It was awkward at first–I had a hard time adjusting to the brake, but after a day or so, I felt perfectly fine driving around like that. I am not sure the legalities of it, but I have a child to get around, I travel for my job, my husband travels etc….
April 2, 2009 at 3:52 pm
Thanks everyone! Driving left footed isn’t an option for me….I have Cerebral Palsy that affects my left side. So thats out of the question. Guess I will just be taking the boot off and wearing something else when I have to drive!
April 3, 2009 at 9:22 am
Wow, now that I’ve started getting back in the gym heavily, I’m definitely feeling my foot. I’m switching my cardio around from treadmill to bike, but I think the hardest part is the strength training on lower half. I’m doing lots of lunges, balance/stability routines, and I can really feel the stress in my foot and ankles. The other thing I notice stemming from this injury is tendonitis in my wrists–I am actually wondering if all that time on crutches is to blame–both wrists are affected. It is really nice to go from a cast and walking boot to wrist braces. I wear them while I’m at work (typing and all), and I think everyone at my office is beginning to think I’m a total hypochondriac! Anyone else have any after-effects of being on crutches for so long?
April 4, 2009 at 5:59 am
Heather I have problems with my arms especially my right one which I used to push down on to get up from chairs. I sometimes get numbness in my fingers at night time so I got tested for carpal tunnel which came up negative, so now we are checking alternatives. My right arm aches all the time and I’m sure it has to do with being on crutches for so long but will have wait for test results to see what it is. What are your symptoms
April 4, 2009 at 11:14 am
Heather:
I had issues with carpal tunnel after about 3 months on crutches… and after my doctor told me the only option I had was to see a hand specialist, I took matters into my own hands and found ergonomic handles.
http://www.robbinsgrips.com/
I had numbness, tingling, and shooting pain in my hands, wrists and up into my forearms pretty regularly. The handles took some getting used to, but I’ve been on crutches 7 months now, and the pain in my hands has stopped. Hearing you and Meg, though, I wonder if I will experience problems in the future?
The biggest physical problems I’ve had from the crutches are my back and my other foot/leg from carrying me around for so many months. My back has gotten so bad, it keeps me up at night.
I’ll keep following your thread to hear how your progress at the gym goes… When I (finally) start rehab in May, I’m very concerned with how things will go, and I’m interested to hear everyone’s suggestions and frustrations. Are you back to the normal routine with your horses yet? I think you are the person I identify most with in lifestyle and determination. :)
We noticed yesterday that when you feel inside the bone stimulator receiver on my cast with your fingers, you can actually feel the hard, flat surface of one of the screw-heads and the plate through my skin. When I get the cast off next week, it kinda makes me laugh to think I might be able to feel the whole apparatus from the outside. This has definitely been an experience.
I hope everyone has a lovely weekend!!
Ginger :)
April 6, 2009 at 12:04 pm
Mostly it feels like tendonitis in my wrist over carpal tunnel–I don’t get the numbness or tingling at all like what I hear people associate with carpal tunnel, but it just aches all the time, and I notice that my strength in that hand is not what it should be. Like I’m having problems opening bottles, which I’ve never really had problems with. The brace definitely helps while I’m working–no question about that, and I’m thinking I should go ahead and get an ergonomic keyboard (Ginger if this helped with the crutches, it should help with the amount of time I spend on my laptop I think–well–hope). I also had some problems with my back–a lot–while on crutches, and my hips as well. When I started walking again sans walking boot, I went to the chiropractor who said immediately that my right leg was an inch shorter than my left leg from my hips being so far out of alignment. It has helped going back to the chiro, but my insurance doesn’t cover that so I can’t go as often as what I should to get my hips/back adjusted.
Ginger–going back to the gym was so hard–I’ve never had a personal trainer before, but when I was ready to start strength training, I literally had no idea what to do. I felt like the biggest idiot–so, I made sure to get one that has experience with rehab, and most of my exercises incorporate balance/stability, which has been hilarious–I find that I can hardly stand on my right foot, and he makes me do almost everything standing on one foot–although we alternate. It is amazing how weak I had become, but I’m on the right track if I can just get through some aches and pains that I’m not really used to. Also, I’m not totally back to normal on horses–the first time I jumped again I fell off, and while I got right back on and jumped some more, I’ve been holding off because I can feel that I’m not as stable as what I should be. I agree on identifying though–I think we probably have some similar interests related to being outside (I know you are a kayaker–so much fun!) I would say though that when you get back in the gym, and back in your kayak, I think you will be surprised at how much this injury affects every other body part–and the wrist thing is the latest piece of the puzzle that makes me just want to bang my head against the wall!!!
Also Ginger–my little sister has a screw and a plate in her collarbone, and you can see it–mostly the screw all the time, and the plate when she moves her arm in a certain direction. Maybe it will be a great way to introduce yourself at social events–”Wanna see my screw?”
Thanks Meg and Ginger for your feedback!
April 6, 2009 at 12:07 pm
Ginger–those grips for the crutches look great–I wish I had gotten some of those. Orthopedic surgeons everywhere should be offering these as options to patients!
April 7, 2009 at 12:36 pm
Hey Everyone,
Ive not written on here for a while so thought I’d give a little update…!!
Well … I sustained my jones fracture on January 26th I was in a hard cast for 4 weeks, attended fracture clinic and xray showed no healing at all, so I went back into a soft cast for 4 more weeks and went back to fracture clinic and xrays showed … da da da … no healing (but very very tiny amount of cloudyness on the ends of the broken bones) however the consultant said it still may not heal. So I’m now in a walking boot until April 28th and he said if at that stage nothing more has happened I’ll probably go in for the surgery.
So what does everyone think my odds are? Any advice?
I’m just so worried about how this will effect University … :(
Anyways how you all getting on?
Lots of Love x